diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex')
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex | 9414 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9414 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 4e6d3952e76..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-chicago/biblatex-chicago15.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9414 +0,0 @@ -% -% This file documents the biblatex-chicago package, which allows users -% of the biblatex package to format references according to the -% Chicago Manual of Style, 15th edition. -% -\documentclass[a4paper]{article} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage{textcomp} -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -\usepackage[american]{babel} -\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes} -\usepackage{vmargin} -\setpapersize{A4} -\setmarginsrb{1.65in}{.9in}{1.75in}{.6in}{0pt}{0pt}{12pt}{24pt} -\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1in} -\usepackage[colorlinks,urlcolor=blue,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref} -\usepackage[osf]{mathpazo} -\usepackage[scaled]{helvet} -\usepackage[pdftex]{xcolor} -%\usepackage[dvips]{xcolor} -\newcommand{\mycolor}[1]{\textcolor[HTML]{228B22}{#1}} -\usepackage{multicol} -% Some generic settings. -\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}} -\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -\newcommand{\mymarginpar}[1]{\marginpar{\flushright#1}} -\newcommand{\colmarginpar}[1]{\mymarginpar{\mycolor{#1}}} -\newcommand{\mybigspace}{\vspace{\baselineskip}} -\newcommand{\mylittlespace}{\vspace{.5\baselineskip}} -\makeatletter -\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection - {section}% - {1}% - {0mm}% - {\baselineskip}% - {\baselineskip}% - {\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries}}% -\renewcommand{\subsection}{\@startsection - {subsection}% - {1}% - {0mm}% - {\baselineskip}% - {.5\baselineskip}% - {\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries}}% -\renewcommand{\subsubsection}{\@startsection - {subsubsection}% - {1}% - {0mm}% - {\baselineskip}% - {.5\baselineskip}% - {\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries}}% -\makeatother -\begin{document} -\begin{center} - \sffamily\large\bfseries The biblatex-chicago package: \\ - 15th-edition style files for biblatex - -\vspace{.3\baselineskip} -\sffamily\normalsize\bfseries David Fussner\qquad Version 0.9.9g (beta) \\ -\href{mailto:djf027@googlemail.com}{djf027@googlemail.com}\\ \today - -\end{center} -\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} -\begin{multicols}{2} -\footnotesize -\tableofcontents -\end{multicols} -\normalsize -\vspace{-.5\baselineskip} -\section{Notice} -\label{sec:Notice} - -\textbf{This file documents the \textsf{biblatex} style files - implementing the 15th edition of \emph{The Chicago Manual of Style}. - This edition has been superseded by the 16th edition, documented in - \textsf{biblatex-chicago.pdf}. There may still be some users, - however, who wish to continue using the 15th-edition styles, so I am - continuing to provide them, though I am now marking them as - \enquote{strongly deprecated,} and will soon mark them as - \enquote{obsolete.} I have included very few fixes in this release - cycle, enough so that my test files do still compile correctly. The - main reason to continue using these files is perhaps a desire not to - interrupt a work-in-progress. Given how little attention they are - currently receiving, however, I encourage all users of both the - \textsf{authordate15} and \textsf{notes15} styles to upgrade to the - current release of the 16th-edition styles as soon as may be - practicable. If the changes to the author-date style's treatment of - titles has thus far discouraged you from upgrading, please be aware - that the new \mycolor{\textsf{authordate-trad}} style retains the - traditional Chicago sentence-style capitalization (and absence of - quotation marks) in titles while in all other respects adhering to - the 16th-edition specification. I can't promise that switching to a - newer style will be entirely painless, but if you read through the - RELEASE file you'll find that it won't, under ordinary - circumstances, require Herculean efforts. \mylittlespace \\ The - package remains beta software. If it seems like it could be of use - to you, yet it doesn't do something you need/want it to do, please - feel free to let me know, and of course any suggestions for solving - problems more elegantly or accurately would be most welcome.} - -\mylittlespace\textbf{Important Note:} If you have used -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} before, please make sure you have read the -RELEASE file that came with the package. It details the changes -you'll need to make to your .bib database in order for it to work -properly with this release. If you are new to these styles, please -read on. - -\section{Quickstart} -\reversemarginpar - -%\enlargethispage{-3\baselineskip} - -The \textsf{biblatex-chicago} package is designed for writers who wish -to use \LaTeX\ and \textsf{biblatex}, and who either want or need to -format their references according to one of the specifications defined -by the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}. This package includes both the -\emph{Manual's} \enquote{author-date} system, favored by many -disciplines in the sciences and social sciences, and its -\enquote{notes \&\ bibliography} style, generally favored in the -humanities. The latter code produces a full reference in a first -footnote, shorter references in subsequent notes, and a full reference -in the bibliography. Some authors prefer to use the shorter note form -even for the first occurrence, relying on the bibliography to provide -the full information. This, too, is supported by the code. The -author-date style produces a short, in-text citation inside -parentheses --- (Author Year) --- keyed to a list of references where -entries start with the same name and year. - -\mylittlespace The documentation you are reading covers both of these -Chicago styles and their variants. Much of what follows is relevant -to all users, but I have decided, after some experimentation, to keep -the instructions for the two styles separate, at least in -sections~\ref{sec:Spec} and \ref{sec:authdate}. Information provided -under one style will often duplicate that found under the other, but -efficiency's loss should, I hope, be clarity's gain, and much of what -you learn using one style will be applicable without alteration to the -other. Throughout the documentation, any \mycolor{green} text -\colmarginpar{\textsf{New!}} indicates something \mycolor{new} in this -release. - -\mylittlespace Here's a list of things you will need in order to use -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}: - -\begin{itemize}{}{} -\item Philipp Lehman's \textsf{biblatex} package, of course! You - should use the latest version(s) --- 1.7 or 2.9a --- as those - versions have been tested more thoroughly than any other, meaning - that these style files may well not function properly with earlier - iterations of \textsf{biblatex}. Lehman's tools require several - packages, and he strongly recommends several more: - \begin{itemize}{}{} - \item e-\TeX\ (required) - \item \textsf{etoolbox} --- available from CTAN (required) - \item \textsf{keyval} --- a standard package (required) - \item \textsf{ifthen} --- a standard package (required) - \item \textsf{url} --- a standard package (required) - \item \textsf{babel} --- a standard package (\emph{strongly} - recommended) - \item \textsf{csquotes} --- available from CTAN (recommended). - Please upgrade to the latest version of \textsf{csquotes} (5.1b). - \item \textsf{bibtex8} --- a replacement for \textsc{Bib}\TeX, which - can, with the right com\-mand-line switches, process very large - .bib files. It also does the right thing when alphabetizing - non-ASCII entries. It is available from CTAN, but please be aware - that this database parser no longer suffices if you are using the - Chicago author-date style with any version of \textsf{biblatex} - from version 1.5 onwards. For that style you must use the - following: - \item \textsf{Biber} --- the next-generation \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ - replacement, which is available from SourceForge. You should use - the latest version, 1.9, to work with \textsf{biblatex} 2.9a, and - it is required for users who are either using the author-date - style or processing a .bib file in Unicode. See - \textsf{cms15-dates-sample.pdf} for more details. - \end{itemize} -\item The line: - \begin{quote} - \cmd{usepackage[\mycolor{notes15}]\{biblatex-chicago\}} - \end{quote} - in your document preamble to load the 15th-edition notes \&\ - bibliography style, or the line: - \begin{quote} - \cmd{usepackage[\mycolor{authordate15},backend=biber]\{biblatex-chicago\}} - \end{quote} - to load the 15th-edition author-date style. Any other options you - usually pass to \textsf{biblatex} can be given to - \textsf{biblatex-chicago} instead, but loading it this way sets up a - number of other parameters automatically. You can also load the - package via the traditional \cmd{usepackage\{biblatex\}}, adding - \mycolor{\texttt{style=chicago-notes15}} or - \mycolor{\texttt{style=chicago-authordate15}}, but these are mainly - for those who wish to set much of the low-level formatting of their - document themselves. Please see sections~\ref{sec:loading} and - \ref{sec:loading:auth} below for a fuller discussion of the issues - involved here. -\item You can use - \cmd{usepackage[\mycolor{notes15},short]\{biblatex-chicago\}} to get - the short note format even in the first reference of a notes \&\ - bibliography document, letting the bibliography provide the full - reference. -\item If you are accustomed to using the \textsf{natbib} compatibility - option with \textsf{biblatex}, then you can continue to do so with - \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. If you are using - \cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}} to load the package, then the - option must be the plain \texttt{natbib} rather than - \texttt{natbib=true}. If you use the latter, you'll get a - \textsf{keyval} error. Please see sections~\ref{sec:useropts} and - \ref{sec:authuseropts}, below. -\item By far the simplest setup is to use \textsf{babel}, and to have - \texttt{american} as the main text language. As before, - \textsf{babel}-less setups, and also those choosing \texttt{english} - as the main text language, should work out of the box. - \textsf{Biblatex-chicago} also now provides support for German and - French. Please see below (section~\ref{sec:international}) for a - fuller explanation of all the options. -\item The \mycolor{\textsf{chicago-notes15.bbx}}, - \mycolor{\textsf{chicago-notes15.cbx}}, - \mycolor{\textsf{chicago-authordate15.cbx}}, - \mycolor{\textsf{chi\-cago-authordate15.bbx}}, - \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, \textsf{cms-am\-erican.lbx}, - \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, \textsf{cms-german.lbx}, and - \textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx} files from \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, - installed either in a system-wide \TeX\ directory, or in the working - directory where you keep your *.tex files. The .zip file from CTAN - contains several subdirectories to help keep the growing number of - files organized, so the files listed above can be found in the - \texttt{latex/} subdirectory, itself further divided into the - \texttt{bbx/}, \texttt{cbx/}, and \texttt{lbx/} subdirectories. If - you install in a system-wide directory, I recommend following - standard advice and using - \texttt{<TEXMFLOCAL>/tex/latex/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-chicago}, - where \texttt{<TEXMFLOCAL>} is the root of your local \TeX\ - installation --- for example, and depending on your system and - preferences, \texttt{/usr/share/texmf-local}, - \texttt{/usr/local/share/texmf}, or \texttt{C:\textbackslash{}Local - TeX Files\textbackslash}. Then you can copy the contents of the - \texttt{latex/} directory there, subdirectories and all. (If you - install into your working directory, then you'll need to copy the - files directly there, without subdirectories.) Of course, if you - choose to place them anywhere in the \texttt{texmf} tree, you'll - need to update the file name database to make sure \TeX\ can find - them. -\item Philipp Lehman's very clear and detailed documentation of the - \textsf{biblatex} system, available in his package as - \textsf{biblatex.pdf}. Here he explains why you might want to use - the system, the rules for constructing .bib files for it, and the - (numerous) methods at your disposal for modifying the formatted - output. -\item The annotated bibliography files \textsf{notes-test.bib} and - \textsf{dates-test.bib}, which will acquaint you with most of the - details on how to get started constructing your own .bib files for - use with the two \textsf{biblatex-chicago} styles. -\item The files \textsf{cms15-notes-sample.pdf} and - \textsf{cms15-dates-sample.pdf}. The first shows how my system - processes \textsf{notes-test.bib} and - \textsf{cms15-notes-sample.tex}, in both footnotes and bibliography, - the second is the result of processing \textsf{dates-test.bib} and - \textsf{cms15-dates-sample.tex}. All of these files are in - \texttt{doc/examples/}. -\item The file you are reading, \textsf{biblatex-chicago15.pdf}, which - aims to be as complete a description as possible of the rules for - creating a .bib file that will, when processed by \LaTeX\ and - \textsc{Bib}\TeX, at least somewhat ease the burden when you try to - implement the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}'s specifications. - These docs may seem frustratingly over-long, but remember that you - only need to read the part(s) that apply to the style in which you - are interested. Much of the information in section~\ref{sec:Spec} - is duplicated in section~\ref{sec:authdate}, so even if you have a - need for both styles then using one will be excellent preparation - for the other. If you have used a previous version of this package, - please pay particular attention to the sections on Obsolete and - Deprecated Features, starting on page~\pageref{deprec:obsol}. You - will find the seven previous files in the \texttt{doc/} subdirectory - once you've extracted \textsf{biblatex-chicago.zip}. If you wish to - place them in a system-wide directory, I would recommend - \texttt{<TEXMFLOCAL>/doc/latex/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-chicago}, - all the while remembering, of course, to update the file name - database afterward. (Let me reiterate, also, that if you currently - have quoted material in your .bib file, and are using \cmd{enquote} - or the standard \LaTeX\ mechanisms there, then the simplest - procedure is always to use \cmd{mkbibquote} instead in order to - ensure that punctuation works out right.) -\item Access to a copy of \emph{The Chicago Manual of Style} itself, - which naturally contains incomparably more information than I can - hope to present here. It should always be your first port of call - when any doubts arise as to exactly what the specification requires. -\end{itemize} - -\subsection{License} -\label{sec:lppl} - -Copyright © 2008--2014 David Fussner. This package is -author-maintained. This work may be copied, distributed and/or -modified under the conditions of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License, -either version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later -version. The latest version of this license is in -http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt and version 1.3 or later is part -of all distributions of \LaTeX\ version 2005/12/01 or later. This -software is provided \enquote{as is,} without warranty of any kind, -either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the -implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular -purpose. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\subsection{Acknowledgements} -\label{sec:acknowl} - -Even a cursory glance at the cbx and bbx files in the package will -demonstrate how much of Lehman's code from \textsf{biblatex} I've -adapted and re-used, and I've also followed some of the advice he gave -to others in the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup. He has been -instrumental in improving the contextual capitalization procedures of -which the style makes such frequent use, and his advice on -constructing \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} was invaluable. The code -for formatting the footnote marks, and that for printing the -separating rule only after a run-on note, I've adapted from the -\textsf{footmisc} package by Robin Fairbairns, and I've borrowed ideas -for the \texttt{shorthandibid} option from Dominik Waßenhoven's -\textsf{biblatex-dw} package. I am very grateful to Baldur -Kristinsson for providing the Icelandic localization, and to Håkon -Malmedal for the Norwegian localizations. Kazuo Teramoto and Gildas -Hamel both sent patches to improve the package, and there may be other -\LaTeX\ code I've appropriated and forgotten, in which case please -remind me. Finally, Charles Schaum and Joseph Reagle Jr.\ were both -extremely generous with their help and advice during the development -of this package, and have both continued indefatigably to test it and -suggest needed improvements. They were particularly instrumental in -encouraging the greatest possible degree of compatibility with other -\textsf{biblatex} styles. Indeed, if the task of adapting .bib files -for use with the Chicago style seems onerous now, you should have -tried it before they got their hands on it. - -\section{Detailed Introduction} -\label{sec:Intro} - -The \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}, implemented here in its 15th -edition, has long, in America at least, been one of the most -influential style guides for writers and publishers. While one's -choices are now perhaps more extensive than ever, the \emph{Manual} at -least still provides a widely-recognized, and widely-utilized, -standard. Indeed, when you add to this the sheer completeness of the -specification, its detailed instructions for referencing an enormous -number of different kinds of source material, then your choice (or -your publisher's choice) of the \emph{Manual} as a style guide seems -set to be a happy one. - -\mylittlespace These very strengths, however, also make the style -difficult to use. Admittedly, the \emph{Manual} does leave room for -\enquote{inventive solutions} to particular problems (17.2), and it -also emphasizes consistency within a work, as opposed to rigid -adherence to the specification, at least when writer and publisher -agree (17.18). Sometimes a publisher demands such adherence, however, -and anyone who has attempted to produce it may well come away with the -impression that the specification itself is somewhat idiosyncratic in -its complexity, and I can't help but agree. In the notes \&\ -bibliography style, the numerous differences in punctuation (and -strings identifying translators, editors, and the like) between -footnotes and bibliographies and the sometimes unusual location of -page numbers; in both styles the distinction between \enquote{journal} -and \enquote{magazine,} and the formatting differences between (e.g.) -a work from antiquity and one from the Renaissance, all of these tend -to overburden the writer who wants to comply with the standard. Many -of these complexities, in truth, make the specification very nearly -impossible to implement straightforwardly in a system like -\textsc{Bib}\TeX\ --- options multiply, each requiring a particular -sort of formatting, until one almost reaches the point of believing -that every individual book or article should have its own entry type. -Completeness and usability tend each to exclude the other, so the code -you have before you is a first attempt to achieve the former without -utterly sacrificing the latter. - -\subsection*{What \textsf{biblatex-chicago} can and can't do} -\label{sec:bltries} - -In short, the \textsf{biblatex} style files in this package try to -simplify the task of following the two Chicago specifications. In the -notes \&\ bibliography style, the two sorts of reference are treated -separately (as are the two different note forms, long and short), and -you can choose always to use the short note form, even at the first -citation. In the author-date style, a series of options allows you to -choose which date (original printing, reprint, or both) appears in -citations and at the head of entries in the list of references. In -both styles, punctuation is placed within quotation marks when needed, -and as a general rule as many parts of the style as possible are -implemented as transparently as possible. Thanks to advice I received -from Joseph Reagle Jr.\ and Charles Schaum while these files were a -work in progress, I have attended as carefully as I can to backward -compatibility with the standard \textsf{biblatex} styles, and have -attempted to minimize both any changes you need to make to achieve -compliance with the Chicago specification, and indeed also any changes -necessary to switch between the two Chicago styles. There is no doubt -room for improvement on this score, but even now, for a substantial -number of entries, any well-constructed .bib file that works for other -\textsf{biblatex} styles will \enquote{just work} under -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. By no means, however, will all entries in -such a .bib file produce equally satisfactory results. Using this -documentation and the examples in \textsf{dates-test.bib} and/or -\textsf{notes-test.bib}, it should be possible to achieve compliance, -though the amount of revision necessary to do so will vary -significantly from .bib file to .bib file. Conversely, once you have -created a database for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it won't necessarily -work well with other \textsf{biblatex} styles. Indeed, most, quite -possibly all, users will find that they need to use special formatting -macros within the .bib file that would make such a file unusable in -any other context. I strongly recommend, if you want to experiment -with this style, that you work on a copy of any .bib files that are -important to you, until you have determined that this package does -what you need/want it to do. - -\mylittlespace When I first began working on this package, I made the -decision to alter as little as possible the main files from Lehman's -\textsf{biblatex}, so that my .bbx and .cbx files would use his -original \LaTeX\ .sty file and \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ .bst file. As you -proceed, you will no doubt encounter some of the consequences of this -decision, with certain fields and entry types in the .bib file having -less-than-memorable names because I chose to use the supplementary -ones provided by \textsf{biblatex.bst} rather than alter that file. I -intended then, if it turned out that anyone besides myself actually -used \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, to ask Mr.\ Lehman to include more -descriptive names for these few entry types and fields in -biblatex.bst, if he were willing. As luck would have it, several new -types appeared in \textsf{biblatex} 0.8, many of which I have -incorporated as replacements for the custom entry types I defined -before. If a consensus emerges about how best to assign the data to -various fields in such entries, then I shall adopt it. In the -meantime, as you will see below, I have made two of the old custom -types obsolete, and recycled the third for an entirely new purpose. -Needless to say, I'm open to advice and suggestions on this score. - -\section{The Specification:\ Notes\,\&\,Bibliography} -\label{sec:Spec} - -In what follows, I attempt to explain all the parts of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} that might be considered somehow -\enquote{non standard,} at least with respect to the styles included -with \textsf{biblatex} itself, though in the section on entry fields I -have also duplicated a lot of the information in -\textsf{biblatex.pdf}, which I hope won't badly annoy expert users of -the system. Headings in \mycolor{green} \colmarginpar{\textsf{New in - this release}} indicate material new to this release, or -occasionally old material that has undergone significant revision. -Numbers in parentheses refer to sections of the \emph{Chicago Manual - of Style}, 15th edition. The file \textsf{notes-test.bib} contains -many examples from the \emph{Manual} which, when processed using -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, should produce the same output as you -see in the \emph{Manual} itself, or at least compliant output, where -the specifications are vague or open to interpretation, a state of -affairs which does sometimes occur. I have provided -\textsf{cms-notes-sample.pdf}, which shows how my system processes -\textsf{notes-test.bib}, and I have also included the reference keys -from the latter file below in parentheses. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\subsection{Entry Types} -\label{sec:entrytypes} - -The complete list of entry types currently available in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, minus the odd \textsf{biblatex} -alias, is as follows: \mycolor{\textbf{article}}, \textbf{artwork}, -\textbf{audio}, \textbf{book}, \textbf{bookinbook}, \textbf{booklet}, -\textbf{collection}, \textbf{customc}, \textbf{image}, -\textbf{inbook}, \textbf{incollection}, \textbf{inproceedings}, -\textbf{inreference}, \textbf{letter}, \textbf{manual},\textbf{misc}, -\textbf{music}, \textbf{online} (with its alias \textbf{www}), -\textbf{patent}, \textbf{periodical}, \textbf{proceedings}, -\textbf{reference}, \textbf{report} (with its alias -\textbf{techreport}), \mycolor{\textbf{review}}, \textbf{suppbook}, -\textbf{suppcollection}, \textbf{suppperiodical}, \textbf{thesis} -(with its aliases \textbf{mastersthesis} and \textbf{phdthesis}), -\textbf{unpublished}, and \textbf{video}. - -\mylittlespace What follows is an attempt to specify all the -differences between these types and the standard provided by -\textsf{biblatex}. If an entry type isn't discussed here, then it is -safe to assume that it works as it does in the standard styles. In -general, I have attempted not to discuss specific entry fields here, -unless such a field is crucial to the overall operation of a given -entry type. As a general and important rule, most entry types require -very few fields when you use \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, so it -seemed to me better to gather information pertaining to fields in the -next section. - -\mybigspace The \colmarginpar{\textbf{article}} \emph{Chicago Manual of - Style} (17.148) recognizes three different sorts of periodical -publication, \enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and -\enquote{newspapers.} The first (17.150) includes \enquote{scholarly - or professional periodicals available mainly by subscription,} while -the second refers to \enquote{weekly or monthly} publications that are -\enquote{available either by subscription or in individual issues at - bookstores or newsstands.} \enquote{Magazines} will tend to be -\enquote{more accessible to general readers,} and typically won't have -a volume number. Indeed, by fiat I declare that should you need to -refer to a journal that identifies its issues mainly by year, month, -or week, then for the purposes of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} such -a publication is a \enquote{magazine,} and not a \enquote{journal.} - -\mylittlespace Now, for articles in \enquote{journals} you can simply -use the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ --- and indeed \textsf{biblatex} ---- \textsf{article} entry type, which will work as expected and set -off the page numbers with a colon, as required by the \emph{Manual}. -If, however, you need to refer to a \enquote{magazine} or a -\enquote{newspaper,} then you need to add an \textsf{entrysubtype} -field containing the exact string \texttt{magazine}. The main -formatting differences between a \texttt{magazine} (which includes -both \enquote{magazines} and \enquote{newspapers}) and a plain -\textsf{article} are that the year isn't placed within parentheses, -and that page numbers are set off by a comma rather than a colon. -Otherwise, the two sorts of reference have much in common. (For -\textsf{article}, see \emph{Manual} 17.154--181; batson, -beattie:crime, friedman:learning, garaud:gatine, garrett, hlatky:hrt, -kern, lewis, loften:hamlet, mcmillen:antebellum, warr:ellison, -white:callimachus. For \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, see -17.166, 17.182--198; assocpress:gun, morgenson:market, reaves:rosen, -rozner:liberation, stenger:privacy.) - -\mylittlespace It gets worse. The \emph{Manual} treats reviews (of -books, plays, performances, etc.) as a sort of recognizable subset of -\enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and \enquote{newspapers,} -distinguished mainly by the way one formats the title of the review -itself. In \textsf{biblatex 0.7}, happily, Lehman provided a -\textsf{review} entry type which will handle a large subset of such -citations, though not all. The key rule is this: if a review has a -separate, non-generic title (gibbard; osborne:poison) in addition to -something that reads like \enquote{review of \ldots,} then you need an -\textsf{article} entry, with or without the \texttt{magazine} -\textsf{entrysubtype}, depending on the sort of publication containing -the review. If the only title is the generic \enquote{review of - \ldots,} for example, then you'll need the \textsf{review} entry -type, with or without this same \textsf{entrysubtype} toggle using -\texttt{magazine}. On \textsf{review} entries, see below. (The -curious reader will no doubt notice that the code for formatting any -sort of review still exists in \textsf{article}, as it was initially -designed for \textsf{biblatex 0.6}, but this new arrangement is -somewhat simpler and therefore, I hope, better.) - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace In the case of a review with a specific as well as a -generic title, the former goes in the \textsf{title} field, and the -latter in the \textsf{titleaddon} field. Standard \textsf{biblatex} -intends this field for use with additions to titles that may need to -be formatted differently from the titles themselves, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} uses it in just this way, with the -additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the \textsf{title} -entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type, providing a fairly -powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -to do what you want. Here, however, if all you need is a -\textsf{titleaddon}, then you want to switch to the \textsf{review} -type, where you can simply use the \textsf{title} field instead. - -\mylittlespace No less than six more things need explication here. -First, since the \emph{Manual} specifies that much of what goes into a -\textsf{titleaddon} field stays unformatted --- no italics, no -quotation marks --- this plain style is the default for such text, -which means that you'll have to format any titles within -\textsf{titleaddon} yourself, e.g., with \cmd{mkbibemph\{\}}. Second, -the \emph{Manual} specifies a similar plain style for the titles of -other sorts of material found in \enquote{magazines} and -\enquote{newspapers,} e.g., obituaries, letters to the editor, -interviews, the names of regular columns, and the like. References -may contain both the title of an individual article and the name of -the regular column, in which case the former should go, as usual, in a -\textsf{title} field, and the latter in \textsf{titleaddon}. As with -reviews proper, if there is only the generic title, then you want the -\textsf{review} entry type. (See 17.188, 17.190, 17.193; -morgenson:market, reaves:rosen.) - -\mylittlespace Third, the \emph{Manual} suggests that, in the case of -\enquote{unsigned newspaper articles or features \ldots the name of - the newspaper stands in place of the author} (17.192). It doesn't -always carry through on this in its own presentation of newspaper -citations (see esp.\ 17.188), but I've implemented their -recommendation nonetheless, which means that in an \textsf{article} -entry, \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, or in a -\textsf{review} entry, \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, and -only in such entries, a missing \textsf{author} field results in the -name of the periodical (in the \textsf{journaltitle} field) being used -as the missing author. If, for reasons of emphasis or merely because -of personal preference, you wish to keep the \textsf{title} in initial -position, then you need to define the \textsf{author} using, -effectively, anything at all, then set \texttt{useauthor=false} in the -\textsf{options} field. (The \cmd{isdot} macro in the \textsf{author} -field no longer works on its own under \textsf{biblatex 1.6} and -later, so you may need to change your .bib files when you upgrade.) -Note that if you choose to use the name of the newspaper as an author, -then you'll need a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure that the -bibliography entry is alphabetized by \textsf{journaltitle} rather -than by \textsf{title}. The provision of a \textsf{shortauthor} field -is no longer necessary, as in its absence the package automatically -takes it from \textsf{journaltitle}. (See lakeforester:pushcarts.) - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Fourth, if you've been using -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} for a while, you may remember using -the single-letter \cmd{bibstring} mechanism in order to help -\textsf{biblatex} decide where to capitalize a wide variety of strings -in numerous entry fields. This mechanism was particularly common in -all the periodical types, but if you've had a look in -\textsf{notes-test.bib} while following this documentation, you'll -have noticed that it no longer appears there. The regular whole-word -bibstrings still work as normal, but the single-letter ones are now -obsolete, replaced by Lehman's macro \cmd{autocap}, which itself only -occurs twice in \textsf{notes-test.bib}. Basically, in certain -fields, just beginning your data with a lowercase letter activates the -mechanism for capitalizing that letter depending on its context within -a note or bibliography entry. Please see \textbf{\textbackslash - autocap} below for the details, but both the \textsf{titleaddon} and -\textsf{note} fields are among those treating their data this way, and -since both appear regularly in \textsf{article} entries, I thought the -problem merited a preliminary mention here. - -\mylittlespace Fifth, if you need to cite an entire issue of any sort -of periodical, rather than one article in an issue, then the -\textsf{periodical} entry type, once again with or without the -\texttt{magazine} toggle in \textsf{entrysubtype}, is what you'll -need. (You can also use the \textsf{article} type, placing what would -normally be the \textsf{issuetitle} in the \textsf{title} field and -retaining the usual \textsf{journaltitle} field, but this arrangement -isn't compatible with standard \textsf{biblatex}.) The \textsf{note} -field is where you place something like \enquote{special issue} (with -the small \enquote{s} enabling the automatic capitalization routines), -whether you are citing one article or the whole issue -(conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). Indeed, this is a somewhat -specialized use of \textsf{note}, and if you have other sorts of -information you need to include in an \textsf{article}, -\textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, then you shouldn't put -it in the \textsf{note} field, but rather in \textsf{titleaddon} or -perhaps \textsf{addendum} (brown:bremer). - -\mylittlespace Finally, and in the interests of completeness, it may be -as well to suggest that if you wish to cite a television or radio -broadcast, the \textsf{article} type, \textsf{entrysubtype} -\texttt{magazine} is the place for it. The name of the program would -go in \textsf{journaltitle}, with the name of the episode in -\textsf{title}. The network's name now goes into the new -\textsf{usera} field, replacing the formatting kludge I suggested in -version 0.7. Of course, if the piece you are citing has only a -generic name (an interview, for example), then the \textsf{review} -type would be the best place for it. (8.196, 17.207; see -bundy:macneil for an example of how this all might look in a .bib -file.) - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace If you're still with me, allow me to recommend that you -browse through \textsf{notes-test.bib} to get a feel for just how many -of the \emph{Manual}'s complexities the \textsf{article} and -\textsf{review} (and, indeed, \textsf{periodical}) types attempt to -address. It may be that in future releases of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} I'll be able to simplify these -procedures somewhat, but in the meantime it might be of some comfort -that I have found in my own research that the unusual and/or limit -cases are really rather rare, and that the vast majority of sources -won't require any knowledge of these onerous details. - -\mybigspace Arne \mymarginpar{\textbf{artwork}} Kjell Vikhagen has -pointed out to me that none of the standard entry types were -straightforwardly adaptable when referring to visual artworks. The -\emph{Manual} doesn't give any thorough specifications for such -references, and indeed it's unclear that it believes it necessary to -include them in the bibliographical apparatus at all. Still, it's -easy to conceive of contexts in which a list of artworks studied might -be desirable, and \textsf{biblatex} includes entry types for just this -purpose, though the standard styles leave them undefined. The two I -have included in this release are \textsf{artwork} and \textsf{image}, -the former intended for paintings, sculptures, etchings, and the like, -the latter for photographs. The two entry types work in exactly the -same way as far as constructing your .bib entry, and when printed the -only difference will be that the titles of \textsf{artworks} are -italicized, those of \textsf{images} placed within quotation marks. - -\mylittlespace As one might expect, the artist goes in \textsf{author} -and the name of the work in \textsf{title}. The \textsf{type} field -is intended for the medium --- e.g., oil on canvas, charcoal on paper ---- and the \textsf{version} field might contain the state of an -etching. You can place the dimensions of the work in \textsf{note}, -and the current location in \textsf{organization}, -\textsf{institution}, and/or \textsf{location}, in ascending order of -generality. The \textsf{type} field, as in several other entry types, -uses \textsf{biblatex's} automatic capitalization routines, so if the -first word only needs a capital letter at the beginning of a sentence, -use lowercase in the .bib file and let \textsf{biblatex} handle it for -you. (See \emph{Manual} 12.33; leo:madonna, bedford:photo.) - -\mylittlespace As a final complication, the \emph{Manual} (8.206) says -that \enquote{the names of works of antiquity \ldots\,are usually set - in roman.} If you should need to include such a work in the -reference apparatus, you can either define an \textsf{entrysubtype} -for an \textsf{artwork} entry --- anything will do --- or you could -use the \textsf{misc} entry type with an \textsf{entrysubtype}. -Fortunately, in this instance the other fields in a \textsf{misc} -entry function pretty much as in \textsf{artwork} or \textsf{image}. - -\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{audio}} this release of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, following the request of Johan Nordstrom, I -have included three new entry types, all undefined by the standard -styles, designed to allow users to present audiovisual sources in -accordance with the Chicago specifications. The \emph{Manual's} -presentation of such sources (17.263--273), though admirably brief, -seems to me somewhat inconsistent. I attempted to condense all the -requirements into two new entry types, but ended up relying on three, -the differences between which I shall attempt to delineate here. -There are likely to be occasions when your choice of entry type is not -obvious, but at the very least \textsf{biblatex-chicago} should help -you maintain consistency. - -\mylittlespace The \textbf{music} type is intended for all musical -recordings that do not have a video component. This means, for -example, digital media (whether on CD or hard drive), vinyl records, -and tapes. The \textbf{video} type includes (nearly) all visual -media, whether it be films, TV shows, tapes and DVDs of the preceding -or of any sort of performance (including music), or online multimedia. -Finally, the \textbf{audio} type, our current concern, fills gaps in -the two others, and presents its sources in a more \enquote{book-like} -manner. Published musical scores need this type --- unpublished ones -would use \textsf{misc} with an \textsf{entrysubtype} (shapey:partita) ---- as do such favorite educational formats as the slideshow and the -filmstrip (greek:filmstrip, schubert:muellerin, verdi:corsaro). The -\emph{Manual} (17.269--270) sometimes uses a similar format for audio -books and even for films (twain:audio, weed:flatiron), though -elsewhere these sorts of material are presented as \textsf{music} and -\textsf{video}, respectively. It would appear to depend on which -sorts of publication facts you wish to present --- cf.\ \emph{Manual} -17.269. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Once you've accepted the analogy of composer to -\textsf{author}, constructing an \textsf{audio} entry should be fairly -straightforward, since many of the fields function just as they do in -\textsf{book} or \textsf{inbook} entries. Indeed, please note that I -compare it to both these other types as, in common with the other -audiovisual types, \textsf{audio} has to do double duty as an analogue -for both books and collections, so while there will normally be an -\textsf{author}, a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{publisher}, a -\textsf{date}, and a \textsf{location}, there may also be a -\textsf{booktitle} and/or a \textsf{maintitle} --- see -schubert:muellerin for an entry that uses all three in citing one song -from a cycle. If the medium in question needs specifying, the -\textsf{type} field is the place for it. (It is characteristic of -this entry type that such information is placed after the publisher -information, whereas in the other audiovisual types their order is -reversed.) Finally, the \textsf{titleaddon} field can specify -functions for which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} provides no automated -handling, e.g., a librettist (verdi:corsaro). - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookinbook}} type provides the -means of referring to parts of books that are considered, in other -contexts, themselves to be books, rather than chapters, essays, or -articles. (Older versions of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} used -\textbf{customb} for this purpose, but this is now obsolete.) Such an -entry can have a \textsf{title} and a \textsf{maintitle}, but it can -also contain a \textsf{booktitle}, all three of which will be -italicized when printed. In general usage it is, therefore, rather -like the traditional \textsf{inbook} type, only with its -\textsf{title} in italics rather than in quotation marks. (See -\emph{Manual} 17.72, 17.89, 17.93; bernard:boris, euripides:orestes, -plato:republic:gr.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The Euripides play receives slightly -different presentations in 17.89 and 17.93. Although the -specification is very detailed, it doesn't eliminate all choice or -variation. Using a system like \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ should help to -maintain consistency. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{booklet}} is the first of two -entry types --- the other being \textsf{manual}, on which see below ---- which are traditional in \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ styles, but which the -\emph{Manual} (17.241) suggests may well be treated basically as -books. In the interests of backward compatibility, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will so format such an entry, which -uses the \textsf{howpublished} field instead of a standard -\textsf{publisher}, though of course if you do decide just to use a -\textsf{book} entry then any information you might have given in a -\textsf{howpublished} field should instead go in \textsf{publisher}. -(See clark:mesopot.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customa}} entry type is now -obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an -error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{letter} type -instead. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customb}} entry type is now -obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an -error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{bookinbook} -type instead. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customc}} entry type has -undergone a metamorphosis with this release, as I previously warned -both here and in the RELEASE file. Rather than being a (deprecated) -alias of the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{suppbook}, it now -allows you to include alphabetized cross-references to other, separate -entries in the bibliography, particularly to other names or -pseudonyms, as recommended by the \emph{Manual}. (This is different -from the usual \textsf{crossref}, \textsf{xref}, and \textsf{userf} -mechanisms, all primarily designed to include cross-references to -other works. Cf.\ 17.39--40). The lecarre:cornwell entry, for -example, would allow your readers to find the more-commonly-used -pseudonym \enquote{John Le Carré} even if they were, for some reason, -looking under his real name \enquote{David John Moore Cornwell.} - -\mylittlespace In such a case, you would need merely to place the -author's real name in the \textsf{author} field, and the pseudonym(s), -under which his or her works are presented in the bibliography, in the -\textsf{title} field. To make sure the cross-reference also appears -in the bibliography, you can either manually include the entry key in -a \cmd{nocite} command, or you can put that entry key in the -\textbf{userc} field in the main .bib entry, in which case -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will print the expanded abbreviation if and -only if you cite the main entry. (Cf.\ lecarre:cornwell, -lecarre:quest; \textsf{userc}, below.) - -\mylittlespace Under ordinary circumstances, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -will connect the two parts of the cross-reference with the word -\enquote{\emph{See}} --- or its equivalent in the document's language ---- in italics. If you wish to present the cross-reference -differently, you can put the connecting word(s) into the -\textsf{nameaddon} field. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{image}} entry type, left -undefined in the standard styles, is in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -intended for referring to photographs. Excluding the possible use of -the \textsf{entrysubtype} field, which in an \textsf{image} entry -would be ignored, this type is a clone of \textsf{artwork}, so you -should consult the latter's documentation above to see how to -construct your .bib entry. (See \emph{Manual} 12.33; bedford:photo.) - -\mybigspace These \mymarginpar{\textbf{inbook}\\\textbf{incollection}} -two standard \textsf{biblatex} types have very nearly identical -formatting requirements as far as the Chicago specification is -concerned, but I have retained both of them for compatibility. -\textsf{Biblatex.pdf} (§~2.1.1) intends the first for \enquote{a part - of a book which forms a self-contained unit with its own title,} -while the second would hold \enquote{a contribution to a collection - which forms a self-contained unit with a distinct author and its own - title.} The \textsf{title} of both sorts will be placed within -quotation marks, and in general you can use either type for most -material falling into these categories. There is, however, an -important difference between them, as it is only in -\textsf{incollection} entries that I implement the \emph{Manual's} -recommendations for space-saving abbreviations in notes and -bibliography when you cite multiple pieces from the same -\textsf{collection}. These abbreviations are activated when you use -the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in \textsf{incollection} -entries, and not in \textsf{inbook} entries, mainly because the -\emph{Manual} (17.70) here specifies a \enquote{multiauthor book.} -(For more on this mechanism see \textbf{crossref}, below, and note -that it is also active in \textsf{letter} and \textsf{inproceedings} -entries. There is, of course, nothing to prevent you from using the -mechanism when referring to, e.g., chapters from a single-author book, -but you'll have to use \textsf{incollection} instead of -\textsf{inbook}.) If the part of a book to which you are referring -has had a separate publishing history as a book in its own right, then -you may wish to use the \textsf{bookinbook} type, instead, on which -see above. (See \emph{Manual} 17.68--72; \textsf{inbook}: -ashbrook:brain, phibbs:diary, will:cohere; \textsf{incollection}: -centinel:letters, contrib:contrib, sirosh:visualcortex; ellet:galena, -keating:dearborn, and lippincott:chicago [and the \textsf{collection} -entry prairie:state] demonstrate the use of the \textsf{crossref} -field with its attendant abbreviations in notes and bibliography.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} suggests that, when -referring to a chapter, one use either a chapter number or the -inclusive page numbers, not both. If, however, you wish to refer in a -footnote to a specific page within the chapter, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will always print the optional, -postnote argument of a \cmd{cite} command --- the page number, say --- -instead of any inclusive page numbers given in the .bib file -\textsf{incollection} entry. This mechanism is quite general, that -is, any specific page reference given in any sort of \cmd{cite} -command overrides the contents of a \textsf{pages} field in a .bib -file entry. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inproceedings}} entry type works -pretty much as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, the main -differences between it and \textsf{incollection} are the lack of an -\textsf{edition} field and the possibility that an -\textsf{organization} may be cited alongside the \textsf{publisher}, -even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't specify its use (17.71). Please -note, also, that the \textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref} mechanism for -shortening citations of multiple pieces from the same -\textsf{proceedings} is operative here, just as it is in -\textsf{incollection} entries. See \textbf{crossref}, below, for more -details. - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inreference}} entry type is -aliased to \textsf{incollection} in the standard styles, but the -\emph{Manual} has particular requirements, so if you are citing -\enquote{[w]ell-known reference books, such as major dictionaries and - encyclopedias,} then this type should simplify the task of -conforming to the specifications (17.238--239). The main thing to -keep in mind is that I have designed this entry type for -\enquote{alphabetically arranged} works, which you shouldn't cite by -page, but rather by the name(s) of the article(s). Because of the -formatting required by the \emph{Manual}, we need one of -\textsf{biblatex's} list fields for this purpose, and in order to keep -all this out of the way of the standard styles, I have chosen the -\textsf{lista} field. You should present these article names just as -they appear in the work, separated by the keyword -\enquote{\texttt{and}} if there is more than one, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will provide the appropriate prefatory -string (\texttt{s.v.}, plural \texttt{s.vv.}), and enclose each in its -own set of quotation marks (ency:britannica). In a typical -\textsf{inreference} entry, very few other fields are needed, as -\enquote{the facts of publication are often omitted, but the edition - (if not the first) must be specified.} In practice, this means a -\textsf{title} and possibly an \textsf{edition} field. - -\mylittlespace There are quite a few other peculiarities to explain -here. First of all, you should present any well-known works -\emph{only} in notes, not in a bibliography, as your readers are -assumed to know where to go for such a reference. You can use the -\texttt{skipbib} option or the \textsf{keywords} mechanism I discuss -below under \textbf{crossref} and \textbf{keywords}. For such works, -and given how little information will be present even in a full note, -you may wish to use \cmd{fullcite} or \cmd{footfullcite} in place of -the short form, especially if, for example, you are citing different -versions of an article appearing in different editions. - -\mylittlespace If the work is slightly less well known, it may be that -full publication details are appropriate (times:guide), but this makes -things more complicated. In previous releases of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, you would have had to format the -\textsf{postnote} field of short notes appropriately, including the -prefatory string and quotation marks I mentioned above. Now you can -put an article name in the \textsf{postnote} field of -\textsf{inreference} entries and have it formatted for you, and this -holds for both long and short notes, which could allow you to refer -separately to many different articles from the same reference work -using only one .bib entry. (In a long note, any \textsf{postnote} -field stops the printing of the contents of \textsf{lista}.) The only -limitation on this system is that the \textsf{postnote} field, unlike -\textsf{lista}, is not a list, and therefore for the formatting to -work correctly you can only put one article name in it. Despite this -limitation, I hope that the current system might simplify things for -users who cite numerous works of reference. - -\mylittlespace If it seems appropriate to include such a work in the -bibliography, be aware that the contents of the \textsf{lista} field -will also be presented there, which may not be what you want. A -separate \textsf{reference} entry might solve this problem, but you -may also need a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure proper -alphabetization, as \textsf{biblatex} will attempt to use an -\textsf{editor} or \textsf{author} name, if either is present. (Cf.\ -mla:style, a \textsf{reference} entry that uses section numbers -instead of alphabetized headings, and \texttt{useeditor=false} in the -\textsf{options} field instead of a \textsf{sortkey} to ensure the -correct alphabetization.) - -\mylittlespace Speaking of the \textsf{author}, this field holds the -author of the specific entry (in \textsf{lista}), not the author of -the \textsf{title} as a whole. This name will be printed in -parentheses after the entry's name (grove:sibelius). If you wish to -refer to a reference work by author or indeed by editor, having either -appear at the head of the note (long or short) or bibliography entry, -then you'll need to use a \textsf{book} entry instead (cf.\ -schellinger:novel), where the \textsf{lista} mechanism will also work -in the bibliography, but which in every other way will be treated as a -normal book, often a good choice for unfamiliar or non-standard -reference works. - -\mylittlespace Finally, all of these rules apply to online reference -works, as well, for which you need to provide not only a \textsf{url} -but also, always, a \textsf{urldate}, as these sources are in constant -flux (wikiped:bibtex, grove:sibelius). - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{letter}} is the entry type to -use for citing letters, memoranda, or similar texts, but \emph{only} -when they appear in a published collection. (Unpublished material of -this nature needs a \textsf{misc} entry, for which see below.) -Depending on what sort of information you need to present in a -citation, you may simply be able to get away with a standard -\textsf{book} entry, which may then be cited by page number (see -\emph{Manual} 17.31, 17.42; meredith:letters, adorno:benj). If, -however, for whatever reason, you need to give full details of a -specific letter, then you'll need to use the \textsf{letter} entry -type, which attempts to simplify for you the \emph{Manual}'s rather -complicated rules for formatting such references. (See 17.76--78; -jackson:paulina:letter, white:ross:memo, white:russ [a completely -fictitious entry to show the \textsf{xref} mechanism], white:total [a -\textsf{book} entry, for the bibliography]). - -\mylittlespace To start, the name of the letter writer goes in the -\textsf{author} field, while the \textsf{title} field contains both -the name of the writer and that of the recipient, in the form -\texttt{Author to Recipient}. The \textsf{titleaddon} field contains -the type of correspondence involved. If it's a letter, this field may -be left blank, but if it's a memorandum or report or the like, then -this is the place to specify that fact. Also, because the -\textsf{origdate} field only accepts numbers, if you want to use the -abbreviation \enquote{n.d.} (or \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) for undated -letters, then this is where you should put it. If you need to specify -where a letter was written, then you can also use this field, and, if -both are present, remember to separate the location from the type with -a comma, like so: \texttt{memorandum, London}. Alternatively, you can -put the place of writing into the \mycolor{\textsf{origlocation}} -field. Most importantly, the date of the letter itself goes in the -\textsf{origdate} field (\texttt{year-month-day}), which now allows a -full date specification, while the publishing date of the whole -collection goes in the \textsf{date} field, instead of in the obsolete -\textsf{origyear}. As in other entry types, then, the \textsf{date} -field now has its ordinary meaning of \enquote{date of publication.} -(You may have noticed here that the presentation of the -\textsf{origdate} in this sort of reference is different from the date -format required elsewhere by the \emph{Manual}. This appears to -result from some recent changes to the specification, and it may be -that we could get away with choosing one or the other format for all -occurrences [6.46], but for the moment I hope this mixed solution will -suffice.) Another difficulty arises when producing the short footnote -form, which requires you to provide a \textsf{shorttitle} field of the -form \enquote{\texttt{to Recipient},} the latter name as short as -possible while avoiding ambiguity. The remaining fields are fairly -self explanatory, but do remember that the title of the published -collection belongs in \textsf{booktitle} rather than in -\textsf{title}. - -\mylittlespace Finally, the \emph{Manual} specifies that if you cite -more than one letter from a given published collection, then the -bibliography should contain only a reference to said collection, -rather than to each individual letter, while the form of footnotes -would remain the same. This should be possible using -\textsc{Bib}\TeX's standard \textsf{crossref} field, with each -\textsf{letter} entry pointing to a \textsf{collection} or -\textsf{book} entry, for example. I shall discuss cross references at -length later (\textbf{crossref} and \textbf{xref}, below), but I -should mention here that \textsf{letter} is one of the entry types in -which a \textsf{crossref} or an \textsf{xref} field automatically -results in special shortened forms in notes and bibliography if more -than one piece from a single collection is cited. (The other entry -types are \textsf{incollection} and \textsf{inproceedings}; see 17.70 -for the \emph{Manual}'s specification.) This ordinarily won't be an -issue for \textsf{letter} entries in the bibliography, as individual -letters aren't included there, but it is operative in notes, where you -can disable it simply by not using a \textsf{crossref} or an -\textsf{xref} field. In the \textsf{crossref} docs, below, I -recommend a way of keeping the individual letters from turning up in -the bibliography, involving the use of the \textsf{keywords} field. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{manual}} is the second of two -traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ entry types that the \emph{Manual} -suggests formatting as books, the other being \textsf{booklet}. As -with this latter, I have retained it in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} for backward compatibility, its main -peculiarity being that, in the absence of a named author, the -\textsf{organization} producing the manual will be printed both as -author and as publisher. In such a case, you'll need a -\textsf{sortkey} field to aid \textsf{biblatex's} alphabetization -routines, but you no longer need to provide a \textsf{shortauthor} -field, as the style will automatically use \textsf{organization} in -the absence of anything else. Of course, if you were to use a -\textsf{book} entry for such a reference, then you would need to -define both \textsf{author} and \textsf{publisher} using the name you -here might have put in \textsf{organization}. (See 17:47; -chicago:manual:15, dyna:browser, natrecoff:camera.) - -\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{misc}} its name suggests, the -\textsf{misc} entry type was designed as a hold-all for citations that -didn't quite fit into other categories. In -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, I have somewhat extended its -applicability, while retaining its traditional use. Put simply, with -no \textsf{entrysubtype} field, a \textsf{misc} entry will retain -backward compatibility with the standard styles, so the usual -\textsf{howpublished}, \textsf{version}, and \textsf{type} fields are -all available for specifying an otherwise unclassifiable text, and the -\textsf{title} will be italicized. (The \emph{Manual}, you may wish -to note, doesn't give specific instructions on how such citations -should be formatted, so when using the Chicago style I would recommend -you have recourse to this traditional entry type as sparingly as -possible.) - -\mylittlespace If you do provide an \textsf{entrysubtype} field, the -\textsf{misc} type provides a means for citing unpublished letters, -memoranda, private contracts, wills, interviews, and the like, making -it something of an unpublished analogue to the \textsf{letter}, -\textsf{article}, and \textsf{review} entry types (which see). -Typically, such an entry will cite part of an archive, and equally -typically the text cited won't have a specific title, but only a -generic one, whereas an \textsf{unpublished} entry will ordinarily -have a specific author and title, and won't come from a named archive. -The \textsf{misc} type with an \textsf{entrysubtype} defined is the -least formatted of all those specified by the \emph{Manual}, so titles -are in plain text, and any location details take no parentheses in -full footnotes. (It is quite possible, though somewhat unusual, for -archival material to have a specific title, rather than a generic one. -In these cases, you will need to enclose the title inside a -\cmd{mkbibquote} command manually. Cf.\ shapey:partita.) - -\mylittlespace If you are wondering what to put in -\textsf{entrysubtype}, the answer is, currently, anything at all. You -no longer need to put the exact string \texttt{letter} there in order -to move the date into closer proximity with the \textsf{title}. -Indeed, recent reconsideration of the \emph{Manual} has suggested that -the distinction to be drawn in this class of material hasn't to do -with \emph{where} the date is presented but, rather, with \emph{how} -it is presented. As I now understand the specification, it draws a -distinction between archival material that is \enquote{letter-like} -(letters, memoranda, reports, telegrams) and that which isn't -(interviews, wills, contracts, or even personal communications you've -received and which you wish to cite). This may not always be the -easiest distinction to draw, and in previous releases of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} I have been ignoring it, but once you've -decided to classify it one way or the other you put the date in the -\textsf{origdate} field for letters, etc., and into the \textsf{date} -field for the others. - -\mylittlespace In effect, whether it's a \textsf{letter} entry or a -\enquote{letter-like} \textsf{misc} entry (with -\textsf{entrysubtype}), it is by using the \textsf{origdate} field -that you identify when it was written, and the \textsf{origlocation}, -if needed, identifies where it was written. Other sorts of -\textsf{misc} entry (with \textsf{entrysubtype}) use the \textsf{date} -field (but still the \textsf{origlocation}). This maintains -consistency of usage across entry types and also, I hope, improves -compliance when using the \textsf{misc} type for citing archival -material. Remember, however, that without an \textsf{entrysubtype} -the entry will be treated as traditional \textsf{misc}, and the title -italicized. In addition, defining \textsf{entrysubtype} activates the -automatic capitalization mechanism in the \textsf{title} field of -\textsf{misc} entries, on which see \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} -below. (See 17.205-206, 17.220, 17.222-232; creel:house, -dinkel:agassiz, spock:interview.) - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace As in \textsf{letter} entries, the titles of -unpublished letters are of the form \texttt{Author to Recipient}, and -further information can be given in the \textsf{titleaddon} field, -including the abbreviation \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ (or -\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) for undated examples. The \textsf{note}, -\textsf{organization}, \textsf{institution}, and \textsf{location} -fields (in ascending order of generality) allow the specification of -which manuscript collection now holds the letter, though the -\emph{Manual} specifies (17.228) that well-known depositories don't -usually need a city, state or country specified. (The traditional -\textsf{misc} fields are all still available, also.) Both the long -and short note forms can use the same \textsf{title}, but in both -cases you may need to use the \cmd{headlesscite} command to avoid the -awkward repetition of the author's name, though that name will always -appear in the bibliography (creel:house). If you want to include the -date of a letter in a short note, I have provided the -\cmd{letterdatelong} command for inclusion in the postnote field of -the citation command. (The standard \textsf{biblatex} command -\cmd{printdate} will work if you need to do the same for interviews.) - -\mylittlespace As with \textsf{letter} entries, the \emph{Manual} -(17.223) suggests that bibliography entries contain only the name of -the manuscript collection, unless only one item from that collection -is cited. The \textsf{crossref} field can be used, as well as the -\textsf{keywords} mechanism (or \texttt{skipbib} option) for -preventing the individual items from turning up in the bibliography. -Obviously, this is a matter for your discretion, and if you're using -only short notes (see the \texttt{short} option, -section~\ref{sec:useropts} below), you may feel the need to include -more information in the note if the bibliography doesn't contain a -full reference to an individual item. - -\mylittlespace Finally, if the \textsf{misc} entry isn't a letter, -remember that, as in \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries, -words like \texttt{interview} or \texttt{memorandum} needn't be -capitalized unless they follow a period --- the automatic -capitalization routines (with the \textsf{title} field starting with a -lowercase letter [see dinkel:agassiz, spock:interview, and -\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}]) will ensure correctness. In all -this class of archived material, the \emph{Manual} (17.222) quite -specifically requires more consistency within your own work than -conformity to some external standard, so it is the former which you -should pursue. I hope that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} proves -helpful in this regard. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{music}} is one of three new -audiovisual entry types, and is intended primarily to aid in the -presentation of musical recordings that do not have a video component, -though it can also include audio books (auden:reading). A DVD or VHS -of an opera or other performance, by contrast, should use the -\textbf{video} type instead (handel:messiah). Because -\textsf{biblatex} --- and \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ before it --- were -designed primarily for citing book-like objects, some choices needed -to be made in assigning the various roles found on the back of a CD to -the fields in a typical .bib entry. I have also implemented several -new bibstrings to help in identifying these roles within entries. If -you can think of a simpler way to distribute the roles, please let me -know, so that I can consider making changes before anyone gets used to -the current equivalences. - -\mylittlespace These equivalences, in summary form, are: - -{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}} -\begin{description} -\item[author =] composer, songwriter, or performer(s), - depending on whom you wish to emphasize by placing them at the head - of the entry. -\item[editor, editora, editorb =] conductor, director or - performer(s). These will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of - the work, though the usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor} - options can alter the presentation within an entry. Because these - are non-standard roles, you will need to identify them using the - following: -\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles, - all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will be - \texttt{conductor}, \texttt{director}, \texttt{producer}, and, - oddly, \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful when - identifying the group performing a piece, as it usually doesn't need - further specifying and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from - falling back on the default \texttt{editor} bibstring. -\item[title, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other audiovisual - types, \textsf{music} serves as an analogue both to books and to - collections, so the title will either be, e.g., the album title or a - song title, in which latter case the album title would go into - \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{maintitle} might be necessary for - something like a box set of \emph{Complete Symphonies}. -\item[series, number:] These two are closely associated, and are - intended for presenting the catalog information provided by the - music publisher, especially in the case when a publisher oversees - more than one label. In nytrumpet:art:15, for example, the - \textsf{series} field holds the label (\texttt{Vox/Turn\-about}) and - the \textsf{number} field the catalog number (\texttt{PVT 7183}). - You can certainly put all of this information into one of the above - fields, but separating it may help make the .bib entry more - readable. -\item[howpublished/pubstate, date, publisher:] The \emph{Manual} - (17.268) follows the rather specialized requirements for presenting - publishing information for musical recordings. The normal symbol - for musical copyright is\ \texttt{\textcircledP} (Unicode point - u+2117, SOUND RECORDING COPYRIGHT), but other copyrights - \texttt{\textcopyright} are often also asserted. The - \textsf{howpublished} field is the place for these symbols, and it - may also have to hold a year designation if the - \texttt{\textcircledP} and the \texttt{\textcopyright} apply to - different years, as sometimes happens. (The \textsf{pubstate} field - in this entry type is a synonym for \textsf{howpublished}. Please - use only one of them per entry, and note that the usual mechanism - for automatically printing \cmd{bibstring\{reprint\}} is turned off - in \textsf{music} entries.) The \textsf{date} field holds the year - either of all the symbols or of whichever symbol appears last in - \textsf{howpublished}, and the \textsf{publisher} field is - self-explanatory. (See nytrumpet:art:15.) -\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type} - field holds the medium of the recording, e.g., vinyl, 33 rpm, - 8-track tape, cassette, compact disc, mp3, ogg vorbis. -\end{description}} - -I should also note here that I have implemented the standard -\textsf{biblatex} \textsf{eventdate} field, in case you need it to -identify a particular recording session or concert. It will be -printed just after the \textsf{title}. The entries in -\textsf{notes-test.bib} should at least give you a good idea of how -this all works, and that file also contains an example of an audio -book presented in a \textsf{music} entry. If you browse the examples -in the \emph{Manual} you will see some variation from the formatting -choices I have made for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, but it wasn't -always clear to me that these variations were rules as opposed to -suggestions, so I've ignored some of them in the code. Arguments as -to why I'm wrong will, of course, be entertained. (Cf. 17.268; -auden:reading, beethoven:sonata29, bernstein:shostakovich, -nytrumpet:art:15.) - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{online}} \emph{Manual}'s -instructions (17.142--147, 17.198, 17.234--237) for citing online -materials are slightly different from those suggested by standard -\textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, this is a case where complete backward -compatibility with other \textsf{biblatex} styles may be impossible, -because as a general rule the \emph{Manual} considers relevant not -only where a source is found, but also the nature of that source, -e.g., if it's an online edition of a book (james:ambassadors), then it -calls for a \textsf{book} entry. Even if you cite an -\enquote{intrinsically online} source, if that source is structured -more or less like a conventional printed periodical, then you'll -probably want to use \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} instead of -\textsf{online} (stenger:privacy, which cites \emph{CNN.com} --- -\emph{Yahoo!\ News} is another example that would be treated in such a -way). If the \enquote{standard facts of publication} are missing, -then the \textsf{online} type is usually the best choice -(evanston:library, powell:email). Some online materials will, no -doubt, make it difficult to choose an entry type, but so long as all -locating information is present, then perhaps that is enough to -fulfill the specification, or at least so I'd like to hope. - -\mylittlespace Constructing an \textsf{online} .bib file entry is much -the same as in \textsf{biblatex}. The \textsf{title} field would -contain the title of the page, the \textsf{organization} field could -hold the title or owner of the whole site. If there is no specific -title for a page, but only a generic one (powell:email), then such a -title should go in \textsf{titleaddon}, not forgetting to begin that -field with a lowercase letter so that capitalization will work out -correctly. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{patent}} \emph{Manual} is very -brief on this subject (17.219), but very clear about which information -it wants you to present, so such entries may not work well with other -\textsf{biblatex} styles. The important date, as far as Chicago is -concerned, is the filing date. If a patent has been filed but not yet -granted, then you can place the filing date in either the -\textsf{date} field or the \textsf{origdate} field, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically prepend the -bibstring \texttt{patentfiled} to it. If the patent has been granted, -then you put the filing date in the \textsf{origdate} field, and you -put the date it was issued in the \textsf{date} field, to which the -bibstring \texttt{patentissued} will automatically be prepended. (In -other words, you no longer need to use a hand-formatted -\textsf{addendum} field, though you can place additional information -in that field if desired, and it will be printed in close association -with the dates.) The patent number goes in the \textsf{number} field, -and you should use the standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings in the -\textsf{type} field. Though it isn't mentioned by the \emph{Manual}, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will print the \textsf{holder} after -the \textsf{author}, if you provide one. See petroff:impurity. - - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{periodical}} is the standard -\textsf{biblatex} entry type for presenting an entire issue of a -periodical, rather than one article within it. It has the same -function in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, and in the main uses the -same fields, though in keeping with the system established in the -\textsf{article} entry type (which see) you'll need to provide -\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine} if the periodical you are -citing is a \enquote{newspaper} or \enquote{magazine} instead of a -\enquote{journal.} Also, remember that the \textsf{note} field is the -place for identifying strings like \enquote{special issue,} with its -initial lowercase letter to activate the automatic capitalization -routines. (See \emph{Manual} 17.170; good:wholeissue.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{reference}} entry type is -aliased to \textsf{collection} by the standard \textsf{biblatex} -styles, but I intend it to be used in cases where you need to cite a -reference work but not an alphabetized entry or entries in that work. -This could be because it doesn't contain such entries, or perhaps -because you intend the citation to appear in a bibliography rather -than in notes. Indeed, the only differences between it and -\textsf{inreference} are the lack of a \textsf{lista} field to present -an alphabetized entry, and the fact that any \textsf{postnote} field -will be printed verbatim, rather than formatted as an alphabetized -entry. (See mla:style for an example of a reference work that uses -numbered sections rather than alphabetized entries, and that appears -in the bibliography as well.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{report}} entry type is a -\textsf{biblatex} generalization of the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -type \textsf{techreport}. Instructions for such entries are rather -thin on the ground in the \emph{Manual} (17.241), so I have followed -the generic advice about formatting it like a book, and hope that the -results conform to the specification. Its main peculiarities are the -\textsf{institution} field in place of a \textsf{publisher}, the -\textsf{type} field for identifying the kind of report in question, -and the \textsf{isrn} field containing the International Standard -Technical Report Number of a technical report. As in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, if you use a \textsf{techreport} entry, then the -\textsf{type} field automatically defaults to -\cmd{bibstring\{techreport\}}. As with \textsf{booklet} and -\textsf{manual}, you can also use a \textsf{book} entry, putting the -report type in \textsf{note} and the \textsf{institution} in -\textsf{publisher}. (See herwign:office.) - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace The \colmarginpar{\textbf{review}} \textsf{review} entry -type was added to \textsf{biblatex 0.7}, and it certainly eases the -task of coping with the \emph{Manual}'s complicated requirements for -citing periodicals of all sorts, though it doesn't, I admit, eliminate -all difficulties. As its name suggests, this entry type was designed -for reviews published in periodicals, and if you've already read the -\textsf{article} instructions above --- if you haven't, I recommend -doing so now --- you'll know that \textsf{review} serves as well for -citing other sorts of material with generic titles, like letters to -the editor, obituaries, interviews, and the like. The primary rule is -that any piece that has only a generic title, like \enquote{review of - \ldots,} \enquote{interview with \ldots,} or \enquote{obituary of - \ldots,} calls for the \textsf{review} type. Any piece that also -has a specific title, e.g., \enquote{\enquote{Lost in - \textsc{Bib}\TeX,} an interview with \ldots,} requires an -\textsf{article} entry. (This assumes the text is found in a -periodical of some sort. Were it found in a book, then the -\textsf{incollection} type would serve your needs, and you could use -\textsf{title} and \textsf{titleaddon} there. While we're on the -topic of exceptions, the \emph{Manual} includes an example --- 17.207 ---- where the \enquote{Interview} part of the title is considered a -subtitle rather than a titleaddon, said part therefore being included -inside the quotation marks and capitalized accordingly. Not having -the journal in front of me I'm not sure what prompted that decision, -but \textsf{biblatex-chicago} would obviously have no difficulty -coping with such a situation.) - -\mylittlespace Once you've decided to use \textsf{review}, then you -need to determine which sort of periodical you are citing, the rules -for which are the same as for an \textsf{article} entry. If it is a -\enquote{magazine} or a \enquote{newspaper}, then you need an -\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}. The generic title goes in -\textsf{title} and the other fields work just as as they do in an -\textsf{article} entry with the same \textsf{entrysubtype}, including -the substitution of the \textsf{journaltitle} for the \textsf{author} -if the latter is missing. (See 17.185, 17.188--194, 17.199--203, -17.207; barcott:review, bundy:macneil, Clemens:letter, gourmet:052006, -kozinn:review, nyt:obittrevor, nyt:trevorobit, unsigned:ranke:15, -wallraff:word.) If, on the other hand, the piece comes from a -\enquote{journal,} then you don't need an \textsf{entrysubtype}. The -generic title goes in \textsf{title}, and the remaining fields work -just as they do in a plain \textsf{article} entry. (See 17.201; -ratliff:review.) - -\mylittlespace The onerous details are the same as I described them in -the \textbf{article} section above, but I'll repeat some of them -briefly here. If anything in the \textsf{title} needs formatting, you -need to provide those instructions yourself, as the default is -completely plain. In the short note form you no longer need to -provide a formatted \textsf{shortauthor} field for when a -\textsf{journaltitle} replaces an absent \textsf{author}, as the -package automatically prints the former there in the absence of -anything else (gourmet:052006, nyt:trevorobit). If you wish to keep -the title at the head of an entry, then you'll need to define -\textsf{author} somehow and place \texttt{useauthor=false} in the -\textsf{options} field (as in nyt:obittrevor, by contrast with -nyt:trevorobit. Please note that the \cmd{isdot} macro alone in the -\textsf{author} field no longer works in \textsf{biblatex} 1.6 and -later, so you may need to check your .bib files when you upgrade.) As -in \textsf{misc} entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}, words like -\enquote{interview,} \enquote{review,} and \enquote{letter} only need -capitalization after a full stop, i.e., ordinarily in a bibliography -and not a note, so \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} automatically deals -with this problem itself if you start the \textsf{title} field with a -lowercase letter. The file \textsf{notes-test.bib} and the -documentation of \cmd{autocap} will provide guidance here. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppbook}} is the entry type to -use if the main focus of a reference is supplemental material in a -book or in a collection, e.g., an introduction, afterword, or forward, -either by the same or a different author. In previous releases of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} these three just-mentioned types of -material, and only these three types, could be referenced using the -\textsf{introduction}, \textsf{afterword}, or \textsf{foreword} -fields, a system that required you simply to define one of them in any -way and leave the others undefined. The macros don't use the text -provided by such an entry, they merely check to see if one of them is -defined, in order to decide which sort of pre- or post-matter is at -stake, and to print the appropriate string before the \textsf{title} -in long notes, short notes, list of shorthands, and bibliography. I -have retained this mechanism both for backward compatibility and -because it works without modification across multiple languages, but -have also added functionality which allows you to cite any sort of -supplemental material whatever, using the \textsf{type} field. Under -this system, simply put the nature of the material, including the -relevant preposition, in that field, beginning with a lowercase letter -so \textsf{biblatex} can decide whether it needs capitalization -depending on the context. Examples might be \enquote{\texttt{preface - to}} or \enquote{\texttt{colophon of}.} (Please note, however, -that unless you use a \cmd{bibstring} command in the \textsf{type} -field, the resultant entry will not be portable across languages.) - -\mylittlespace The other rules for constructing your .bib entry remain -the same. The \textsf{author} field refers to the author of the -introduction or afterword, while \textsf{bookauthor} refers to the -author of the main text of the work, if the two differ. If the focus -of the reference is the main text of the book, but you want to mention -the name of the writer of an introduction or afterword for -bibliographical completeness, then the normal \textsf{biblatex} rules -apply, and you can just put their name in the appropriate field of a -\textsf{book} entry, that is, in the \textsf{foreword}, -\textsf{afterword}, or \textsf{introduction} field. (See -\emph{Manual} 17.74--75; polakow:afterw, prose:intro). - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppcollection}} fulfills a -function analogous to \textsf{suppbook}. Indeed, I believe the -\textbf{suppbook} type can serve to present supplemental material in -both types of work, so this entry type is an alias to -\textsf{suppbook}, which see. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppperiodical}} type, new to -\textsf{biblatex} 0.8, is intended to allow reference to -generically-titled works in periodicals, such as regular columns or -letters to the editor. Previous releases of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} provided the \textsf{review} type for -this purpose, and now you can use either of these, as I've added -\textsf{suppperiodical} as an alias of \textsf{review}. Please see -above under \textbf{review} for the full instructions on how to -construct a .bib entry for such a reference. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{unpublished}} -\textsf{unpublished} entry type works largely as it does in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, though it's worth remembering that you should use a -lowercase letter at the start of your \textsf{note} field (or perhaps -an\ \cmd{autocap} command in the somewhat contradictory -\textsf{howpublished}, if you have one) for material that wouldn't -ordinarily be capitalized except at the beginning of a sentence -(nass:address). - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{video}} is the last of the new -audiovisual entry types, and as its name suggests it is intended for -citing visual media, be it films of any sort or TV shows, broadcast, -on the Net, on VHS, DVD, or Blu-ray. As with the \textsf{music} type -discussed above, certain choices had to be made when associating the -production roles found, e.g., on a DVD, to those bookish ones provided -by \textsf{biblatex}. Here are the main correspondences: - -{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}} -\begin{description} -\item[author:] This will not infrequently be left undefined, as the - director of a film should be identified as such and therefore placed - in the \textsf{editor} field with the appropriate - \textsf{editortype} (see below). You will need it, however, to - identify the composer of, e.g., an oratorio on VHS (handel:messiah), - or perhaps the provider of commentaries or other extras on a film - DVD (cleese:holygrail). -\item[editor, editora, editorb =] director or producer, or possibly - the performer or conductor in recorded musical performances. These - will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of the work, though the - usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor} options can alter - the presentation within an entry. Because these are non-standard - roles, you will need to identify them using the following: -\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles, - all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will - likely be \texttt{director}, \texttt{produ\-cer}, and, oddly, - \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful if you want to - identify performers, as they usually don't need further specifying - and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from falling back on the - default \texttt{editor} bibstring. -\item[title, titleaddon, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other - audiovisual types, \textsf{video} serves as an analogue both to - books and to collections, so the \textsf{title} may be of a whole - film DVD or of a TV series, or it may identify one episode in a - series or one scene in a film. In the latter cases, the title of - the whole would go in \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{titleaddon} - field may be useful for specifying the season and/or episode number - of a TV series, or for any other information that needs to come - between the \textsf{title} and the \textsf{booktitle} - (cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah). As in the - \textsf{music} type, \textsf{maintitle} may be necessary for a boxed - set or something similar. -\item[date, origdate:] The publication details of this sort of - material are usually straightforward, at least compared with the - \textsf{music} type, but there will be occasions when you need two - dates. When citing an episode of a long-running TV series you may - need both a date for the episode and a date range for the whole run, - and when citing a film on DVD you may want to present both the - original release date and the date of release on DVD. In both - cases, the \textsf{origdate} field holds the year of the original - showing or transmission, while the \textsf{date} field holds either - the years for an entire run of a TV show or the year of publication - of the DVD (or other medium). Cf. episode:tv, hitchcock:nbynw. -\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type} - field holds the medium of the \textsf{title}, e.g., 8 mm, VHS, DVD, - Blu-ray, MPEG. -\end{description}} - -As with the \textsf{music} type, entries in \textsf{notes-test.bib} -should at least give you a good idea of how all this works. (Cf.\ -17.270, 273; cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah, -hitchcock:nbynw, loc:city.) - -\subsection{Entry Fields} -\label{sec:entryfields} - -The following discussion presents, in alphabetical order, a complete -list of the entry fields you will need to use -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. As in section \ref{sec:entrytypes}, -I shall include references to the numbered paragraphs of the -\emph{Chicago Manual of Style}, and also to the entries in -\textsf{notes-test.bib}. Many fields are most easily understood with -reference to other, related fields. In such cases, cross references -should allow you to find the information you need. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{addendum}} in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to add miscellaneous -information to the end of an entry, after publication data but before -any \textsf{url} or \textsf{doi} field. In the \textsf{patent} entry -type (which see), it will be printed in close association with the -filing and issue dates. In any entry type, if your data begins with a -word that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a -sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and the -style will take care of the rest. Cf.\ \textsf{note}. (See -\emph{Manual} 17.145, 17.123; davenport:attention, natrecoff:camera.) - -\mybigspace In most \mymarginpar{\textbf{afterword}} circumstances, -this field will function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex}, -i.e., you should include here the author(s) of an afterword to a given -work. The \emph{Manual} suggests that, as a general rule, the -afterword would need to be of significant importance in its own right -to require mentioning in the reference apparatus, but this is clearly -a matter for the user's judgment. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if the -name given here exactly matches that of an editor and/or a translator, -then \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will concatenate these fields in -the formatted references. - -%\vspace{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace As noted above, however, this field has a special -meaning in the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, used to make an -afterword, foreword, or introduction the main focus of a citation. If -it's an afterword at issue, simply define \textsf{afterword} any way -you please, leave \textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction} -undefined, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will do the rest. Cf.\ -\textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.46, -17.74; polakow:afterw.) - -\mybigspace At \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotation}} \label{sec:annote} -the request of Emil Salim, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} has, as of -version 0.9, added a package option (see \texttt{annotation} below, -section \ref{sec:useropts}) to allow you to produce annotated -bibliographies. The formatting of such a bibliography is currently -fairly basic, though it conforms with the \emph{Manual's} minimal -guidelines (16.77). The default in \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx} is to -define \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat\{an\-notation\}} using -\cmd{par}\cmd{nobreak} \cmd{vskip} \cmd{bibitemsep}, though you can -alter it by re-declaring the format in your preamble. The -page-breaking algorithms don't always give perfect results here, but -the default formatting looks, to my eyes, fairly decent. In addition -to tweaking the field formatting you can also insert \cmd{par} (or -even \cmd{vadjust\{\cmd{eject}\}}) commands into the text of your -annotations to improve the appearance. Please consider the -\texttt{annotation} option a work in progress, but it is usable now. -(N.B.: The \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field \textsf{annote} serves as an alias -for this.) - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotator}} have implemented this -\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles -do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may -be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{commentator}. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{author}} the most part, I have -implemented this field in a completely standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -fashion. Remember that corporate or organizational authors need to -have an extra set of curly braces around them (e.g., -\texttt{\{\{Associated Press\}\}}\,) to prevent \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ from -treating one part of the name as a surname (17.47, 17.197; -assocpress:gun, chicago:manual:15). If there is no \textsf{author}, -then \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will look, in sequence, for an -\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, or \textsf{compiler} (actually -\textsf{namec}, currently) and use that name (or those names) instead, -followed by the appropriate identifying string (esp.\ 17.41, also -17.28--29, 17.88, 17.95, 17.172; boxer:china, brown:bremer, -harley:cartography, schellinger:novel, sechzer:women, silver:ga\-wain, -soltes:georgia). Please note that when a \textsf{namec} appears at -the head of an entry, you'll need to assist \textsf{biblatex}'s -sorting algorithms by providing a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure -correct alphabetization in the bibliography. Also, a -\textsf{shortauthor} entry is necessary to provide a name at the head -of the short note form. - -\mylittlespace In the rare cases when this substitution mechanism -isn't appropriate, you have two options: either you can -(chaucer:liferecords) put all the information into a \textsf{note} -field rather than individual fields, or you can use the -\textsf{biblatex} options \texttt{useauthor=false}, -\texttt{useeditor=false}, \texttt{usetranslator=false}, and -\texttt{usecompiler=\\false} in the \textsf{options} field -(chaucer:alt). If you look at the chaucer:alt entry in -\textsf{notes-test.bib}, you'll notice a peculiarity of this system of -toggles. In order to ensure that the \textsf{title} of the book -appears at the head of the entry, you need to use \emph{all four} of -the toggles, even though the entry contains no \textsf{translator}. -Internally, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} is either searching for an -author-substitute, or it is skipping over elements of the ordered, -unidirectional chain \textsf{author -> editor -> translator -> - compiler -> title}. If you don't include -\texttt{usetranslator=false} in the \textsf{options} field, then the -package begins its search at \textsf{translator} and continues on to -\textsf{namec}, even though you have \texttt{usecompiler=false} in -\textsf{options}. The result will be that the compilers' names will -appear at the head of the entry. If you want to skip over parts of -the chain, you must turn off \emph{all} of the parts up to the one you -wish printed. - -\mylittlespace This system of toggles, then, can turn off -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}'s mechanism for finding a name to -place at the head of an entry, but it also very usefully adds the -possibility of citing a work with an \textsf{author} by its editor, -compiler or translator instead (17.45; eliot:pound), something that -wasn't possible before. For full details of how this works, see the -\textsf{editortype} documentation below. (Of course, in -\textsf{collection} and \textsf{proceedings} entry types, an -\textsf{author} isn't expected, so there the \textsf{editor} is -required, as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Also, in \textsf{article} -or \textsf{review} entries with \textsf{entrysubtype} -\texttt{magazine}, the absence of an \textsf{author} triggers the use -of the \textsf{journaltitle} in its stead. See those entry types for -further details.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} provides specific -instructions for formatting the names of both anonymous and -pseudonymous authors (17.32--39). In the former case, if no author is -known or guessed at, then it may simply be omitted -(virginia:plantation). The use of \enquote{Anonymous} as the name is -\enquote{generally to be avoided,} but may in some cases be useful -\enquote{in a bibliography in which several anonymous works need to be - grouped.} If, on the other hand, \enquote{the authorship is known - or guessed at but was omitted on the title page,} then you need to -use the \textsf{authortype} field to let -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} know this fact. If the author is -known (horsley:prosodies), then put \texttt{anon} in the -\textsf{authortype} field, if guessed at (cook:sotweed) put -\texttt{anon?}\ there. (In both cases, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} tests for these \emph{exact} strings, -so check your typing if it doesn't work.) This will have the effect -of enclosing the name in square brackets, with or without the question -mark indicating doubt. As long as you have the right string in the -\textsf{authortype} field, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will also -do the right thing automatically in the short note form. - -\mylittlespace The \textsf{nameaddon} field furnishes the means to -cope with the case of pseudonymous authorship. If the author's real -name isn't known, simply put \texttt{pseud.} (or -\cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}}) in that field (centinel:letters). If -you wish to give a pseudonymous author's real name, simply include it -there, formatted as you wish it to appear, as the contents of this -field won't be manipulated as a name by \textsf{biblatex} -(lecarre:quest). If you have given the author's real name in the -\textsf{author} field, then the pseudonym goes in \textsf{nameaddon}, -in the form \texttt{Firstname Lastname, pseud.}\ (creasey:ashe:blast, -creasey:morton:hide, creasey:york:death). This latter method will -allow you to keep all references to one author's work under different -pseudonyms grouped together in the bibliography, as recommended by the -\emph{Manual}. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{authortype}} -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, this field serves a function very much in -keeping with the spirit of standard \textsf{biblatex}, if not with its -letter. Instead of allowing you to change the string used to identify -an author, the field allows you to indicate when an author is -anonymous, that is, when his or her name doesn't appear on the title -page of the work you are citing. As I've just detailed under -\textsf{author}, the \emph{Manual} generally discourages the use of -\enquote{Anonymous} as an author, preferring that you simply omit it. -If, however, the name of the author is known or guessed at, then -you're supposed to enclose that name within square brackets, which is -exactly what \textsf{biblatex-chicago} does for you when you put -either \texttt{anon} (author known) or \texttt{anon?} (author guessed -at) in the \textsf{authortype} field. (Putting the square brackets in -yourself doesn't work right, hence this mechanism.) The macros test -for these \emph{exact} strings, so check your typing if you don't see -the brackets. Assuming the strings are correct, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will also automatically do the right -thing in the short note form. Cf.\ \textsf{author}. (See 17.33--34; -cook:sotweed, horsley:prosodies.) - -\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookauthor}} the most part, as in -\textsf{biblatex}, a \textsf{bookauthor} is the author of a -\textsf{booktitle}, so that, for example, if one chapter in a book has -different authorship from the book as a whole, you can include that -fact in a reference (17.75; will:cohere). Keep in mind, however, that -the entry type for introductions, forewords and afterwords -(\textsf{suppbook}) uses \textsf{bookauthor} as the author of -\textsf{title} (polakow:afterw, prose:intro). - -\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\vspace{-12pt}\textbf{bookpagination}} -a standard \textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix -the appropriate string to information you provide in a \textsf{pages} -field. If you leave it blank, the default is to print no identifying -string (the equivalent of setting it to \texttt{none}), as this is the -practice the \emph{Manual} recommends for nearly all page numbers. -Even if the numbers you cite aren't pages, but it is otherwise clear -from the context what they represent, you can still leave this blank. -If, however, you specifically need to identify what sort of unit the -\textsf{pages} field represents, then you can either hand-format that -field yourself, or use one of the provided bibstrings in the -\textsf{bookpagination} field. These bibstrings currently are -\texttt{column,} \texttt{line,} \texttt{paragraph,} \texttt{page,} -\texttt{section,} and \texttt{verse}, all of which are used by -\textsf{biblatex's} standard styles. - -\mylittlespace There are two points that may need explaining here. -First, all the bibstrings I have just listed follow the Chicago -specification, which may be confusing if they don't produce the -strings you expect. Second, remember that \textsf{bookpagination} -applies only to the \textsf{pages} field --- if you need to format a -citation's \textsf{postnote} field, then you must use -\textsf{pagination}, which see (15.45--46, 17.128--138). - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{booksubtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{booktitle}. See the next entry for further information. - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitle}} the -\textsf{bookinbook}, \textsf{inbook}, \textsf{incollection}, -\textsf{inproceedings}, and \textsf{letter} entry types, the -\textsf{booktitle} field holds the title of the larger volume in which -the \textsf{title} itself is contained as one part. It is important -not to confuse this with the \textsf{maintitle}, which holds the more -general title of multiple volumes, e.g., \emph{Collected Works}. It -is perfectly possible for one .bib file entry to contain all three -sorts of title (euripides:orestes, plato:republic:gr). You may also -find a \textsf{booktitle} in other sorts of entries (e.g., -\textsf{book} or \textsf{collection}), but there it will almost -invariably be providing information for the \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -cross-referencing apparatus (prairie:state), which I discuss below -(\textbf{crossref}). - -\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitleaddon}} annex to the -\textsf{booktitle}. It will be printed in the main text font, without -quotation marks. If your data begins with a word that would -ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then -simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do the right thing. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{chapter}} field holds the -chapter number, mainly useful only in an \textsf{inbook} or an -\textsf{incollection} entry where you wish to cite a specific chapter -of a book (ashbrook:brain). - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{commentator}} have implemented this -\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles -do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may -be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator}. - -\mybigspace \textsf{Biblatex} \mymarginpar{\textbf{crossref}} uses the -standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ cross-referencing mechanism, and has also -introduced a modified one of its own (\textsf{xref}). The -\textsf{crossref} field works exactly the same as it always has, while -\textsf{xref} attempts to remedy some of the deficiencies of the usual -mechanism by ensuring that child entries will inherit no data at all -from their parents. Having said all that, a few further instructions -may be in order for users of both \textsf{biblatex} and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. First, remember that fields in a -\textsf{collection} entry, for example, differ from those in an -\textsf{incollection} entry. In order for the latter to inherit the -\textsf{booktitle} field from the former, the former needs to have -such a field defined, even though a \textsf{collection} entry has no -use itself for such an entry (see ellet:galena, keating:dearborn, -lippincott:chicago, and prairie:state). Note also that an entry with -a \textsf{crossref} field will mechanically try to inherit all -applicable fields from the entry it cross-references. In the case of -ellet:galena et al., you can see that this includes the -\textsf{subtitle} field found in prairie:state, which would then, -quite incorrectly, be added to the \textsf{title} of ellet:galena. In -cases like these, you could just make sure that prairie:state didn't -contain such a field, by placing the entire title + subtitle in the -\textsf{title} field, separated by a colon. You'd certainly need to -provide a \textsf{shorttitle} field for short footnotes, if you chose -this solution. Alternatively, as you can see in ellet:galena, you can -just define an empty \textsf{subtitle} field to prevent it inheriting -the unwanted subtitle from prairie:state. - -\mylittlespace Turning now more narrowly to -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, the \emph{Manual} (17.70) specifies -that if you cite several contributions to the same collection, all -(including the collection itself) may be listed separately in the -bibliography, which the package does automatically, using the default -inclusion threshold of 2 in the case both of \textsf{crossref}'ed and -\textsf{xref}'ed entries. (The familiar \cmd{nocite} command may also -help in some circumstances.) In footnotes the specification suggests -that, after a citation of any one contribution to the collection, all -subsequent contributions may, even in the first, long footnote, be -cited using a slightly shortened form, thus \enquote{avoiding - clutter.} In the bibliography the abbreviated form is appropriate -for all the child entries. The current version of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} implements these instructions, but -only if you use a \textsf{crossref} or an \textsf{xref} field, and -only in \textsf{incollection}, \textsf{inproceedings}, or -\textsf{letter} entries (on the last named, see just below). If you -look at ellet:galena, keating:dearborn, lippincott:chicago, and -prairie:state you'll see this mechanism in action in both notes and -bibliography. If you wish to disable this, then simply don't use a -\textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in your entries. - -\mylittlespace There is a subtlety involved in this mechanism that I -should address here. Andrew Goldstone has pointed out to me some -inaccuracies in the package's treatment of these abbreviated -citations, both in notes and bibliography. Most of the changes I've -made won't affect users in any way, only the actual printed output, -but if you refer separately to chapters in a single-author -\textsf{book}, then the shortened part of the reference, to the whole -book, won't repeat the author's name before the title of the whole. -If, however, you refer separately to parts of a \textsf{collection} or -\textsf{proceedings}, even when the \textsf{editor} of the -\textsf{collection} is the same as the \textsf{author} of an essay in -the collection, you will see the name repeated before the abbreviated -part referencing the whole parent volume. Because the code tests for -entry type, if you don't use \textsf{collection} or -\textsf{proceedings} for the whole volume, you'll not get the repeated -name, so there may be corner cases where careful choice of the parent -entry type gets you what you want. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace A published collection of letters requires a somewhat -different treatment (17.78). If you cite more than one letter from -the same collection, then the \emph{Manual} specifies that only the -collection itself should appear in the bibliography. In footnotes, -you can use the \textsf{letter} entry type, documented above, for -each individual letter, while the collection as a whole may well -require a \textsf{book} entry. I have, after some consideration, -implemented the system of shortened references in \textsf{letter} -entries, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't explicitly require it. -As with \textsf{incollection} and \textsf{inproceedings}, mere use of -a \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field will activate this -mechanism, while avoidance of said fields will disable it. (See -white:ross:memo, white:russ, and white:total, for examples of the -\textsf{xref} field in action in this way, and please note that the -second of these entries is entirely fictitious, provided merely for -the sake of example.) How then to keep the individual letters from -appearing in the bibliography? The simplest mechanism is one provided -by \textsf{biblatex}, which involves the \textsf{keywords} field. -Choose a keyword for any entry you wish excluded from the bibliography ---- I've chosen \texttt{original}, for reasons that will become -clearer later --- then in the optional argument to the -\cmd{printbibliography} command in your document include, e.g., -\texttt{notkeyword=original}. (Cf.\ \textbf{keywords} and -\textbf{userf}.) - -\mylittlespace If you look closely at the .bib entries for -white:ross:memo and white:russ, you'll see that, despite using -\textsf{xref} instead of \textsf{crossref}, the notes referring to -them inherit data from the parent (white:total). The citation -mechanism is making a separate call to the parent's .bib entry, -formatting the information there to fill out the bare data provided by -the child, but this only happens in \textsf{letter}, -\textsf{incollection}, and \textsf{inproceedings} entries. It is -perfectly possible that other sorts of entries may make use of -\textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} fields --- \textsf{inbook} and -\textsf{bookinbook} come to mind --- but such entries will not result in -the activation of shortened references in notes and bibliography, nor, -when using \textsf{xref}, in the inheritance I have just pointed out. -This is how I interpret the specification, though I'm open to -persuasion on this score. - -\mylittlespace I should also take this opportunity to mention that you -need to be careful when using the \textsf{shorthand} field in -conjunction with the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} fields, -bearing in mind the complicated questions of inheritance posed by all -such cross-references, most especially in \textsf{letter}, -\textsf{incollection}, and \textsf{inproceedings} entries. A -\textsf{shorthand} field in a parent entry is, at least in the current -state of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, a bad idea. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{date}} field may be used to -specify an item's complete date of publication, in \textsc{iso}8601 -format, i.e., \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}. It may also be used to specify a -date range, according to Lehman's instructions in §~2.3.8 of -\textsf{biblatex.pdf}. Please be aware, however, that \textsf{Biber} -is somewhat more exacting when parsing the \textsf{date} field than -\textsc{Bib}\TeX, so a field looking like \texttt{1968/75} will simply -be ignored --- you need \texttt{1968/1975} instead. If you want to -present a more compressed year range, or more generally if only part -of a date is required, then the \textsf{month} and \textsf{year} -fields may be more convenient. The latter may be particularly useful -in some entries because it can hold more than just numerical data, in -contrast to \textsf{date} itself. Cf.\ the \textsf{misc} entry type -in section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} above for how to use this field to -distinguish between two classes of archival material. See also -\textsf{origdate} and \textsf{urldate}. - -\mylittlespace (Users of the Chicago author-date style who wish to -minimize the labor needed to convert a .bib database for the notes \&\ -bibliography style should be aware that, in this release, the latter -style includes compatibility code for the \texttt{cmsdate} (silently -ignored) and \texttt{switchdates} options, along with the mechanism -for reversing \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate}. This means that -you can, in theory, leave all of this alone in your .bib file when -making the conversion, though I'm retaining the right to revoke this -if the code in question demonstrably interferes with the functioning -of the notes \&\ bibliography style.) - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{day}} field, as of -\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, is obsolete, and will be ignored if you use it -in your .bib files. Use \textsf{date} instead. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{doi}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. The Digital Object Identifier of the work, which the -\emph{Manual} suggests you can use \enquote{in place of page numbers - or other locators} (17.181; friedman:learn\-ing). Cf.\ -\textsf{url}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{edition}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. If you enter a plain cardinal number, \textsf{biblatex} will -convert it to an ordinal (chicago:manual:15), followed by the -appropriate string. Any other sort of edition information will be -printed as is, though if your data begins with a word (or -abbreviation) that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the -beginning of a sentence, then simply ensure that that word (or -abbreviation) is in lowercase, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} -will automatically do the right thing (babb:peru, times:guide). In -most situations, the \emph{Manual} generally recommends the use of -abbreviations in both bibliography and notes, but there is room for -the user's discretion in specific citations (emerson:nature). - -\mylittlespace In a previous release of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, I introduced the \textsf{userd} field -to hold this non-numeric information, as \textsf{biblatex} only -accepted an integer in the \textsf{edition} field, but this changed in -version 0.8. The \textsf{userd} field is now obsolete, and will be -silently ignored. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{editor}} far as possible, I have -implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, but -the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain -complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his -documentation that the \textsf{editor} field will be associated with a -\textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle}, -depending on the sort of entry. More specifically, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{editor} with the most -comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if there is -one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title}, if the -other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is exactly -the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters, -plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are -numerous cases that require, for example, an additional editor for one -part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work. For -these cases I have provided the \textsf{namea} field. You should -format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or -\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the -\textsf{title} (donne:var). - -\mylittlespace As you will see below, I have also provided a -\textsf{nameb} field, which holds the translator of a given -\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If \textsf{namea} and -\textsf{nameb} are the same, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will -concatenate them, just as \textsf{biblatex} already does for -\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the -compiler). Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will -need separate editors for each of the three sorts of title. For this, -and for various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{partedit} -macro (and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note} field -or in one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields (chaucer:liferecords). -(Because the strings identifying an editor differ in notes and -bibliography, one can't simply write them out in such a field, hence -the need for a macro, which I discuss further in the commands section -below [\ref{sec:formatcommands}].) Cf.\ \textsf{namea}, -\textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, and \textsf{translator}. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{editora\\editorb\\editorc}} newer -releases of \textsf{biblatex} provide these fields as a means to -specify additional contributors to texts in a number of editorial -roles. In the Chicago styles they seem most relevant for the -audiovisual types, especially \textsf{music} and \textsf{video}, where -they help to identify conductors, directors, producers, and -performers. To specify the role, use the fields \textsf{editoratype}, -\textsf{editorbtype}, and \textsf{editorctype}, which see. (Cf.\ -bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah.) - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Normally, \mymarginpar{\textbf{editortype}} with the -exception of the \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} types, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically find a name to put -at the head of an entry, starting with an \textsf{author}, and -proceeding in order through \textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and -\textsf{namec} (the compiler). If all four are missing, then the -\textsf{title} will be placed at the head. (In \textsf{article} and -\textsf{review} entries with a \texttt{magazine} -\textsf{entrysubtype}, a missing author immediately prompts the use of -\textsf{journaltitle} at the head of an entry. See above under -\textsf{article} for details.) The \textsf{editortype} field, added -in \textsf{biblatex 0.7}, provides even greater flexibility, giving -you the ability to put a compiler at the head of an entry without -using \textsf{namec}, freeing you from the need to use a -\textsf{sortkey} and a \textsf{shortauthor}. You can do this even -though an author is named (eliot:pound shows this mechanism in action -for a standard editor, rather than a compiler). Two things are -necessary for this to happen. First, in the \textsf{options} field -you need to set \texttt{useauthor=false}, then you need to put the -name you wish to see at the head of your entry into the -\textsf{editor} or the \textsf{namea} field. If the \enquote{editor} -is in fact a compiler, then you need to put \texttt{compiler} into the -\textsf{editortype} field, and \textsf{biblatex} will print the -correct string after the name in both the bibliography and in the long -note form. - -\mylittlespace There are a few details of which you need to be aware. -Because \textsf{biblatex-chicago} has added the \textsf{namea} field, -which gives you the ability to identify the editor specifically of a -\textsf{title} as opposed to a \textsf{maintitle} or a -\textsf{booktitle}, the \textsf{editortype} mechanism checks first to -see whether a \textsf{namea} is defined. If it is, that name will be -used at the head of the entry, if it isn't it will go ahead and look -for an \textsf{editor}. When the \textsf{editor} field is used, -\textsf{biblatex}'s sorting algorithms will work properly, and also -its \textsf{labelname} mechanism, meaning that a shortened form of the -\textsf{editor} will be used in the short note form. If, however, the -\textsf{namea} field provides the name, then your .bib entry will need -to have a \textsf{sortkey} field to aid in alphabetizing, and it will -also need a \textsf{shorteditor} defined to help with the short note -form, not a \textsf{shortauthor}, ruled out because -\texttt{useauthor=false}. - -\mylittlespace In \textsf{biblatex} 0.9 Lehman reworked the string -concatenation mechanism, for reasons he outlined in his RELEASE file, -and I have followed his lead. In short, if you define the -\textsf{editortype} field, then concatenation is turned off, even if -the name of the \textsf{editor} matches, for example, that of the -\textsf{translator}. In the absence of an \textsf{editortype}, the -usual mechanisms remain in place, that is, if the \textsf{editor} -exactly matches a \textsf{translator} and/or a \textsf{namec}, or -alternatively if \textsf{namea} exactly matches a \textsf{nameb} -and/or a \textsf{namec}, then \textsf{biblatex} will print the -appropriate strings. The \emph{Manual} specifically (17.41) -recommends not using these identifying strings in the short note form, -and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} follows their recommendation. If -you nevertheless need to provide such a string, you'll have to do it -manually in the \textsf{shorteditor} field, or perhaps, in a different -sort of entry, in a \textsf{shortauthor} field. - -\mylittlespace It may also be worth noting that because of certain -requirements in the specification -- absence of an \textsf{author}, -for example -- the \texttt{useauthor} mechanism won't work properly in -the following entry types: \textsf{collection}, \textsf{letter}, -\textsf{patent}, \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings}, -\textsf{review}, \textsf{suppbook}, \textsf{suppcollection}, and -\textsf{suppperiodical}. - -\mybigspace These -\mymarginpar{\textbf{editoratype\\editorbtype\\editorctype}} fields -identify the exact role of the person named in the corresponding -\textsf{editor[a-c]} field. Note that they are not part of the string -concatenation mechanism. I have implemented them just as the standard -styles do, and they have now found a use particularly in -\textsf{music} and \textsf{video} entries. Cf.\ -bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{eid}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, providing a string or number some journals use uniquely to -identify a particular article. Only applicable to the -\textsf{article} entry type. Not typically required by the -\emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{entrysubtype}} and very -powerful \textsf{biblatex} field, left undefined by the standard -styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} it has four very specific -uses, the first three of which I have designed in order to maintain, -as much as possible, backward compatibility with the standard styles. -First, in \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} -entries, the field allows you to differentiate between scholarly -\enquote{journals,} on the one hand, and \enquote{magazines} and -\enquote{newspapers} on the other. Usage is fairly simple: you need -to put the exact string \texttt{magazine} into the -\textsf{entrysubtype} field if you are citing one of the latter two -types of source, whereas if your source is a \enquote{journal,} then -you need do nothing. - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace The second use involves references to works from -classical antiquity and, according to the \emph{Manual}, from the -Middle Ages, as well. When you cite such a work using the traditional -divisions into books, sections, lines, etc., divisions which are -presumed to be the same across all editions, then you need to put the -exact string \texttt{classical} into the \textsf{entrysubtype} field. -This has no effect in long notes or in the bibliography, but it does -affect the formatting of short notes, where it suppresses some of the -punctuation. Ordinarily, you will use this toggle in a \textsf{book} -or a \textsf{bookinbook} entry, but it is possible that a journal -might well also present an edition of such a work. Given the -tradition of using italics for the titles of such works, this may -require using a \textsf{titleaddon} field (with hand formatting) -instead of a \textsf{title}. If you wish to reference a classical or -medieval work by the page numbers of a particular, non-standard -edition, then you shouldn't use the \textsf{entrysubtype} toggle. -Also, and the specification is reasonably clear about this, works from -the Renaissance and later, even if cited by the traditional divisions, -have short notes formatted normally, and therefore don't need an -\textsf{entrysubtype} field. (See \emph{Manual} 17.250--262; -aristotle:metaphy:gr, plato:republic:gr; euripides:orestes is an -example of a translation cited by page number in a modern edition.) - -\mylittlespace The third use occurs in \textsf{misc} entries. If such -an entry contains no \textsf{entrysubtype} field, then the citation -will be treated just as the standard \textsf{biblatex} styles would, -including the use of italics for the \textsf{title}. Any string at -all in \textsf{entrysubtype} tells \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} to -treat the source as part of an unpublished archive. A \textsf{misc} -entry with \textsf{entrysubtype} defined is the least formatted of all -those specified by the \emph{Manual} --- see -section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} above under \textbf{misc} for all the -details on how these citations work. - -\mylittlespace Fourth, and finally, the field can be defined in the -new \textsf{artwork} entry type in order to refer to a work from -antiquity whose title you do not wish to be italicized. Please see -the documentation of \textsf{artwork} above for the details. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{eventdate}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, added recently to the \textbf{music} entry -type in case users need it to identify a particular recording session -or concert. See the documentation of that type above. The field will -currently be ignored in any other sort of entry. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{foreword}} with the -\textsf{afterword} field above, \textsf{foreword} will in general -function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Like -\textsf{afterword} (and \textsf{introduction}), however, it has a -special meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to -define it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and -\textsf{introduction} undefined) to make a foreword the focus of a -citation. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{holder}} standard \textsf{biblatex} -field for identifying a \textsf{patent}'s holder(s), if they differ -from the \textsf{author}. The \emph{Manual} has nothing to say on the -subject, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} prints it (them), in -parentheses, just after the author(s). - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{howpublished}} -\textsf{biblatex} field, mainly applicable in the \textsf{booklet} -entry type, where it replaces the \textsf{publisher}. I have also -retained it in the \textsf{misc} and \textsf{unpublished} entry types, -for historical reasons, and either it or \textsf{pubstate} can be used -in \textsf{music} entries to clarify publication details. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{institution}} -\textsf{biblatex} field. In the \textsf{thesis} entry type, it will -usually identify the university for which the thesis was written, -while in a \textsf{report} entry it may identify any sort of -institution issuing the report. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{introduction}} with the -\textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword} fields above, -\textsf{introduction} will in general function as it does in standard -\textsf{biblatex}. Like those fields, however, it has a special -meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to define -it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword} -undefined) to make an introduction the focus of a citation. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isbn}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, for providing the International Standard Book Number of a -publication. Not typically required by the \emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isrn}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, for providing the International Standard Technical Report -Number of a report. Only relevant to the \textsf{report} entry type, -and not typically required by the \emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issn}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, for providing the International Standard Serial Number of a -periodical in an \textsf{article} or a \textsf{periodical} entry. Not -typically required by the \emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issue}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, designed for \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, or -\textsf{review} entries identified by something like \enquote{Spring} -or \enquote{Summer} rather than by the usual \textsf{month} or -\textsf{number} fields (brown:bremer). - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuesubtitle}} subtitle for an -\textsf{issuetitle} --- see next entry. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuetitle}} -\textsf{biblatex} field, intended to contain the title of a special -issue of any sort of periodical. If the reference is to one article -within the special issue, then this field should be used in an -\textsf{article} entry (conley:fifthgrade), whereas if you are citing -the entire issue as a whole, then it would go in a \textsf{periodical} -entry, instead (good:wholeissue). The \textsf{note} field is the -proper place to identify the type of issue, e.g.,\ \texttt{special - issue}, with the initial letter lower-cased to enable automatic -contextual capitalization. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{journalsubtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{journaltitle} --- see next entry. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{journaltitle}} -\textsf{biblatex} field, replacing the standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -field \textsf{journal}, which, however, still works as an alias. It -contains the name of any sort of periodical publication, and is found -in the \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entry types. In the case -where a piece in an \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} -(\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}) doesn't have an author, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} provides for this field to be used as -the author. See above (section~\ref{sec:entrytypes}) under -\textbf{article} for details. The lakeforester:pushcarts and -nyt:trevorobit entries in \textsf{notes-test.bib} will give you some -idea of how this works. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{keywords}} field is -\textsf{biblatex}'s extremely powerful and flexible technique for -filtering bibliography entries, allowing you to subdivide a -bibliography according to just about any criteria you care to invent. -See \textsf{biblatex.pdf} (3.10.4) for thorough documentation. In -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, the field can provide a convenient means to -exclude certain entries from making their way into a bibliography. We -have already seen (\textbf{letter}, above) how the \emph{Manual} -(17.78) requires, in the case of published collections of letters, -that when more than one letter from the same collected is cited, the -bibliography should contain only a reference to the collection as a -whole (white:ross:memo, white:russ, white:total). Similarly, when -citing both an original text and its translation (see \textbf{userf}, -below), the \emph{Manual} (17.66) suggests including the original at -the end of the translation's bibliography entry, a procedure which -requires that the original not also be printed as a separate -bibliography entry (furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr, -aristotle:metaphy:trans, aristotle:metaphy:gr). Finally, citations of -well-known reference works (like the \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, -for example), need only be presented in notes, and not in the -bibliography (17.238--239; ency:britannica, wikiped:bibtex; see -\textsf{inreference}, above). In all these cases, I have suggested the -inclusion of \texttt{original} in the \textsf{keywords} field, along -with a \texttt{notkeyword=original} in the optional argument to the -\cmd{printbibliography} command, though of course you can choose any -key you wish. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{language}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify the -language(s) in which a work is written. As a general rule, the -Chicago style doesn't require you to provide this information, though -it may well be useful for clarifying the nature of certain works, such -as bilingual editions, for example. There is at least one situation, -however, when the \emph{Manual} does specify this data, and that is -when the title of a work is given in translation, even though no -translation of the work has been published, something that might -happen when a title is in a language deemed to be unparseable by a -majority of your expected readership (17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177; -pirumova, rozner:liberation). In such a case, you should provide the -language(s) involved using this field, connecting multiple languages -using the keyword \texttt{and}. (I have retained \textsf{biblatex's} -\cmd{bibstring} mechanism here, which means that you can use the -standard bibstrings or, if one doesn't exist for the language you -need, just give the name of the language, capitalized as it should -appear in your text. You can also mix these two modes inside one -entry without apparent harm.) - -\mylittlespace An alternative arrangement suggested by the -\emph{Manual} is to retain the original title of a piece but then to -provide its translation, as well. If you choose this option, you'll -need to make use of the \textbf{usere} field, on which see below. In -effect, you'll probably only ever need to use one of these two fields -in any given entry, and in fact \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will -only print one of them if both are present, preferring \textsf{usere} -over \textsf{language} for this purpose (see kern and weresz). Note -also that both of these fields are universally associated with the -\textsf{title} of a work, rather than with a \textsf{booktitle} or a -\textsf{maintitle}. If you need to attach a language or a translation -to either of the latter two, you could probably manage it with special -formatting inside those fields themselves. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{lista}} intend this field -specifically for presenting citations from reference works that are -arranged alphabetically, where the name of the item rather than a page -or volume number should be given. The field is a \textsf{biblatex} -list, which means you should separate multiple items with the keyword -\texttt{and}. Each item receives its own set of quotation marks, and -the whole list will be prefixed by the appropriate string -(\enquote{s.v.,} \emph{sub verbo}, pl.\ \enquote{s.vv.}). -\textsf{Biblatex-chicago-notes} will only print such a field in a -\textsf{book} or an \textsf{inreference} entry, and you should look at -the documentation of these entry types for further details. (See -\emph{Manual} 17.238--239; ency:britannica, grove:sibelius, -times:guide, wikiped:bibtex.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{location}} is -\textsf{biblatex}'s version of the usual \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field -\textsf{address}, though the latter is accepted as an alias if that -simplifies the modification of older .bib files. According to the -\emph{Manual} (17.99), a citation usually need only provide the first -city listed on any title page, though a list of cities separated by -the keyword \enquote{\texttt{and}} will be formatted appropriately. -If the place of publication is unknown, you can use -\cmd{autocap\{n\}.p.}\ instead (17.102), though in many or even most -cases this isn't strictly necessary (17.32--34; virginia:plantation). -For all cities, you should use the common English version of the name, -if such exists (17.101). - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Two more details need explanation here. In -\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries, -there is usually no need for a \textsf{location} field, but -\enquote{if a journal might be confused with another with a similar - title, or if it might not be known to the users of a bibliography,} -then this field can present the place or institution where it is -published (17.174, 17.196; lakeforester:pushcarts, kimluu:diethyl, and -garrett). Less predictably, it is here that \emph{Manual} indicates -that a particular book is a reprint edition (17.123), so in such a -case you can use the \textsf{biblatex-chicago} macro \cmd{reprint}, -followed by a comma, space, and the location (aristotle:metaphy:gr, -schweitzer:bach). (You can also now, somewhat more simply, just put -the string \texttt{reprint} into the \textsf{pubstate} field to -achieve the same result. See the \textsf{pubstate} documentation -below.) The \textsf{origdate} field may be used to give the original -date of publication, and of course more complicated situations should -usually be amenable to inclusion in the \textsf{note} field -(emerson:nature). - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{mainsubtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{maintitle} --- see next entry. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitle}} main title for a -multi-volume work, e.g., \enquote{Opera} or \enquote{Collected Works.} -(See donne:var, euripides:orestes, harley:cartography, lach:asia, -pelikan:chris\-tian, and plato:republic:gr.) - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitleaddon}} annex to the -\textsf{maintitle}, for which see previous entry. Such an annex would -be printed in the main text font. If your data begins with a word -that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a -sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do the right thing. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{month}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, containing the month of publication. This should be an -integer, i.e., \texttt{month=\{3\}} not \texttt{month=\{March\}}. See -\textsf{date} for more information. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{namea}} is one of the fields -\textsf{biblatex} provides for style writers to use, but which it -leaves undefined itself. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago} it contains the -name(s) of the editor(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a -\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation -the \textsf{editor} would be associated with one of these latter -fields (donne:var). You should present names in this field exactly as -you would those in an \textsf{author} or \textsf{editor} field, and -the package will concatenate this field with \textsf{nameb} if they -are identical. See under \textbf{editor} above for the full details. -Cf.\ also \textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{translator}, and the -macros \cmd{partedit}, \cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans}, -\cmd{partcomp}, \cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and -\cmd{partedittransand\-comp}, for which see -section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameaddon}} field is provided by -\textsf{biblatex}, though not used by the standard styles. In -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it allows you, in most entry types, to -specify that an author's name is a pseudo\-nym, or to provide either -the real name or the pseudonym itself, if the other is being provided -in the \textsf{author} field. The abbreviation -\enquote{\texttt{pseud}.}\ (always lowercase in English) is specified, -either on its own or after the pseudo\-nym (centinel:letters, -creasey:ashe:blast, creasey:morton:hide, creasey:york:death, and -le\-carre:quest); \cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}} does the work for you. -See under \textbf{author} above for the full details. - -\mylittlespace In the \textsf{customc} entry type, on the other hand, -which is used to create alphabetized cross-references to other -bibliography entries, the \textsf{nameaddon} field allows you to -change the default string linking the two parts of the -cross-reference. The code automatically tests for a known bibstring, -which it will italicize. Otherwise, it prints the string as is. - -\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameb}} \textsf{namea}, above, -this is a field left undefined by the standard \textsf{biblatex} -styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it contains the name(s) of the -translator(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a -\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation -the \textsf{translator} would be associated with one of these latter -fields (euripides:orestes). You should present names in this field -exactly as you would those in an \textsf{author} or -\textsf{translator} field, and the package will concatenate this field -with \textsf{namea} if they are identical. See under the -\textbf{translator} field below for the full details. Cf.\ also -\textsf{namea}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{origlanguage}, -\textsf{translator}, \textsf{userf} and the macros \cmd{partedit}, -\cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans}, \cmd{partcomp}, -\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and -\cmd{partedittransandcomp} in section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{namec}} \emph{Manual} (17.41) -specifies that works without an author may be listed under an editor, -translator, or compiler, assuming that one is available, and it also -specifies the strings to be used with the name(s) of compiler(s). All -this suggests that the \emph{Manual} considers this to be standard -information that should be made available in a bibliographic -reference, so I have added that possibility to the many that -\textsf{biblatex} already provides, such as the \textsf{editor}, -\textsf{translator}, \textsf{commentator}, \textsf{annotator}, and -\textsf{redactor}, along with writers of an \textsf{introduction}, -\textsf{foreword}, or \textsf{afterword}. Since \textsf{biblatex.bst} -doesn't offer a \textsf{compiler} field, I have adopted for this -purpose the otherwise unused field \textsf{namec}. It is important to -understand that, despite the analogous name, this field does not -function like \textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb}, but rather like -\textsf{editor} or \textsf{translator}, and therefore if used will be -associated with whichever title field these latter two would be were -they present in the same entry. Identical fields among these three -will be concatenated by the package, and concatenated too with the -(usually) unnecessary commentator, annotator and the rest. Also -please note that I've arranged the concatenation algorithms to include -\textsf{namec} in the same test as \textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb}, -so in this particular circumstance you can, if needed, make -\textsf{namec} analogous to these two latter, \textsf{title}-only -fields. (See above under \textbf{editortype} for details of how you -may, in certain circumstances, use that field to identify a compiler. -This method will be particularly useful if you don't need to -concatenate the \textsf{namec} with any other role, because if you use -the \textsf{editor} field \textsf{biblatex} will automatically attend -to alphabetization and name-replacement in the bibliography, and will -also provide a name for short notes.) - -\mylittlespace It might conceivably be necessary at some point to -identify the compiler(s) of a \textsf{title} separate from the -compiler(s) of a \textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, but for the -moment I've run out of available \textsf{name} fields, so you'll have -to fall back on the \cmd{partcomp} macro or the related -\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and -\cmd{partedittransandcomp}, on which see Commands -(section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}) below. (Future releases may be -able to remedy this.) It may be as well to mention here too that of -the three names that can be substituted for the missing -\textsf{author} at the head of an entry, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will choose an \textsf{editor} if -present, then a \textsf{translator} if present, falling back to -\textsf{namec} only in the absence of the other two, and assuming that -the fields aren't identical, and therefore to be concatenated. In a -change from the previous behavior, these algorithms also now test for -\textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb}, which will be used instead of -\textsf{editor} and \textsf{translator}, respectively, giving the -package the greatest likelihood of finding a name to place at the head -of an entry. Please remember, however, that if this name is supplied -by any of the non-standard fields \textsf{name[a-c]}, then you will -need to provide a \textsf{sortkey} to assist with alphabetization in -the bibliography, and also a \textsf{shortauthor} for the short note -form. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{note}} in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to provide bibliographic data -that doesn't easily fit into any other field. In this sense, it's -very like \textsf{addendum}, but the information provided here will be -printed just before the publication data. (See chaucer:alt, -chaucer:liferecords, cook:sotweed, emerson:nature, and rodman:walk for -examples of this usage in action.) It also has a specialized use in -all the periodical types (\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and -\textsf{review}), where it holds supplemental information about a -\textsf{journaltitle}, such as \enquote{special issue} -(conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). In all uses, if your data -begins with a word that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the -beginning of a sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in -lowercase, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do -the right thing. Cf.\ \textsf{addendum}. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{number}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, containing the number of a -\textsf{journaltitle} in an \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} entry, -the number of a \textsf{title} in a \textsf{periodical} entry, or the -volume/number of a book in a \textsf{series}. Generally, in an -\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, this -will be a plain cardinal number, but in such entries -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} now does the right thing if you have a list -or range of numbers (unsigned:ranke:15). In any \textsf{book}-like entry -the field may well contain considerably more information, including -even a reference to \enquote{2nd ser.,} for example, while the -\textsf{series} field in such an entry will contain the name of the -series, rather than a number. This field is also the place for the -patent number in a \textsf{patent} entry. Cf.\ \textsf{issue} and -\textsf{series}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.90--95 and boxer:china, -palmatary:pottery, wauchope:ceramics; 17.163 and beattie:crime, -conley:fifthgrade, friedman:learning, garrett, gibbard, hlatky:hrt, -mcmillen:antebellum, rozner:liberation, warr:ellison.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: This may be an opportune place to point -out that the \emph{Manual} (17.129) prefers arabic to roman numerals -in most circumstances (chapters, volumes, series numbers, etc.), even -when such numbers might be roman in the work cited. The obvious -exception is page numbers, in which roman numerals indicate that the -citation came from the front matter, and should therefore be retained. -Another possible exception is in references to works \enquote{with - many and complex divisions,} in which \enquote{a mixture of roman - and arabic} may be \enquote{easier to disentangle.} - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{options}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, for setting certain options on a per-entry -basis rather than globally. Information about some of the more common -options may be found above under \textsf{author} and below in -section~\ref{sec:options}. See chaucer:alt, eliot:pound, -herwign:office, lecarre:quest, and mla:style for examples of the field -in use. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{organization}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, retained mainly for use in the \textsf{misc}, -\textsf{online}, and \textsf{manual} entry types, where it may be of -use to specify a publishing body that might not easily fit in other -categories. In \textsf{biblatex}, it is also used to identify the -organization sponsoring a conference in a \textsf{proceedings} or -\textsf{inproceedings} entry, and I have retained this as a -possibility, though the \emph{Manual} is silent on the matter. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{origdate}} is a new -\textsf{biblatex} field, replacing the obsolete \textsf{origyear}, and -allowing more than one full specification for those references which -need to provide more than one date. As with the analogous -\textsf{date} field, you provide the date (or range of dates) in -\textsc{iso}8601 format, i.e., \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}. In most entry -types, you would use \textsf{origdate} to provide the date of first -publication of a work, most usually needed only in the case of reprint -editions, but also recommended by the \emph{Manual} for electronic -editions of older works (17.123, 17.146--7; aristotle:metaphy:gr, -emerson:nature, james:ambassadors, schweitzer:bach). In the -\textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc} (with \textsf{entrysubtype}) entry -types, the \textsf{origdate} identifies when a letter (or similar) was -written. In such \textsf{misc} entries, some -\enquote{non-letter-like} materials (like interviews) need the -\textsf{date} field for this purpose, while in \textsf{letter} entries -the \textsf{date} applies to the publication of the whole collection. -If such a published collection were itself a reprint, improvisation in -the \textsf{location} field might be able to rescue the situation. -(See jackson:paulina:letter, white:ross:memo, white:russ, and -white:total for how \textsf{letter} entries usually work; creel:house -shows the field in action in a \textsf{misc} entry, while -spock:interview uses \textsf{date}.) - -\mylittlespace Because the \textsf{origdate} field only accepts -numbers, some improvisation may be needed if you wish to include -\enquote{n.d.}\ (\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) in an entry. In -\textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc}, this information can be placed in -\textsf{titleaddon}, but in other entry types you may need to use the -\textsf{location} field. - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{origlanguage}} keeping with the -\emph{Manual}'s specifications, I have fairly thoroughly redefined -\textsf{biblatex}'s facilities for treating translations. The -\textsf{origtitle} field isn't used, while the \textsf{language} and -\textsf{origdate} fields have been press-ganged for other duties. The -\textsf{origlanguage} field, for its part, retains a dual role in -presenting translations in a bibliography. The details of the -\emph{Manual}'s suggested treatment when both a translation and an -original are cited may be found below under \textbf{userf}. Here, -however, I simply note that the introductory string used to connect -the translation's citation with the original's is \enquote{Originally - published as,} which I suggest may well be inaccurate in a great -many cases, as for instance when citing a work from classical -antiquity, which will most certainly not \enquote{originally} have -been published in the Loeb Classical Library. Although not, strictly -speaking, authorized by the \emph{Manual}, I have provided another way -to introduce the original text, using the \textsf{origlanguage} field, -which must be provided \emph{in the entry for the translation, not the - original text} (aristotle:metaphy:trans). If you put one of the -standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings there (enumerated below), then -the entry will work properly across multiple languages. Otherwise, -just put the name of the language there, localized as necessary, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will eschew \enquote{Originally published - as} in favor of, e.g., \enquote{Greek edition:} or \enquote{French - edition:}. This has no effect in notes, where only the work cited ---- original or translation --- will be printed, but it may help to -make the \emph{Manual}'s suggestions for the bibliography more -palatable. - -\mylittlespace That was the first usage, in keeping at least with the -spirit of the \emph{Manual}. I have also, perhaps less in keeping -with that specification, retained some of \textsf{biblatex}'s -functionality for this field. If an entry doesn't have a -\textsf{userf} field, and therefore won't be combining a text and its -translation in the bibliography, you can also use -\textsf{origlanguage} as Lehman intended it, so that instead of -saying, e.g., \enquote{translated by X,} the entry will read -\enquote{translated from the German by X.} The \emph{Manual} doesn't -mention this, but it may conceivably help avoid certain ambiguities in -some citations. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if you wish to use this -functionality, you have to provide \emph{not} the name of the -language, but rather a bibliography string, which may, at the time of -writing, be one of \texttt{american}, \texttt{brazilian}, -\texttt{danish}, \texttt{dutch}, \texttt{english}, \texttt{french}, -\texttt{german}, \texttt{greek}, \texttt{italian}, \texttt{latin}, -\texttt{norwegian}, \texttt{portuguese}, \texttt{spanish}, or -\texttt{swedish}, to which I've added \texttt{russian}. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace At \colmarginpar{\textbf{origlocation}} least one example -in the \emph{Manual} provides a more complete specification of a -reprinted book's original publication details than has been possible -using previous releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} (17.123). -Starting with this release, you can provide both an -\textsf{origlocation} and an \textsf{origpublisher} to go along with -the \textsf{origdate}, should you so wish, and all of this information -will be printed in long notes and bibliography. You can now also use -this field in a \textsf{letter} or \textsf{misc} (with -\textsf{entrysubtype}) entry to give the place where a published or -unpublished letter was written (17.76). (Jonathan Robinson has -suggested that the \textsf{origlocation} may in some circumstances -actually be necessary for disambiguation, his example being early -printed editions of the same material printed in the same year but in -different cities. The new functionality should make this simple to -achieve. Cf.\ \textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origpublisher} and -\textsf{pubstate}; schweitzer:bach.) - -\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{origpublisher}} with the -\textsf{origlocation} field just above, this new field allows you to -provide fuller original publication details for reprinted books -(17.123). You can now provide an \textsf{origpublisher} and/or an -\textsf{origlocation} in addition to the \textsf{origdate}, and all -will be presented in long notes and bibliography. (Cf.\ -\textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origlocation}, and \textsf{pubstate}; -schweitzer:bach.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{origyear}} field is, as of -\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, obsolete. It is ignored if it appears in a -.bib file. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{pages}} is the standard -\textsf{biblatex} field for providing page references. In many -\textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries you'll find this contains -something other than a page number, e.g. a section name or edition -specification (17.188, 17.191, 17.202; kozinn:review, nyt:obittrevor, -nyt:trevorobit). Of course, the same may be true of almost any sort -of entry, though perhaps with less frequency. Curious readers may -wish to look at brown:bremer (17.172) for an example of a -\textsf{pages} field used to facilitate reference to a two-part -journal article. Cf.\ \textsf{number} for more information on the -\emph{Manual}'s preferences regarding the formatting of numerals; -\textsf{bookpagination} and \textsf{pagination} provide details about -\textsf{biblatex's} mechanisms for specifying what sort of division a -given \textsf{pages} field contains; and \textsf{usera} discusses a -different way to present the section information pertaining to a -newspaper article. - -\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\textbf{pagination}} a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix the -appropriate identifying string to information you provide in the -\textsf{postnote} field of a citation command, whereas -\textsf{bookpagination} allows you to prefix a string to the -\textsf{pages} field. Please see \textbf{bookpagination} above for -all the details on this functionality, as aside from the difference -just mentioned the two fields are equivalent. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{part}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, which identifies physical parts of a single logical volume in -\textsf{book}-like entries, not in periodicals. It has the same -purpose in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, but because the -\emph{Manual} (17.88) calls such a thing a \enquote{book} and not a -\enquote{part,} the string printed in notes and bibliography will, at -least in English, be \enquote{\texttt{bk.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ instead of -the plain dot between volume number and part number -(harley:cartography, lach:asia). This field should only be used in -association with a \textsf{volume} number, so if you need to identify -\enquote{parts} or \enquote{books} that are part of a published -\textsf{series}, for example, then you'll need to use a different -field, (which in this case would be \textsf{number} -[palmatary:pottery]). Cf.\ \textsf{volume}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{publisher}} -\textsf{biblatex} field. Remember that \enquote{\texttt{and}} is a -keyword for connecting multiple publishers, so if a publisher's name -contains \enquote{and,} then you should either use the ampersand (\&) -or enclose the whole name in additional braces. (See \emph{Manual} -17.103--114; aristotle:metaphy:gr, cohen:schiff, creasey:ashe:blast, -dunn:revolutions.) - -\mylittlespace There are, as one might expect, a couple of further -subtleties involved here. Ordinarily, two publishers will be -separated by a forward slash in both notes and bibliography, but if a -company issues \enquote{certain books through a special publishing - division or under a special imprint,} then the two names will be -separated by a comma, which you will need to provide in the -\textsf{publisher} field. The \emph{Manual}'s example (17.112) is -\enquote{\texttt{Ohio University Press, Swallow Press},} which would -cause \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} no problems. If a book has two -co-publishers, \enquote{usually in different countries,} (17.113) then -the simplest thing to do is to choose one, probably the nearest one -geographically. If you feel it necessary to include both, then -levistrauss:savage demonstrates one way of doing so, using a -combination of the \textsf{publisher} and \textsf{location} fields. -Finally, if the publisher is unknown, then the \emph{Manual} -recommends (17.109) simply using the place (if known) and the date. -If for some reason you need to indicate the absence of a publisher, -the abbreviation given by the \emph{Manual} is \texttt{n.p.}, though -this can also stand for \enquote{no place.} Some style guides -apparently suggest using \texttt{s.n.}\,(= \emph{sine nomine}) to -specify the lack of a publisher, but the \emph{Manual} doesn't mention -this. - -\mybigspace Due \mymarginpar{\textbf{pubstate}} to specific -requirements in the author-date style, I have implemented this field -there as a way of providing accurate citations of reprinted books. As -the functionality seemed useful, I have also included some of it in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. In previous releases you could -identify a reprint by placing \cmd{bibstring\{reprint\}} in the -\textsf{location} field, followed by a comma, and the style would -print the appropriate string in notes and bibliography. Now, if it is -more convenient, easier to remember, or if you want to reuse your .bib -database for the author-date style, you can simply put the string -\texttt{reprint} into the \textsf{pubstate} field, and the package -will take care of everything for you. Both of these methods will now -work just fine, but please choose only one per entry, otherwise the -string will be printed twice. Please note, also, that this automatic -mechanism has been disabled in \textsf{music} and \textsf{video} -entries, as it isn't appropriate to those sorts of material. In the -latter, \textsf{pubstate} will be silently ignored, whereas in the -former, for compatibility with the author-date style, the field -functions as a synonym for \textsf{howpublished}, and will be printed -verbatim. Currently, if you put anything besides \texttt{reprint} in -the \textsf{pubstate} field of anything except \textsf{music} entries, -it too will silently be ignored, but this may change in future -releases. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{redactor}} have implemented this -field just as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, even though the -\emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may be useful for some -purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator} and \textsf{commentator}. - -\mybigspace \textbf{NB:} \mymarginpar{\textbf{reprinttitle}} -\textbf{Please note that this feature is in an alpha state, and that - I'm contemplating using a different field in the future for this - functionality. I include it here in the hope that it might receive - some testing in the meantime.} At the request of Will Small, I have -included a means of providing the original publication details of an -essay or a chapter that you are citing from a subsequent reprint, -e.g., a \emph{Collected Essays} volume. In such a case, at least -according to the \emph{Manual} (17.73), such details needn't be -provided in notes, only in the bibliography, and then only if these -details are \enquote{of particular interest.} The data would follow -an introductory phrase like \enquote{originally published as,} making -the problem strictly parallel to that of including details of a work -in the original language alongside the details of its translation. I -have addressed the latter problem with the \textsf{userf} field, which -provides a sort of cross-referencing method for this purpose, and -\textsf{reprinttitle} works in \emph{exactly} the same way. In the -.bib entry for the reprint you include a cross-reference to the cite -key of the original location using the \textsf{reprinttitle} field -(which it may help mnemonically to think of as a \enquote{reprinted - title} field). The main difference between the two forms is that -\textsf{userf} prints all but the \textsf{author} of the original -work, whereas \textsf{reprinttitle} suppresses both the -\textsf{author} and the \textsf{title} of the original, giving only -the more general details, beginning with, e.g., the -\textsf{journaltitle} or \textsf{booktitle} and continuing from there. -The string prefacing this information will be \enquote{Originally - published in.} Please see the documentation on \textsf{userf} below -for all the details on how to create .bib entries for presenting your -data. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{series}} standard \textsf{biblatex} -field, usually just a number in an \textsf{article}, -\textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, almost always the name -of a publication series in \textsf{book}-like entries. If you need to -attach further information to the \textsf{series} name in a -\textsf{book}-like entry, then the \textsf{number} field is the place -for it, whether it be a volume, a number, or even something like -\enquote{2nd ser.} or \enquote{\cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}.} Of -course, you can also use \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}} or -\cmd{bibstring\{newseries\}} in an \textsf{article} entry, but there -you would place it in the \textsf{series} field itself. (In fact, the -\textsf{series} field in \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and -\textsf{review} entries is one of the places where \textsf{biblatex} -allows you just to use the plain bibstring \texttt{oldseries}, for -example, rather than making you type \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}. -The \textsf{type} field in \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, -\textsf{report}, and \textsf{thesis} entries also has this -auto-detection mechanism in place; see the discussion of -\cmd{bibstring} below for details.) In whatever entry type, these -bibstrings produce the required abbreviation, which thankfully is the -same in both notes and bibliography. (For books and similar entries, -see \emph{Manual} 17.90--95; boxer:china, browning:aurora, -palmatary:pottery, plato:republic:gr, wauchope:ceramics; for -periodicals, see 17.178; garaud:gatine, sewall:letter.) Cf.\ -\textsf{number} for more information on the \emph{Manual}'s -preferences regarding the formatting of numerals. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shortauthor}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} makes -considerably grea\-ter use of it than the standard styles. For the -purposes of the Chicago style, the field provides the name to be used -in the short form of a footnote. In the vast majority of cases, you -don't need to specify it, because the \textsf{biblatex} system selects -the author's last name from the \textsf{author} field and uses it in -such a reference, but in a few cases this default behavior won't work. -In books without an author and listed under an editor, -\textsf{biblatex} does the right thing and uses the surname of the -editor in a short note (zukowsky:chicago), but if the work is listed -under a compiler (or any of the non-standard names -\textsf{name[a-c]}), you need to provide that person's name in -\textsf{shortauthor}, and also remember to provide a \textsf{sortkey} -to make sure the work will be alphabetized correctly in the -bibliography. (The current version of \textsf{biblatex} will now -automatically alphabetize by \textsf{translator} if that is the name -given at the head of an entry.) You no longer, however, need to -provide one in an author-less \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} -entry (\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}), where you allow -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} to use the \textsf{journaltitle} as -the author, nor in author-less \textsf{manual} entries, where the -\textsf{organization} will be so used. The style now automatically -provides the same substitution in the short note form, though you'll -still need to help the alphabetization routines by providing a -\textsf{sortkey} field in such cases (dyna:browser, gourmet:052006, -lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit). - -\mylittlespace As mentioned under \textsf{editortype}, the -\emph{Manual} (17.41) recommends against providing the identifying -string (e.g., ed.\ or trans.)\ in the short note form, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} follows their recommendation. If you -need to provide these strings in such a citation, then you'll have to -do so by hand in the \textsf{shortauthor} field, or in the -\textsf{shorteditor} field, whichever you are using. - -\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorteditor}} -\textsf{shortauthor}, a field to provide a name for a short footnote, -in this case for, e.g., a \textsf{collection} entry that typically -lacks an author. The \textsf{shortauthor} field works just as well in -most situations, but if you have set \texttt{useauthor=false} (and not -\texttt{useeditor=false}) in an entry's \textsf{options} field, then -only \textsf{shorteditor} will be recognized. Cf.\ -\textsf{editortype}, above. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorthand}} is -\textsf{biblatex}'s mechanism for using abbreviations in place of the -usual short note form, and I've left it effectively unmodified in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, apart from a few formatting tweaks. -Any entry which contains such a field will produce a normal first -note, either long or short according to your package options, -informing the reader that the work will hereafter be cited by this -abbreviation. As in \textsf{biblatex}, the \cmd{printshorthands} -command will produce a formatted list of abbreviations for reference -purposes, a list which the \emph{Manual} suggests should be placed -either in the front matter (when using footnotes) or before the -endnotes, in case these are used. (See 16.39--40, and also -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for more information.) - -\mylittlespace As I mentioned above under \textbf{crossref}, extra -care is needed when using shorthands with cross-references, and I -would avoid them in all parent entries, at least in the current state -of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. - -\mybigspace When \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorthandintro}} you include a -\textsf{shorthand} in an entry, it will ordinarily appear the first -time you cite the work, at the end of a long note, prefaced by the -phrase \enquote{Henceforth cited as.} With this standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, you can change that phrase to suit your -needs. Please note, first, that you need to include the shorthand in -this field as you intend it to appear and, second, that you still need -the \textsf{shorthand} field present in order to ensure the -appropriate presentation of the shorthand in later citations and in -the list of shorthands. - -\mybigspace A \colmarginpar{\textbf{shorttitle}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, primarily used to provide an abbreviated -title for short notes. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, you need -to take particular care with \textsf{letter} entries, where, as -explained above, the \emph{Manual} requires a special format -(\enquote{\texttt{to Recipient}}). (See 17.76--78; -jackson:paulina:letter, white:ross:memo, white:russ.) Some -\textsf{misc} entries (with an \textsf{entrysubtype}) also need -special attention. (See creel:house, where the full \textsf{title} is -used as the \textsf{shortauthor} + \textsf{shorttitle} by using -\cmd{headlesscite} commands. Placing \cmd{isdot} into the -\textsf{shortauthor} field no longer works in \textsf{biblatex} 1.6 -and later, so be sure to check your .bib files when you upgrade.) -Remember, also, that the generic titles in \textsf{review} and -\textsf{misc} entries may not want capitalization in all contexts, so, -as with the \textsf{title} field, if you begin a \textsf{shorttitle} -with a lowercase letter the style will do the right thing -(barcott:review, bundy:macneil, Clemens:letter, kozinn:review, -ratliff:review, unsigned:ranke:15). - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{sortkey}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify how you want -an entry alphabetized in a bibliography. In general, if an entry -doesn't turn up where you expect or want it, this field should provide -the solution. More particularly, entries without an \textsf{author} -or an \textsf{editor}, or with a corporate author beginning with the -definite or indefinite article, will usually require your assistance -in this way (chaucer:alt, cotton:manufacture:15, gourmet:052006, -lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:obittrevor, nyt:trevorobit, silver:gawain, -unsigned:ranke:15, virginia:plantation). Lehman also provides -\textbf{sortname}, \textbf{sorttitle}, and \textbf{sortyear} for more -fine-grained control. Please consult \textsf{biblatex.pdf} for the -details. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{subtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{title} --- see next entry. - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{title}} the vast majority of -cases, this field works just as it always has in \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and -just as it does in \textsf{biblatex}. Nearly every entry will have -one, the most likely exceptions being \textsf{incollection} or -\textsf{online} entries with a merely generic title, instead of a -specific one (centinel:letters, powell:email). The main source of -difficulties flows from the \emph{Manual}'s rules for formatting -\textsf{titles}, rules which also hold for \textsf{booktitles} and -\textsf{maintitles}. The whole point of using a -\textsc{Bib}\TeX-based system is for it to do the formatting for you, -and in most cases \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} does just that, -surrounding titles with quotation marks, italicizing them, or -occasionally just leaving them alone. When, however, a title is -quoted within a title, then you need to know some of the rules. A -summary here should serve to clarify them, and help you to understand -when \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} might need your help in order to -comply with them. - -\mylittlespace The internal rules of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} -are as follows: - -\begin{description} -\item[\qquad Italics:] \textsf{booktitle}, \textsf{maintitle}, and - \textsf{journaltitle} in all entry types; \textsf{title} of - \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{book}, \textsf{bookinbook}, - \textsf{booklet}, \textsf{collection}, \textsf{inbook}, - \textsf{manual}, \textsf{misc} (with no \textsf{entrysubtype}), - \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings}, \textsf{report}, - \textsf{suppbook}, and \textsf{suppcollection} entry types. -\item[\qquad Quotation Marks:] \textsf{title} of \textsf{article}, - \textsf{image}, \textsf{incollection}, \textsf{inproceedings}, - \textsf{online}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{periodical}, - \textsf{thesis}, and \textsf{unpublished} entry types, - \textsf{issuetitle} in \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and - \textsf{review} entry types. -\item[\qquad Unformatted:] \textsf{booktitleaddon}, - \textsf{maintitleaddon}, and \textsf{titleaddon} in all entry types, - \textsf{title} of \textsf{customc}, \textsf{letter}, \textsf{misc} - (with an \textsf{entrysubtype}), \textsf{review}, and - \textsf{suppperiodical} entry types. -\item[\qquad Italics or Quotation Marks:] All of the audiovisual entry - types --- \textsf{audio}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video} --- - have to serve as analogues both to \textsf{book} and to - \textsf{inbook}. Therefore, if there is both a \textsf{title} and a - \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title} will be in quotation - marks. If there is no \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title} - will be italicized. -\end{description} - -Now, the rules for which entry type to use for which sort of work tend -to be fairly straightforward, but in cases of doubt you can consult -section \ref{sec:entrytypes} above, the examples in -\textsf{notes-test.bib}, or go to the \emph{Manual} itself, -8.164--210. Assuming, then, that you want to present a title within a -title, and you know what sort of formatting each of the two would, on -its own, require, then the following rules apply: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item Inside an italicized title, all other titles are enclosed in - quotation marks and italicized, so in such cases all you need to do - is provide the quotation marks using \cmd{mkbibquote}, which will - take care of any following punctuation that needs to be brought - within the closing quotation mark(s) (17.58; donne:var, - mchugh:wake). -\item Inside a quoted title, you should present another title as it - would appear if it were on its own, so in such cases you'll need to - do the formatting yourself. Within the double quotes of the title - another quoted title would take single quotes --- the - \cmd{mkbibquote} command does this for you automatically, and also, - I repeat, takes care of any following punctuation that needs to be - brought within the closing quotation mark(s). (See 17.157; garrett, - loften:hamlet, murphy:silent, white:callimachus.) -\item Inside a plain title (most likely in a \textsf{review} entry or - a \textsf{titleaddon} field), you should present another title as it - would appear on its own, once again formatting it yourself using - \cmd{mkbibemph} or \cmd{mkbibquote}. (barcott:review, gibbard, - osborne:poison, ratliff:review, unsigned:ranke:15). -\end{enumerate} - -\enlargethispage{-2\baselineskip} - -The \emph{Manual} provides a few more rules, as well. A word normally -italicized in text should also be italicized in a quoted or plain-text -title, but should be in roman (\enquote{reverse italics}) in an -italicized title. A quotation used as a (whole) title (with or -without a subtitle) retains its quotation marks when it is quoted or -plain, but loses them when it is italicized (17.60, 17.157; lewis). A -word or phrase in quotation marks, but that isn't a quotation, retains -those marks in all title types (kimluu:diethyl). - -\mylittlespace Finally, please note that in all \textsf{review} (and -\textsf{suppperiodical}) entries, and in \textsf{misc} entries with an -\textsf{entrysubtype}, and only in those entries, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically capitalize the -first word of the \textsf{title} after sentence-ending punctuation, -assuming that such a \textsf{title} begins with a lowercase letter in -your .bib database. See \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} below for -more details. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{titleaddon}} -\textsf{biblatex} intends this field for use with additions to titles -that may need to be formatted differently from the titles themselves, -and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} uses it in just this way, with the -additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the \textsf{title} -entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type, providing a fairly -powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -to do what you want (cf.\ centinel:letters, powell:email). This field -will always be unformatted, that is, neither italicized nor placed -within quotation marks, so any formatting you may need within it -you'll need to provide manually yourself. The single exception to -this rule is when your data begins with a word that would ordinarily -only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, in which case you -need then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will automatically do the right thing. -See\ \textbf{\textbackslash autocap}, below. (Cf.\ brown:bremer, -osborne:poison, reaves:rosen, and white:ross:memo for examples where -the field starts with a lowercase letter; morgenson:market provides an -example where the \textsf{titleaddon} field, holding the name of a -regular column in a newspaper, is capitalized, a situation that is -handled as you would expect.) - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{translator}} far as possible, I -have implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, -but the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain -complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his -documentation that the \textsf{translator} field will be associated -with a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle}, -depending on the sort of entry. More specifically, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{translator} with the -most comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if -there is one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title}, -if the other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is -exactly the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters, -plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are -numerous cases that require, for example, an additional translator for -one part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work. -For these cases I have provided the \textsf{nameb} field. You should -format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or -\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the -\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). - -\mylittlespace I have also provided a \textsf{namea} field, which -holds the editor of a given \textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If -\textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb} are the same, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will concatenate them, just as -\textsf{biblatex} already does for \textsf{editor}, -\textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the compiler). -Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will need separate -translators for each of the three sorts of title. For this, and for -various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{parttrans} macro -(and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note} field or in -one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields (ratliff:review). (Because the -strings identifying a translator differ in notes and bibliography, one -can't simply write them out in such a field, hence the need for a -macro, which I discuss further in the commands section below -[\ref{sec:formatcommands}].) - -\mylittlespace Finally, as I detailed above under \textbf{author}, in -the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}, the -\textsf{translator} will be used at the head of an entry -(silver:gawain), and the bibliography entry alphabetized by the -translator's name, behavior that can be controlled with the -\texttt{{usetranslator}} switch in the \textsf{options} field. Cf.\ -\textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea}, \textsf{nameb}, and -\textsf{namec}. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{type}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, and in its normal usage serves to identify -the type of a \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, or -\textsf{thesis} entry. \textsf{Biblatex} 0.7 introduced the ability, -in some circumstances, to use a bibstring without inserting it in a -\cmd{bibstring} command, and in these entry types the \textsf{type} -field works this way, allowing you simply to input, e.g., -\texttt{patentus} rather than \cmd{bibstring\{patentus\}}, though both -will work. (See petroff:impurity; herwign:office, murphy:silent, and -ross:thesis all demonstrate how the \textsf{type} field may sometimes -be automatically set in such entries by using one of the standard -entry-type aliases). - -\mylittlespace With the arrival of Lehman's remarkable -punctuation-tracking code in \textsf{biblatex} 0.8, there can be -almost no use for the \textsf{type} field as a switch for the -\cmd{custpunct} macro, so I have been able to reuse it in order to -generalize the functioning of the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, and of -its alias \textsf{suppcollection}. In such entries, you can now use -the \textsf{type} field to specify what sort of supplemental material -you are citing, e.g., \enquote{\texttt{preface to}} or -\enquote{\texttt{postscript to}.} Cf.\ \textsf{suppbook} above for the -details. (See \emph{Manual} 17.74--75; polakow:afterw, prose:intro). - -\mylittlespace You can also use the \textsf{type} field in -\textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and -\textsf{video} entries to identify the medium of the work, e.g., -\texttt{oil on canvas}, \texttt{albumen print}, \texttt{compact disc} -or \texttt{MPEG}. If the first word in this field would normally only -be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then leave it in -lowercase in your .bib file and \textsf{biblatex} will automatically -do the right thing in citations. Cf.\ \textsf{artwork}, -\textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video}, -above, for all the details. (See auden:reading, bedford:photo, -cleese:holygrail, leo:madonna, nytrumpet:art:15.) - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{url}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, it holds the url of an online publication, though you can -provide one for all entry types. The required \LaTeX\ package -\textsf{url} will ensure that your documents format such references -properly, in the text and in the reference apparatus. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{urldate}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, it identifies exactly when you accessed a given url. This -field would contain the whole date, in \textsc{iso}8601 format -(evanston:library, grove:sibelius, hlatky:hrt, osborne:poison, -sirosh:visualcortex, wikiped:bibtex). Please note that the -\textbf{urlday}, \textbf{urlmonth}, and \textbf{urlyear} fields are -all now obsolete. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{usera}} supplemental -\textsf{biblatex} field which functions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -almost as a \enquote{\textsf{journaltitleaddon}} field. In -\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries -with \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, the contents of this -field will be placed, unformatted and between commas, after the -\textsf{journaltitle} and before the date. The main use is for -identifying the broadcast network when you cite a radio or television -program (bundy:macneil), though you may also want to use it to -identify the section of a newspaper in which you've found a particular -article (morgenson:market). (See \emph{Manual} 17.190, 17.207. As -far as I can work out, newspaper section information may be placed -either before the date [\textsf{usera}] or after it [\textsf{pages}]. -Cp. kozinn:review [17.202] and morgenson:market [17.190]. The choice -would appear to be yours.) - -\mybigspace \textbf{NB:} \mymarginpar{\textbf{userb}} \textbf{this - field is now deprecated, mainly because it is very unlikely you will - have any further need for the \textbackslash custpunct macros. I - leave the code, and the instructions for how to use it, in place, - because it's barely possible that a need for it might still arise.} -A supplemental \textsf{biblatex} field, with a very specific use in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. If the occasion does arise when you -need to supply some context-sensitive punctuation yourself, then -usually the \cmd{custpunct} command will then be needed, controlled in -certain circumstances by a toggle in the \textsf{type} field. If, -however, you already need the \textsf{type} field for its regular -usage in a \textsf{suppbook}, \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, -\textsf{report}, or \textsf{thesis} entry, and if you need to control -the \cmd{custpunct} with a toggle, then you'll have to use -\cmd{custpunctb}, toggled by putting the exact string \texttt{plain} -in \textsf{userb}. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{userc}} have now implemented this -supplemental \textsf{biblatex} field as part of Chicago's name -cross-referencing system. (The \enquote{c} part is meant as a sort of -mnemonic for this function, though it's perfectly possible to use the -field in other contexts.) If you use the \textbf{customc} entry type -to include alphabetized cross-references to other, separate entries in -a bibliography, it is unlikely that you will cite the \textsf{customc} -entry in the body of your text. Therefore, in order for it to appear -in the bibliography, you have two choices. You can either include the -entry key of the \textsf{customc} entry in a \cmd{nocite} command -inside your document, or you can place that entry key in the -\textsf{userc} field of another .bib entry that you will be citing. -In the latter case, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will call \cmd{nocite} -for you, and this method should ensure that there will be at least one -entry in the bibliography to which the cross-reference will point. -(See 17.39--40; lecarre:cornwell, lecarre:quest.) - -\mybigspace NB: \mymarginpar{\textbf{userd}} this field is now -obsolete. If it appears in a .bib file it will be ignored. - -\mybigspace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{usere}} supplemental -\textsf{biblatex} field, which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses -specifically to provide a translated \textsf{title} of a work, -something that may be needed if you deem the original language -unparseable by a significant portion of your likely readership. The -\emph{Manual} offers two alternatives in such a situation: either you -can translate the title and use that translation in your -\textsf{title} field, providing the original language in -\textsf{language}, or you can give the original title in -\textsf{title} and the translation in \textsf{usere}. If you choose -the latter, you may need to provide a \textsf{shorttitle} so that the -short note form is also parseable. Cf.\ \textbf{language}, above. -(See 17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177; kern, weresz.) - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{userf}} is the last of the -supplemental fields which \textsf{biblatex} provides, used by -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} for a very specific purpose. When you cite -both a translation and its original, the \emph{Manual} (17.66) -recommends that, in the bibliography at least, you combine references -to both texts in one entry, though the presentation in notes is pretty -much up to you. In order to follow this specification, I have -provided a third cross-referencing system (the others being -\textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref}), and have chosen the name -\textsf{userf} because it might act as a mnemonic for its function. - -\mylittlespace In order to use this system, you should start by -entering both the original and its translation into your .bib file, -just as you normally would. The mechanism works for any entry type, -and the two entries need not be of the same type. In the entry for -the \emph{translation}, you put the cite key of the original into the -\textsf{userf} field. In the \emph{original's} entry, you need to -include a toggle in the \textsf{keywords} field that will prevent that -entry from being printed separately in the bibliography --- I have -chosen the string \texttt{original}, and use -\texttt{notkeyword=original} in the \cmd{printbibliography} command, -though you can use anything you want. In this standard case, the data -for the translation will be printed first, followed by the string -\texttt{originally published as}, followed by the original, author -omitted, in what amounts to the same format that the \emph{Manual} -uses for long footnotes (furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr). As -explained above (\textbf{origlanguage}), I have also included a way to -modify the string printed before the original. In the entry for the -\emph{translation}, you put the original's language in -\textsf{origlanguage}, and instead of \texttt{originally published - as}, you'll get \texttt{French edition:} or \texttt{Latin edition:}, -etc.\ (aristotle:metaphy:gr, aristotle:metaphy:trans). - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{venue}} \textsf{biblatex} -offers this field for use in \textsf{proceedings} and -\textsf{inproceedings} entries, but I haven't yet implemented it, -mainly because the \emph{Manual} has nothing to say about it. Perhaps -the \textsf{organization} field could be used, for the moment, -instead. Anything in a \textsf{venue} field will be ignored. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{version}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, currently only available in \textsf{misc} and \textsf{patent} -entries in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volume}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. It holds the volume of a \textsf{journaltitle} in -\textsf{article} (and some \textsf{review}) entries, and also the -volume of a multi-volume work in many other sorts of entry. Cf.\ -\textsf{part}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volumes}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. It holds the total number of volumes of a multi-volume work, -and its use in an entry triggers particular behavior in short notes -referring to such an entry, which notes will not print any punctuation -between the title of the work and the volume+page reference given in -the optional postnote field of the relevant \cmd{cite} command -(17.134; meredith:letters). If this behavior is inconvenient in a -particular entry, you may need to provide a \textsf{shorttitle} field -ending in an \cmd{addcomma}, though in such a case you'd need to -ensure that the \cmd{cite} command's postnote field contained -something, as otherwise the note would end, wrongly, with a comma. -(The \emph{Manual} appears to be somewhat inconsistent on this -question [cf.\ 16.47], so if this feature proves onerous in use I -could remove it.) - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{xref}} modified \textsf{crossref} -field provided by \textsf{biblatex}. See \textbf{crossref}, above. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{year}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. It usually identifies the year of publication, though unlike -the \textsf{date} field it allows non-numeric input, so you can put -\enquote{n.d.}\ (or, to be language agnostic, -\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) here if required, or indeed any other sort -of non-numerical date information. If you can guess the date then you -can include that guess in square brackets instead of, or after, the -\enquote{n.d.}\ abbreviation. Cf.\ bedford:photo, clark:mesopot, -ross:leo, thesis:madonna. - -\subsection{Commands} -\label{sec:commands} - -In this section I shall attempt to document all those commands you may -need when using \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} that I have either -altered with respect to the standard provided by \textsf{biblatex} or -that I have provided myself. Some of these, unfortunately, will make -your .bib file incompatible with other \textsf{biblatex} styles, but -I've been unable to avoid this. Any ideas for more elegant, and more -compatible, solutions will be warmly welcomed. - -\subsubsection{Formatting Commands} -\label{sec:formatcommands} - -These commands allow you to fine-tune the presentation of your -references in both notes and bibliography. You can find many examples -of their usage in \textsf{notes-test.bib}, and I shall try to point -you toward a few such entries in what follows. \textbf{NB:} -\textsf{biblatex's} \cmd{mkbibquote} command is now mandatory in some -situations. See its entry below. - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Version \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}} 0.8 -of \textsf{biblatex} introduced the \cmd{autocap} command, which -capitalizes a word inside a note or bibliography entry if that word -follows sentence-ending punctuation, and leaves it lowercase -otherwise. As this command is both more powerful and more elegant -than the kludge I designed for a previous version of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} (see\ \textbf{\textbackslash - bibstring} below), you should be aware that the use of the -single-letter \cmd{bibstring} commands in your .bib file is obsolete. - -\mylittlespace In order somewhat to reduce the burden on users even -further, I have, following Lehman's example, implemented a new system -which automatically tracks the capitalization of certain fields in -your .bib file. I chose these fields after a non-scientific survey of -entries in my own databases, so of course if you have ideas for the -extension of this facility I would be most interested to hear them. -In order to take advantage of this functionality, all you need do is -begin the data in the appropriate field with a lowercase letter, -e.g.,\ \texttt{note = \{with the assistance of X\}}. If the data -begins with a capital letter --- and this is not infrequent --- that -capital will always be retained. (cf., e.g., creel:house, -morgenson:market.) If, on the other hand, you for some reason need -such a field always to start with a lowercase letter, then you can try -using the \cmd{isdot} macro at the start, which turns off the -mechanism without printing anything itself. Here, then, is the -complete list of fields where this functionality is active: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item The \textbf{addendum} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{booktitleaddon} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{edition} field in all entry types. (Numerals work - as you expect them to here.) -\item The \textbf{maintitleaddon} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{note} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{shorttitle} field in the \textsf{review} - (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type, - in the latter case, however, only when there is an - \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is - from an archive. -\item The \textbf{title} field in the \textsf{review} - (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type, - in the latter case, however, only when there is an - \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is - from an archive. -\item The \textbf{titleaddon} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{type} field in \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio}, - \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, \textsf{suppbook}, - \textsf{suppcollection}, and \textsf{video} entry types. -\end{enumerate} - -In any other cases --- and there are only two examples of this in -\textsf{notes-test.bib} (centinel:letters, powell:email) --- you'll -need to provide the \cmd{autocap} command yourself. Indeed, if you -accidentally do so in one of the above fields, it shouldn't matter at -all, and you'll still get what you want, but taking advantage of the -automatic provisions should at least save some typing. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash bibstring}} is -Lehman's very powerful mechanism to allow \textsf{biblatex} -automatically to provide a localized version of a string, and to -determine whether that string needs capitalization, depending on where -it falls in an entry. In the first release of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, the style relied very heavily on this -macro, particularly on an extension I provided by defining all 26 -letters of the (ASCII) alphabet as \texttt{bibstrings} -(\cmd{bibstring\{a\}}, \cmd{bibstring\{b\}}, etc.) While you should -continue to use the standard, whole-word bibstrings, \textbf{all use - of the single-letter variants I formerly provided is obsolete, and - will generate an error}. This functionality has been replaced by -the \cmd{autocap} command, which does the same thing, only more -elegantly. This command was designed by Philipp Lehman, and has now -been included in version 0.8 of \textsf{biblatex}. For yet greater -convenience I have implemented, following Lehman's example, a system -automating this functionality in all of the entry fields where its use -was, by my reckoning, most frequent. This means that, when you -require this functionality, all you need do is input the data in such -a field starting with a lowercase letter, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will do the rest with no further -assistance. In my \textsf{notes-test.bib} file, this new mechanism in -effect eliminated all need for the single-letter \texttt{bibstrings} -and very nearly all need for the \cmd{autocap} command --- -centinel:letters and powell:email being the only exceptions. Please -see \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} above for full details. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace I should also mention here that \textsf{biblatex 0.7} -introduced a new functionality which sometimes allows you simply to -input, for example, \texttt{newseries} instead of -\cmd{bib\-string\{newseries\}}, the package auto-detecting when a -bibstring is involved and doing the right thing, though in all such -cases either form will work. This functionality is available in the -\textsf{series} field of \textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and -\textsf{review} entries; in the \textsf{type} field of -\textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, and \textsf{thesis} -entries; in the \textsf{location} field of \textsf{patent} entries; in -the \textsf{language} field in all entry types; and in the -\textsf{nameaddon} field in \textsf{customc} entries. These are the -places, as far as I can make out, where \textsf{biblatex's} standard -styles support this feature, and I have added the last, -style-specific, one. If Lehman generalizes it still further in a -future release, I shall do the same, if possible. - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash custpunct} \\ - \textbf{\textbackslash custpunctb}} common with other American -citation styles, the \emph{Manual} requires that the commas and -periods separating units of a reference go inside any quotation marks -that happen to be present. As of version 0.8c, \textsf{biblatex} -contains truly remarkable code that handles this situation in very -nearly complete generality, detecting punctuation after the closing -quotation mark and moving it inside when necessary, and also -controlling which punctuation marks can be printed after which other -punctuation marks, whether quotation marks intervene or not. This -functionality is now mature, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} -relies on this code to place punctuation in the \enquote{American - style,} rather than on complicated \cmd{DeclareFieldFormat} -instructions that attempt to anticipate all possible permutations. -One result of this, thankfully, is that both \cmd{custpunct} and -\cmd{custpunctb} are now basically unnecessary, as their only purpose -was to supply context-appropriate punctuation inside any quotation -marks that users themselves provided as part of various entry fields. -A second consequence, and I've already recommended this in previous -releases anyway, is that users now \emph{must} use \cmd{mkbibquote} -instead of \cmd{enquote} or the usual \LaTeX\ mechanisms inside their -.bib files. For further details, please see the \cmd{mkbibquote} -entry below. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace I have retained the code for the \cmd{custpunct} -commands in \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, in case a particularly gnarly -entry might still require them, but I have already started to re-use -the \textsf{type} field, which formerly served as a switch for -\cmd{custpunct}, in other contexts (see \textbf{artwork}, -\textbf{image}, and \textbf{suppbook} above). - -\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash isdot}} is a -standard \textsf{biblatex} macro, which in previous releases of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} could function as a convenient placeholder -in entry fields that, for one reason or another, you may have wanted -to have defined and yet to print nothing. With the release of -\textsf{biblatex} 1.6, this no longer works as before, a situation -which has revealed a number of inconsistencies and bugs in my code, -the rectification of which may therefore require some changes to your -.bib files, assuming you've taken advantage of this mechanism. I -believe that all the situations formerly calling for this specific use -of the macro can now be addressed by more standard means, i.e., the -\cmd{headlesscite} commands and the \texttt{useauthor=false} -declaration in the \textsf{options} field. (See creel:house, -nyt:obittrevor, sewall:letter, unsigned:ranke:15, and white:total.) - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash letterdatelong}} -have provided this macro mainly for use in the optional postnote field -of the various citation commands. When citing a letter (published or -unpublished, \textsf{letter} or \textsf{misc}), it may be useful to -append the date to the usual short note form in order to disambiguate -references. This macro simply prints the date of a letter, or indeed -of any other sort of correspondence. (If your main document language -isn't English, it's better just to use the standard \textsf{biblatex} -command \cmd{printorigdate}.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash mkbibquote}} is -the standard \textsf{biblatex} command, which requires attention here -because it is a crucial part of the mechanism of Lehman's -\enquote{American} punctuation system. If you look in -\textsf{chicago-notes.cbx} you'll see that the quoted fields, e.g., an -\textsf{article} or \textsf{incollection title}, have this command in -their formatting, which does most of the work for you. If, however, -you need to provide additional quotation marks in a field --- a quoted -title within a title, for example --- then you may need to use this -command so that any following period or comma will be brought within -the closing quotation marks. Its use is \emph{required} when the -quoted material comes at the end of a field, and I recommend always -using it in your .bib database, as it does no harm even when that -condition is not fulfilled. A few examples from -\textsf{notes-test.bib} should help to clarify this. - -\mylittlespace In an \textsf{article} entry, the \textsf{title} -contains a quoted phrase: - -\begin{quotation} - \noindent\texttt{title = \{Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage of the \\ - \indent\cmd{mkbibquote}\{Morning After\} Pill\}} -\end{quotation} - -Here, because the quoted text doesn't come at the end of title, and no -punctuation will ever need to be drawn within the closing quotation -mark, you could instead use \texttt{\cmd{enquote}\{Morning After\}} or -even \texttt{`Morning After'}. (Note the single quotation marks here ---- the other two methods have the virtue of taking care of nesting -for you.) All of these will produce the formatted -\enquote{Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage of the \enquote{Morning - After} Pill.} Here, by contrast, is a \textsf{book title}: - -\begin{quotation} - \noindent \texttt{title = \{Annotations to - \cmd{mkbibquote}\{Finnegans Wake\}\}} -\end{quotation} - -Because the quoted title within the title comes at the end of the -field, and because this bibliographical unit will be separated from -what follows by a period in the bibliography, then the -\cmd{mkbibquote} command is necessary to bring that period within the -final quotation marks, like so: \emph{Annotations to - \enquote{Finnegans Wake.}} - -\mylittlespace Let me also add that this command interacts well with -Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package, which I highly recommend, though -the latter isn't strictly necessary in texts using an American style, -to which \textsf{biblatex} defaults when \textsf{csquotes} isn't -loaded. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash reprint}} and the -following 7 macros all help \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} cope with -the fact that many bibstrings in the Chicago system differ between -notes and bibliography, the former sometimes using abbreviated forms -when the latter prints them in full. In the current case, if a book -is a reprint, then the macro \cmd{reprint}, followed by a comma, -should go in the \textsf{location} field before the city of -publication (aristotle:metaphy:gr, schweitzer:bach). See -\textbf{location}, above. - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB:} The rules for employing abbreviated or -full bibstrings in the \emph{Manual} are remarkably complex, but I -have attempted to make them as transparent for users as possible. In -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, if you don't see it mentioned in this -section, then in theory you should always provide an abbreviated -version, using the \cmd{bibstring} mechanism, if necessary -(babb:peru). The standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings should also -work (palmatary:pottery), and any that won't should be covered by the -series of macros beginning here with \cmd{reprint} and ending below -with \cmd{parttransandcomp}. - -\mybigspace Since \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partcomp}} the -\emph{Manual} specifies that the strings \texttt{editor}, -\texttt{translator}, and \texttt{compiler} all require different forms -in notes and bibliography, and since it mentions these three apart -from all the others \textsf{biblatex} provides (\textsf{annotator}, -\textsf{commentator}, et al.), and further since it may indeed happen -that the available fields (\textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea}, -\textsf{translator}, \textsf{nameb}, and \textsf{namec}) aren't -adequate for presenting some entries, I have provided 7 macros to -allow you to print the correct strings for these functions in both -notes and bibliography. Their names all begin with \cmd{part}, as -originally I intended them for use when a particular name applied only -to a specific \textsf{title}, rather than to a \textsf{maintitle} or -\textsf{booktitle} (cf.\ \textbf{namea} and \textbf{nameb}, above). - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace In the present instance, you can use \cmd{partcomp} to -identify a compiler when \textsf{namec} won't do, e.g., in a -\textsf{note} field or the like. In such a case, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will print the appropriate string in -your references. - -\mybigspace Use \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partedit}} this -macro when identifying an editor whose name doesn't conveniently fit -into the usual fields (\textsf{editor} or \textsf{namea}). (N.B.: If -you are writing in French and using \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, then -currently you'll need to add either \texttt{de} or \texttt{d'} after -this command in your .bib files to make the references come out right. -I'm working on this.) See chaucer:liferecords. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - partedit-\\andcomp}} before, but for use when an editor is also a -compiler. - -\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - partedit-\\andtrans}} before, but for when when an editor is also a -translator (ratliff:review). - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - partedit-\\transandcomp}} before, but for when an editor is also a -translator and a compiler. - -\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - parttrans}} before, but for use when identifying a translator -whose name doesn't conveniently fit into the usual fields -(\textsf{translator} and \textsf{nameb}). - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - parttrans-\\andcomp}} before, but for when a translator is also a -compiler. - -\subsubsection{Citation Commands} -\label{sec:citecommands} - -The \textsf{biblatex} package is particularly rich in citation -commands, some of which (e.g., \cmd{supercite(s)}, \cmd{citeyear}) -provide functionality that isn't really needed by the Chicago notes -and bibliography style offered here. If you are getting unexpected -behavior when using them please have a look in your .log file. A -command like \cmd{textcite}, listed in §~3.6.2 of the -\textsf{biblatex} manual but not defined by \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, -defaults to \cmd{cite}, and leaves a warning in the .log. Others -(e.g., \cmd{cite\-url}), though I haven't tested them extensively, -should pretty much work out of the box. What remains are the commands -I have found most useful and necessary for following the -\emph{Manual}'s specifications, and I document in this section any -alterations I have made to these. As always, if there are standard -commands that don't work for you, or new commands that would be -useful, please let me know, and it should be possible to fix or add -them. - -\mylittlespace A number of users have run into a problem that appears -when they've used a command like \cmd{cite} inside a \cmd{footnote} -macro. In this situation, the automatic capitalization routines will -not be in operation at the start of the footnote, so instead of -\enquote{Ibid.,} for example, you'll see \enquote{ibid.} If you need -to use the \cmd{cite} command within a \cmd{footnote} command, the -solution is to use \cmd{Cite} instead. Alternatively, don't use a -\cmd{footnote} macro at all, rather try \cmd{footcite} or -\cmd{autocite} with the optional prenote and postnote arguments. Cf.\ -\cmd{Citetitle} below, and also section~3.6 of \textsf{biblatex.pdf}. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocite}} haven't -adapted this in the slightest, but I thought it worth pointing out -that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} sets this command to use -\cmd{footcite} as the default option. It is, in my experience, much -the most common citation command you will use, and also works fine in -its multicite form, \textbf{\textbackslash autocites}. - -\mybigspace While \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash cite*}} the -\cmd{cite} command works just as you would expect it to, I have also -provided a starred version for the rare situations when you might need -to turn off the ibidem tracking mechanism. \textsf{Biblatex} provides -very sophisticated algorithms for using \enquote{Ibid} in notes, so in -general you won't find a need for this command, but in case you'd -prefer a longer citation where you might automatically find -\enquote{Ibid,} I've provided this. Of course, you'll need to put it -inside a \cmd{footnote} command manually. (See also section -\ref{sec:useropts}, below.) - -\mybigspace I \colmarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash citeauthor}} have -adapted this standard \textsf{biblatex} command only very slightly to -bring it into line with \textsf{biblatex-chicago's} needs. Its main -usage will probably be for references to works from classical -antiquity, when an \textsf{author's} name (abbreviated or not) -sometimes suffices in the absence of a \textsf{title}, e.g., -Thuc.\ 2.40.2--3 (17.252). You'll need to put it inside a -\cmd{footnote} command manually. (Cf.\ also \textsf{entrysubtype} in -section~\ref{sec:entryfields}, above.) - -\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash citejournal}} -command provides an alternative short form when citing journal -\textsf{articles}, giving the \textsf{journaltitle} and -\textsf{volume} number instead of the article \textsf{title} after the -\textsf{author's} name. The \emph{Manual} suggests that this format -might be helpful \enquote{in the absence of a full bibliography} -(17.179). - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash Citetitle}} -simply prepends \cmd{bibsentence} to the usual \cmd{citetitle} -command. Some titles may need this for the automatic contextual -capitalization facility to work correctly. (Included as standard from -\textsf{biblatex} 0.8d.) - -\mybigspace Joseph \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash citetitles}} -Reagle noticed that, because of the way -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} formats titles in quotation marks, -using the \cmd{citetitle} command will often get you punctuation you -don't want, especially when presenting a list of titles. I've -included this multicite command to enable you to present such a list, -if the need arises. Remember that you'll have to put it inside a -\cmd{footnote} command manually. - -\mybigspace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash footfullcite}} -standard \textsf{biblatex} command, modified to work properly with -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, and provided in case you find -yourself in a situation where you really need the full citation in a -footnote, but where \cmd{autocite} would print a short note or even -\enquote{Ibid.} This may be particularly useful if you've chosen to use all -short notes by setting the \texttt{short} option in the arguments to -\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex\}}, yet still feel the need for the -occasional full citation. - -\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash fullcite}} too, -is a standard command, and it too provides a full citation, but unlike -the previous command it doesn't automatically place it in a footnote. -It may be useful within long textual notes. - -\mybigspace Matthew \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash headlesscite}} -Lundin requested a more generalized \cmd{headlesscite} macro, -suppressing the author's name in specific contexts while allowing -users not to worry about whether a particular citation needs the long -or short form, a responsibility thereby handed over to -\textsf{biblatex's} tracking mechanisms. This citation command -attempts to fulfill this request. Please note that, in the short -form, the result will be rather like a \cmd{citetitle} command, which -may or may not be what you want. Note, also, that as I have provided -only the most flexible form of the command, you'll have to wrap it in -a \cmd{footnote} yourself. Please see the next entry for further -discussion of some of the needs this command might help address. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - headless-\\fullcite}} have provided this command in case you want -to print a full citation without the author's name. The \emph{Manual} -(17.31, 17.42) suggests this for brevity's sake in cases where that -name is already obvious enough from the title, and where repetition -might seem awkward (creel:house, feydeau:farces, meredith:letters, and -sewall:letter). \textsf{Letter} entries --- and only such entries --- -do this for you automatically, and of course the repetition is -tolerated in bibliographies for the sake of alphabetization, but in -notes this command may help achieve greater elegance, even if it isn't -strictly necessary. As I've provided only the most flexible form of -the command, you'll have to wrap it in a \cmd{footnote} yourself. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash shortcite}} have -provided this command in case, for any reason, you specifically -require the short form of a note, and \textsf{biblatex} thinks you -want something else. Again, I've provided only the most flexible form -of the command, so you'll have to wrap it in a \cmd{footnote} -manually. - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace If you look at \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, you'll see a -number of other citation commands, but those are intended for internal -use only, mainly in cross-references of various sorts. Use at your -own risk. - -\subsection{Package Options} -\label{sec:options} - -\subsubsection{Pre-Set \textsf{biblatex} Options} -\label{sec:presetopts} - -Although a quick glance through \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} will -tell you which \textsf{biblatex} options the package sets for you, I -thought I might gather them here also for your perusal. These -settings are, I believe, consistent with the specification, but you -can alter them in the options to \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your -preamble or by loading the package via -\cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes]\{biblatex\}}, which gives you the -\textsf{biblatex} defaults unless you redefine them yourself inside -the square brackets. - -\mylittlespace By \mymarginpar{\texttt{abbreviate=\\false}} default, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} prints the longer bibstrings, mainly -for use in the bibliography, but since notes require the shorter forms -of many of them, I've had to define many new strings for use there. - -\mylittlespace \textsf{Biblatex-chicago-notes} -\mymarginpar{\texttt{autocite=\\footnote}} places references in -footnotes by default. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{citetracker=\\true}} citetracker -for the \cmd{ifciteseen} test is enabled globally. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{alldates=comp}} specification calls -for the long format when presenting dates, slightly shortened when -presenting date ranges. - -\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{dateabbrev=\\false}} -\emph{Manual} prefers full month names in the notes \&\ bibliography -style. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{ibidtracker=\\constrict}} -enables the use of \enquote{Ibid} in notes, but only in the most -strictly-defined circumstances. Whenever there might be any -ambiguity, \textsf{biblatex} should default to printing a more -informative reference. Remember also that you can use the \cmd{cite*} -command to disable this functionality in any given reference, or -indeed one of the \texttt{fullcite} commands if you need the long note -form for any reason. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace This \marginpar{\texttt{loccittracker\\=constrict}} -allows the package to determine whether two consecutive citations of -the same source also cite the same page of that source. In such a -case, \texttt{Ibid} alone will be printed, without the page reference, -following the specification (16.47). - -\mylittlespace These \colmarginpar{\textsf{\texttt{maxbibnames\\=10\\ - minbibnames\\=7}}} two options are new, and control the number -of names printed in the bibliography when that number exceeds 10. -These numbers follow the recommendations of the \emph{Manual} -(17.29--30), and they are different from those for use in notes. With -\textsf{biblatex} 1.6 and later you can no longer redefine -\texttt{maxnames} and \texttt{minnames} in the \cmd{printbibliography} -command at the bottom of your document, so \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -now does this automatically for you, though of course you can change -them in your document preamble. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{pagetracker=\\true}} enables -page tracking for the \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage} -commands for controlling, among other things, the printing of -\enquote{Ibid.} It tracks individual pages if \LaTeX\ is in oneside -mode, or whole spreads in twoside mode. - -\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\texttt{sortcase=\\false}} turns off -the sorting of uppercase and lowercase letters separately, a practice -which the \emph{Manual} doesn't appear to recommend. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usetranslator\\=true}} -enables automatic use of the \textsf{translator} at the head of -entries in the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}. -In the bibliography, the entry will be alphabetized by the -translator's surname. You can disable this functionality on a -per-entry basis by setting \texttt{usetranslator=false} in the -\textsf{options} field. Cf.\ silver:gawain. - -\subsubsection*{Other \textsf{biblatex} Formatting Options} -\label{sec:formatopts} - -I've chosen defaults for many of the general formatting commands -provided by \textsf{biblatex}, including the vertical space between -bibliography items and between items in the list of shorthands -(\cmd{bibitemsep} and \cmd{lositemsep}). I define many of these in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and of course you may want to redefine -them to your own needs and tastes. It may be as well you know that -the \emph{Manual} does state a preference for two of the formatting -options I've implemented by default: the 3-em dash as a replacement -for repeated names in the bibliography (16.103--106); and the -formatting of note numbers, both in the main text and at the bottom of -the page / end of the essay (superscript in the text, in-line in the -notes; 16.25). The code for this last formatting is also in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and I've wrapped it in a test that -disables it if you are using the \textsf{memoir} class, which I -believe has its own commands for defining these parameters. You can -also disable it by using the \texttt{footmarkoff} package option, on -which see below. - -\subsubsection{{Pre-Set \textsf{chicago} Options}} -\label{sec:chicpreset} - -At \mymarginpar{\texttt{bookpages=\\true}} the request of Scot -Becker, I have included this rather specialized option, which controls -the printing of the \textsf{pages} field in \textsf{book} entries. -Some bibliographic managers, apparently, place the total page count in -that field by default, and this option allows you to stop the printing -of this information in notes and bibliography. It defaults to true, -which means the field is printed, but it can be set to false either in -the preamble, for the whole document, or on a per-entry basis in the -\textsf{options} field (though rather than use this latter method it -would make sense to eliminate the \textsf{pages} field from the -affected entries). - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{doi=true}} option controls -whether any \textsf{doi} fields present in the .bib file will be -printed in notes and bibliography. It defaults to true, and can be -set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a -per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{isbn=true}} option controls -whether any \textsf{isan}, \textsf{isbn}, \textsf{ismn}, -\textsf{isrn}, \textsf{issn}, and \textsf{iswc} fields present in the -.bib file will be printed in notes and bibliography. It defaults to -true, and can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole -document, or on a per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. - -\mylittlespace Once \mymarginpar{\texttt{numbermonth=\\true}} again -at the request of Scot Becker, I have included this option, which -controls the printing of the \textsf{month} field in all the -periodical-type entries when a \textsf{number} field is also present. -Some bibliographic software, apparently, always includes the month of -publication even when a \textsf{number} is present. When all this -information is available the \emph{Manual} (17.181) prints everything, -so this option defaults to true, which means the field is printed, but -it can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, -or on a per-entry basis in the \textsf{options} field. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{url=true}} option controls -whether any \textsf{url} fields present in the .bib file will be -printed in notes and bibliography. It defaults to true, and can be -set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a -per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. Please note that, as -in standard \textsf{biblatex}, the \textsf{url} field is always -printed in \textsf{online} entries, regardless of the state of this -option. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{includeall=\\true}} is the -one option that rules the five preceding, either printing all the -fields under consideration --- the default --- or excluding all of -them. It is set to \texttt{true} in \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, but -you can change it either in the preamble for the whole document or in -the \textsf{options} field of individual entries. The rationale for -all of these options is the availability of bibliographic managers -that helpfully present as much data as possible, in every entry, some -of which may not be felt to be entirely necessary. Setting -\texttt{includeall} to \texttt{true} probably works just fine for -those compiling their .bib databases by hand, but others may find that -some automatic pruning helps clear things up, at least to a first -approximation. Some per-entry work afterward may then polish up the -details. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usecompiler=\\true}} option -enables automatic use of the name of the compiler (in the -\textsf{namec} field) at the head of an entry, usually in the absence -of an \textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, or \textsf{translator}, in -accordance with the specification (\emph{Manual} 17.41). It may also, -like \texttt{useauthor}, \texttt{useeditor}, and -\texttt{usetranslator}, be disabled on a per-entry basis by setting -\texttt{usecompiler=false} in the \textsf{options} field. Please -remember that, because \textsf{namec} isn't a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, this name won't be part of its standard name -algorithms, and that any entry headed by a \textsf{namec} will -therefore need a \textsf{shortauthor} for short notes and a -\textsf{sortkey} or the like in order to have it appear in the correct -place in the bibliography. (The exception to this is when you modify -the \textsf{editor's} identifying string using the \textsf{editortype} -field, which is the procedure I recommend if the entry-heading -compiler is only a compiler, and not also, e.g., an editor or a -translator.) - -\subsubsection{Style Options -- Preamble} -\label{sec:useropts} - -These are parts of the specification that not everyone will wish to -enable. All except the second can be used even if you load the -package in the old way via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, but most users -can just place the appropriate string(s) in the options to the -\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}} call in your preamble. - -\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{annotation}} the request of -Emil Salim, I included in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} the ability to -produce annotated bibliographies. If you turn this option on then the -contents of your \textsf{annotation} (or \textsf{annote}) field will -be printed after the bibliographical reference. (You can also use -external files to store annotations -- please see -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §~3.10.7 for details on how to do this.) This -functionality is currently in a beta state, so before you use it -please have a look at the documentation for the \textsf{annotation} -field, on page~\pageref{sec:annote} above. - -\mylittlespace Although \mymarginpar{\texttt{footmarkoff}} the -\emph{Manual} (16.25) recommends specific formatting for footnote (and -endnote) marks, i.e., superscript in the text and in-line in foot- or -endnotes, Charles Schaum has brought it to my attention that not all -publishers follow this practice, even when requiring Chicago style. I -have retained this formatting as the default setup, but if you include -the \texttt{footmarkoff} option, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} will -not alter \LaTeX 's (or the \textsf{endnote} package's) defaults in -any way, leaving you free to follow the specifications of your -publisher. I have placed all of this code in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, so if you load the package with a call -to \textsf{biblatex} instead, then once again footnote marks will -revert to the \LaTeX\ default, but of course you also lose a fair -amount of other formatting, as well. See section~\ref{sec:loading}, -below. - -\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{juniorcomma}} \emph{Manual} -(6.49) states that \enquote{commas are no longer required around - \emph{Jr.}\ and \emph{Sr.},} so by default \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -has followed standard \textsf{biblatex} in using a simple space in -names like \enquote{John Doe Jr.} Charles Schaum has pointed out that -traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ practice was to include the comma, and -since the \emph{Manual} has no objections to this, I have provided an -option which allows you to turn this behavior back on, either for the -whole document or on a per-entry basis. Please note, first, that -numerical suffixes (John Doe III) never take the comma. The code -tests for this situation, and detects cardinal numbers well, but if -you are using ordinals you may need to set this to \texttt{false} in -the \textsf{options} field of some entries. Second, I have fixed a -bug in older releases which always printed the \enquote{Jr.}\ part of -the name immediately after the surname, even when the surname came -before the given names (as in a bibliography). The package now -correctly puts the \enquote{Jr.}\ part at the end, after the given -names, and in this position it always takes a comma, the presence of -which is unaffected by this option. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{natbib}} may look like the -standard \textsf{biblatex} option, but to keep the coding of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} simpler for the moment I have -reimplemented it there, from whence it is merely passed on to -\textsf{biblatex}. If you load the Chicago style with -\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}}, then the option should simply -read \texttt{natbib}, rather than \texttt{natbib=true}. The shorter -form also works if you load the style using -\cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes]\{biblatex\}}, so I hope this -requirement isn't too onerous. - -\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{noibid}} the request of an -early tester, I have included this option to allow you globally to -turn off the \texttt{ibidem} mechanism that -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} uses by default. Some publishers, it -would appear, require this. Setting this option will mean that all -possible instances of \emph{ibid.}\ will be replaced by the short note -form. For more fine-grained control of individual citations you'll -probably want to use specialized citation commands, instead. See -section \ref{sec:citecommands}. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{short}} option means that -your text will only use the short note form, even in the first -citation of a particular work. The \emph{Manual} (16.3) recommends -this space-saving format only when you provide a \emph{full} -bibliography, though even with such a bibliography you may feel it -easier for your readers to present long first citations. If you do -use the \texttt{short} option, remember that there are several -citation commands which allow you to present the full reference in -specific cases (see section \ref{sec:citecommands}). If your -bibliography is not complete, then you should not use this option. - -\mylittlespace Chris Sparks \mymarginpar{\texttt{shorthandibid}} -pointed out that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} would never use -\emph{ibid.}\ in the case of entries containing a \textsf{shorthand} -field, but rather that consecutive references to such an entry -continued to provide the shorthand, instead. The \emph{Manual} isn't, -as far as I can tell, completely clear on this question. In 17.252, -discussing references to works from classical antiquity, it states -that \enquote{when abbreviations are used, these rather than - \emph{ibid.}\ should be used in succeeding references to the same - work,} but I can't make out whether this rule is specific to -classical references or has more general scope. Given this ambiguity, -I don't think it unreasonable to provide an option to allow printing -of \emph{ibid.}\ instead of the shorthand in such circumstances, -though the default behavior remains the same as it always has. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{strict}} still-experimental -option attempts to follow the \emph{Manual}'s recommendations (16.57) -for formatting footnotes on the page, using no rule between them and -the main text unless there is a run-on note, in which case a short -rule intervenes to emphasize this continuation. I haven't tested this -code very thoroughly, and it's possible that frequent use of floats -might interfere with it. Let me know if it causes problems. - - -\subsection{General Usage Hints} -\label{sec:hints} - -\subsubsection{Loading the Style} -\label{sec:loading} - -With the addition of the author-date style to the package, I have -provided two keys for choosing which style to load, \texttt{notes} and -\texttt{authordate}, one of which you put in the options to the -\cmd{usepackage} command. The default way of loading the notes + -bibliography style has therefore slightly changed. With early -versions of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, the standard way of -loading the package was via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, e.g.: -\begin{quote} - \cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes,strict,backend=bibtex8,\%\\ - babel=other,bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex\}} -\end{quote} -Now, the default way to load the style, and one that will in the -vast majority of standard cases produce the same results as the old -invocation, will look like this: -\begin{quote} - \cmd{usepackage[notes,strict,backend=bibtex8,babel=other,\%\\ - bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex-chicago\}} -\end{quote} - -(In point of fact, the previous \textsf{biblatex-chicago} loading -method without the \texttt{notes} option will still work, but only -because I've made the notes \&\ bibliography style the default if no -style is explicitly requested.) If you read through -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, you'll see that it sets a number of -\textsf{biblatex} options aimed at following the Chicago -specification, as well as setting a few formatting variables intended -as reasonable defaults (see section~\ref{sec:presetopts}, above). -Some parts of this specification, however, are plainly more -\enquote{suggested} than \enquote{required,} and indeed many -publishers, while adopting the main skeleton of the Chicago style in -citations, nonetheless maintain their own house styles to which the -defaults I have provided do not conform. - -\mylittlespace If you only need to change one or two parameters, this -can easily be done by putting different options in the call to -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} or redefining other formatting variables in -the preamble, thereby overriding the package defaults. If, however, -you wish more substantially to alter the output of the package, -perhaps to use it as a base for constructing another style altogether, -then you may want to revert to the old style of invocation above. -You'll lose all the definitions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, -including those to which I've already alluded and also the code that -sets the note number in-line rather than superscript in endnotes or -footnotes. Also in this file is the code that calls -\textsf{cms-american.lbx}, which means that you'll lose all the -Chicago-specific bibstrings I've defined unless you provide, in your -preamble, a \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} command adapted for your -setup, on which see section~\ref{sec:international} below and also -§§~4.9.1 and 4.11.7 in Lehman's \textsf{biblatex.pdf}. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace What you \emph{will not} lose is the ability to call -the package options \texttt{annotation, strict, short,} and -\texttt{noibid} (section~\ref{sec:useropts}, above), in case these -continue to be useful to you when constructing your own modifications. -There's very little code, therefore, actually in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, but I hope that even this minimal -separation will make the package somewhat more adaptable. Any -suggestions on this score are, of course, welcome. - -\subsubsection{Other Hints} -\label{sec:otherhints} - -One useful rule, when you are having difficulty creating a .bib entry, -is to ask yourself whether all the information you are providing is -strictly necessary. The Chicago specification is a very full one, but -the \emph{Manual} is actually, in many circumstances, fairly relaxed -about how much of the data from a work's title page you need to fit -into a reference. Authors of introductions and afterwords, multiple -publishers in different countries, the real names of authors more -commonly known under pseudonyms, all of these are candidates for -exclusion if you aren't making specific reference to them, and if you -judge that their inclusion won't be of particular interest to your -readers. Of course, any data that may be of such interest, and -especially any needed to identify and track down a reference, has to -be present, but sometimes it pays to step back and reevaluate how much -information you're providing. I've tried to make -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} robust enough to handle the most -complex, data-rich citations, but there may be instances where you can -save yourself some typing by keeping it simple. - -\mylittlespace Scot Becker has pointed out to me that the inverse -problem not only exists but may well become increasingly common, to -wit, .bib database entries generated by bibliographic managers which -helpfully provide as much information as is available, including -fields that users may well wish not to have printed (ISBN, URL, DOI, -\textsf{pagetotal}, inter alia). The standard \textsf{biblatex} -styles contain a series of options, detailed in \textsf{biblatex.pdf} -§3.1.2.2, for controlling the printing of some of these fields, and -with this release I have implemented the ones that are relevant to -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, along with a couple that Scot requested and -that may be of more general usefulness. There is also a general -option to excise with one command all the fields under consideration --- please see section~\ref{sec:chicpreset} above. - -\mylittlespace If you are having problems with the interaction of -punctuation and quotation marks in notes or bibliography, first please -check that you've used \cmd{mkbibquote} in the relevant part of your -.bib file. If you are still getting errors, please let me know, as it -may well be a bug. - -\mylittlespace For the \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} style, I have -fully adopted \textsf{biblatex's} system for providing punctuation at -the end of entries. Several users noted insufficiencies in previous -releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, sometimes related to the -semicolon between multiple citations, sometimes to ineradicable -periods after long notes, bugs that were byproducts of my attempt to -fix other end-of-entry errors. One of the side effects of this older -code was (wrongly) to put a period after a long note produced, e.g., -by a command like \cmd{footnote\{\textbackslash headlessfullcite\}}, -whereas only the \enquote{foot} cite commands (including -\cmd{autocite} in the default \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} set up) -should do so. If you came to rely on this side effect, please note -now that you'll have to put the period in yourself when explicitly -calling \cmd{footnote}, like so: \cmd{footnote\{\textbackslash - headlessfullcite\{key\}.\}} - -\mylittlespace When you use abbreviations at the ends of fields in -your .bib file (e.g., \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}} or -\enquote{\texttt{Inc.},}) \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} should deal -automatically with adding (or suppressing) appropriate punctuation -after the final dot. This includes retaining periods after such dots -when a closing parenthesis intervenes, as in (n.d.). Merely entering -the abbreviation without informing \textsf{biblatex} that the final -dot is a dot and not a period should always work, though you do have -to provide manual formatting in those rare cases when you need a comma -after the author's initials in a bibliography, usually in a -\textsf{misc} entry (see house:papers). If you find you need to -provide such formatting elsewhere, please let me know. - -\mylittlespace Finally, allow me to reiterate what Philipp Lehman says -in \textsf{biblatex.pdf}, to wit, use \textsf{bibtex8}, rather than -standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and avoid the cryptic errors that ensue -when your .bib file gets to a certain size. - -\section{The Specification: Author-Date} -\label{sec:authdate} - -In what follows, I attempt to explain all the parts of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} that might be considered somehow -\enquote{non standard,} at least with respect to the styles included -with \textsf{biblatex} itself, though in the section on entry fields I -have also duplicated a lot of the information in -\textsf{biblatex.pdf}, which I hope won't badly annoy expert users of -the system. Headings in \mycolor{green} \colmarginpar{\textsf{New in - this release}} indicate material new to this release, or -occasionally old material that has undergone significant revision. -Numbers in parentheses refer to sections of the \emph{Chicago Manual - of Style}, 15th edition. The file \textsf{dates-test.bib} contains -many examples from the \emph{Manual} which, when processed using -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, should produce the same output -as you see in the \emph{Manual} itself, or at least compliant output, -where the specifications are vague or open to interpretation, a state -of affairs which does sometimes occur. I have provided -\textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf}, which shows how my system processes -\textsf{dates-test.bib}, and I have also included the reference keys -from the latter file below in parentheses. - -\subsection{Entry Types} -\label{sec:types:authdate} - -The complete list of entry types currently available in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, minus the odd \textsf{biblatex} -alias, is as follows: \textbf{article}, \textbf{artwork}, -\textbf{audio}, \textbf{book}, \textbf{bookinbook}, \textbf{booklet}, -\textbf{collection}, \textbf{customc}, \textbf{image}, -\textbf{inbook}, \textbf{incollection}, \textbf{inproceedings}, -\textbf{inreference}, \mycolor{\textbf{letter}}, \textbf{manual}, -\mycolor{\textbf{misc}}, \textbf{music}, \textbf{online} (with its -alias \textbf{www}), \textbf{patent}, \textbf{periodical}, -\textbf{proceedings}, \textbf{reference}, \textbf{report} (with its -alias \textbf{techreport}), \textbf{review}, \textbf{suppbook}, -\textbf{suppcollection}, \textbf{suppperiodical}, \textbf{thesis} -(with its aliases \textbf{mastersthesis} and \textbf{phdthesis}), -\textbf{unpublished}, and \textbf{video}. - -\mylittlespace What follows is an attempt to specify all the -differences between these types and the standard provided by -\textsf{biblatex}. If an entry type isn't discussed here, then it is -safe to assume that it works as it does in the standard styles. In -general, I have attempted not to discuss specific entry fields here, -unless such a field is crucial to the overall operation of a given -entry type. As a general and important rule, most entry types require -very few fields when you use \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, so -it seemed to me better to gather information pertaining to fields in -the next section. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{article}} \emph{Chicago Manual of - Style} (17.148) recognizes three different sorts of periodical -publication, \enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and -\enquote{newspapers.} The first (17.150) includes \enquote{scholarly - or professional periodicals available mainly by subscription,} while -the second refers to \enquote{weekly or monthly} publications that are -\enquote{available either by subscription or in individual issues at - bookstores or newsstands.} \enquote{Magazines} will tend to be -\enquote{more accessible to general readers,} and typically won't have -a volume number. - -\mylittlespace Now, for articles in \enquote{journals} you can simply -use the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ --- and indeed \textsf{biblatex} ---- \textsf{article} entry type, which will work as expected and set -off the page numbers with a colon in the list of references, as -required by the \emph{Manual}. If, however, you need to refer to a -\enquote{magazine} or a \enquote{newspaper,} then you need to add an -\textsf{entrysubtype} field containing the exact string -\texttt{magazine}. The main formatting differences between a -\texttt{magazine} (which includes both \enquote{magazines} and -\enquote{newspapers}) and a plain \textsf{article} are that time -specifications (month, day, season) aren't placed within parentheses, -and that page numbers are set off by a comma rather than a colon. -Otherwise, the two sorts of reference have much in common. (For -\textsf{article}, see \emph{Manual} 17.154--181; batson, -beattie:crime, chu:panda, connell:chronic, conway:evolution, -friedman:learning, garaud:gatine, garrett:15, hlatky:hrt, kern, -lewis:15, loften:hamlet, loomis:structure:15, rozner:liberation, -schneider:mittelpleistozaene, terborgh:preservation, wall:ra\-di\-o, -white:callima\-chus. With \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, -cf.\ 17.166, 17.182--198; assocpress:gun, lakeforester:pushcarts, -morgenson:market, reaves:ro\-sen, stenger:privacy.) - -\mylittlespace The \emph{Manual} suggests that \enquote{a list of - works cited need not list newspaper items if these have been - documented in the text} (17.191). This involves giving the title of -the journal and the full date of publication in a parenthetical -reference, including any other information in the main text, thereby -obviating the need to present such an entry in the list of references. -To utilize this method in the author-date style, in addition to a -\texttt{magazine} \textsf{entrysubtype}, you'll need to place -\mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}} into the \textsf{options} field, -including \texttt{skipbib} there as well to stop the entry printing in -the list of references. If the entry only contains a \textsf{date} -and \textsf{journaltitle} that's enough, but if it's a fuller entry -also containing an \textsf{author} then you'll also need -\texttt{useauthor=false} in the \textsf{options} field. Other surplus -fields will be ignored. - -\mylittlespace If you are familiar with the notes \&\ bibliography -style, you'll know that the \emph{Manual} treats reviews (of books, -plays, performances, etc.) as a sort of recognizable subset of -\enquote{journals,} \enquote{magazines,} and \enquote{newspapers,} -distinguished mainly by the way one formats the title of the review -itself. In the author-date style, however, since both a generic title -like \enquote{review of \ldots} and a specific one (cf. gibbard:15; -osborne:poison:15) are formatted in the same way (no quotation marks or -italics, sentence-style capitalization), all you really need, -conveniently, is the \textsf{article} type, with the -\textsf{entrysubtype} toggle to distinguish the sort of periodical -which contains the review. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace In the case of a review with a specific as well as a -generic title, the former goes in the \textsf{title} field, and the -latter in the \textsf{titleaddon} field. Standard \textsf{biblatex} -intends this field for use with additions to titles that may need to -be formatted differently from the titles themselves, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} uses it in just this way, with -the additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the -\textsf{title} entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type, -providing a fairly powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting -\textsc{Bib}\TeX\ to do what you want. Here, however, if all you need -is a generic title like \enquote{review of \ldots,} then you can -simply use the \textsf{title} field for it, ignoring -\textsf{titleaddon}. - -\mylittlespace No less than seven more things need explication under -this heading. First, since the \emph{Manual} specifies, for the -author-date style, that what goes into the \textsf{title} or the -\textsf{titleaddon} fields of \textsf{article} entries stays -unformatted --- no italics, no quotation marks --- this plain style -(with sentence-style capitalization, as usual) is the default for such -text, which means that you'll have to format any titles within these -fields yourself, e.g., with \cmd{mkbibemph\{\}}. Second, the -\emph{Manual} specifies a similar plain style for the titles of other -sorts of material found in \enquote{magazines} and -\enquote{newspapers,} e.g., obituaries, letters to the editor, -interviews, the names of regular columns, and the like, though the -names of regular columns, please note, need to be capitalized headline -style. References may contain both the title of an individual article -and the name of the regular column, in which case the former should -go, as usual, in a \textsf{title} field, and the latter in -\textsf{titleaddon}. (See 17.188, 17.190, 17.193; morgenson:market, -reaves:rosen.) - -\mylittlespace Third, the \emph{Manual} suggests that -\enquote{unsigned newspaper articles or features are best dealt with - in text or notes. But if a \ldots\ reference-list entry should be - needed, the name of the newspaper stands in place of the author} -(17.192). It doesn't always carry through on this in its own -presentation of newspaper citations (see esp.\ 17.188), but I've -implemented their recommendation nonetheless, which means that in an -\textsf{article} (or a \textsf{review}) entry, \textsf{entrysubtype} -\texttt{magazine}, and only in such an entry, a missing -\textsf{author} field results in the name of the periodical (in the -\textsf{journaltitle} field) being used as the missing author. You -can also place \mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}} and \texttt{skipbib} -into the \textsf{options} field to produce an augmented in-text -citation whilst keeping this material out of the reference list. If -the citation does appear in the reference list, the new default -sorting scheme in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} means that you -no longer need the \textsf{sortkey} field to alphabetize by -\textsf{journaltitle} instead of \textsf{title}, though you will still -need one if you retain the definite or indefinite article at the -beginning of the \textsf{journaltitle}. Also, if you want to -abbreviate the \textsf{journaltitle} for use in citations, then the -\textsf{shortauthor} field, somewhat surprisingly, is the place for -it. (See section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below; -lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit, unsigned:ranke.) - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Fourth, in certain fields, just beginning your data -with a lowercase letter activates the mechanism for capitalizing that -letter depending on its context within a list of references entry. -This is less important in the author-date style, where this -information only turns up in the reference list and not in citations, -but you can consult \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} below for all the -details. Both the \textsf{titleaddon} and \textsf{note} fields are -among those treating their data this way, and since both appear -regularly in \textsf{article} entries, I thought the problem merited a -preliminary mention here. - -\mylittlespace Fifth, if you need to cite an entire issue of any sort -of periodical, rather than one article in an issue, then the -\textsf{periodical} entry type, once again with or without the -\texttt{magazine} toggle in \textsf{entrysubtype,} is what you'll -need. (You can also use the \textsf{article} type, placing what would -normally be the \textsf{issuetitle} in the \textsf{title} field and -retaining the usual \textsf{journaltitle} field, but this arrangement -isn't compatible with standard \textsf{biblatex}.) The \textsf{note} -field is where you place something like \enquote{special issue} (with -the small \enquote{s} enabling the automatic capitalization routines), -whether you are citing one article or the whole issue -(conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). Indeed, this is a somewhat -specialized use of \textsf{note}, and if you have other sorts of -information you need to include in an \textsf{article} or -\textsf{periodical} entry, then you shouldn't put it in the -\textsf{note} field, but rather in \textsf{titleaddon} or perhaps -\textsf{addendum} (brown:bremer). - -\mylittlespace Sixth, I would suggest that if you wish to cite a -television or radio broadcast, the \textsf{article} type, -\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine} is the place for it. The name -of the program would go in \textsf{journaltitle}, with the name of the -episode in \textsf{title}. The network's name goes into the -\textsf{usera} field. (8.196, 17.207; see bundy:macneil for an -example of how this all might look in a .bib file.) - -\mylittlespace Finally, if you're planning to use the same .bib file -for the author-date and for the notes \&\ bibliography style, you may -need to look under the \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries in -section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} above for the full instructions on their -differences. Any well-constructed \textsf{review} entry will work -just fine under author-date, but if you only need the author-date -style then you can avoid the complexity of learning another entry -type. - -\mylittlespace If you're still with me, allow me to recommend that you -browse through \textsf{dates-test.bib} to get a feel for just how many of -the \emph{Manual}'s complexities the \textsf{article} and -\textsf{periodical} types attempt to address. It may be that in -future releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} I'll be able to simplify -these procedures somewhat, but if you are only using author-date at -least you've avoided some of the worst of it. - -\mybigspace Arne \mymarginpar{\textbf{artwork}} Kjell Vikhagen has -pointed out to me that none of the standard entry types were -straightforwardly adaptable when referring to visual artworks. The -\emph{Manual} doesn't give any thorough specifications for such -references, and indeed it's unclear that it believes it necessary to -include them in the reference apparatus at all. Still, it's easy to -conceive of contexts in which a list of artworks studied might be -desirable, and \textsf{biblatex} includes entry types for just this -purpose, though the standard styles leave them undefined. The two I -have adopted are \textsf{artwork} and \textsf{image}, the former -intended for paintings, sculptures, etchings, and the like, the latter -for photographs. The two entry types work in exactly the same way as -far as constructing your .bib entry, and when printed the only -difference will be that the titles of \textsf{artworks} are -italicized, those of \textsf{images} in plain text. - -\mylittlespace As one might expect, the artist goes in \textsf{author} -and the name of the work in \textsf{title}. The \textsf{type} field -is intended for the medium --- e.g., oil on canvas, charcoal on paper ---- and the \textsf{version} field might contain the state of an -etching. You can place the dimensions of the work in \textsf{note}, -and the current location in \textsf{organization}, -\textsf{institution}, and/or \textsf{location}, in ascending order of -generality. The \textsf{type} field, as in several other entry types, -uses \textsf{biblatex's} automatic capitalization routines, so if the -first word only needs a capital letter at the beginning of a sentence, -use lowercase in the .bib file and let \textsf{biblatex} handle it for -you. (See \emph{Manual} 12.33; leo:madonna, bedford:photo.) - -\mylittlespace As a final complication, the \emph{Manual} (8.206) says -that \enquote{the names of works of antiquity \ldots\,are usually set - in roman.} If you should need to include such a work in the -reference apparatus, you can either define an \textsf{entrysubtype} -for an \textsf{artwork} entry --- anything will do --- or you could -use the \textsf{image} type, or you could try the \textsf{misc} entry -type with an \textsf{entrysubtype}. Fortunately, in this instance the -other fields in a \textsf{misc} entry function pretty much as in -\textsf{artwork} or \textsf{image}. - -\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{audio}} this release of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, following the request of Johan Nordstrom, I -have included three new entry types, all undefined by the standard -styles, designed to allow users to present audiovisual sources in -accordance with the Chicago specifications. The \emph{Manual's} -presentation of such sources (17.263--273), though admirably brief, -seems to me somewhat inconsistent. I attempted to condense all the -requirements into two new entry types, but ended up relying on three, -the differences between which I shall attempt to delineate here. -There are likely to be occasions when your choice of entry type is not -obvious, but at the very least \textsf{biblatex-chicago} should help -you maintain consistency. For users of the author-date style, it is -as well to note here that the \emph{Manual} (17.265) suggests that -\enquote{such materials are best mentioned in running text and grouped - in the reference list under a subhead,} a suggestion you may wish to -follow, particularly if your audiovisual entries don't typically -contain the information --- \textsf{author} and \textsf{date} --- -needed to produce a parseable parenthetical citation. - -\mylittlespace The \textbf{music} type is intended for all musical -recordings that do not have a video component. This means, for -example, digital media (whether on CD or hard drive), vinyl records, -and tapes. The \textbf{video} type includes (nearly) all visual -media, whether it be films, TV shows, tapes and DVDs of the preceding -or of any sort of performance (including music), or online multimedia. -Finally, the \textbf{audio} type, our current concern, fills gaps in -the two others, and presents its sources in a more \enquote{book-like} -manner. Published musical scores need this type --- unpublished ones -would use \textsf{misc} with an \textsf{entrysubtype} -(shapey:partita:15) --- as do such favorite educational formats as the -slideshow and the filmstrip (greek:filmstrip:15, schubert:muellerin, -verdi:corsaro). The \emph{Manual} (17.269--270) sometimes uses a -similar format for audio books and even for films (twain:audio, -weed:flatiron), though elsewhere these sorts of material are presented -as \textsf{music} and \textsf{video}, respectively. It would appear -to depend on which sorts of publication facts you wish to present --- -cf.\ \emph{Manual} 17.269. - -\mylittlespace Once you've accepted the analogy of composer to -\textsf{author}, constructing an \textsf{audio} entry should be fairly -straightforward, since many of the fields function just as they do in -\textsf{book} or \textsf{inbook} entries. Indeed, please note that I -compare it to both these other types as, in common with the other -audiovisual types, \textsf{audio} has to do double duty as an analogue -for both books and collections, so while there will normally be an -\textsf{author}, a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{publisher}, a -\textsf{date}, and a \textsf{location}, there may also be a -\textsf{booktitle} and/or a \textsf{maintitle} --- see -schubert:muellerin for an entry that uses all three in citing one song -from a cycle. If the medium in question needs specifying, the -\textsf{type} field is the place for it. (It is characteristic of -this entry type that such information is placed after the publisher -information, whereas in the other audiovisual types their order is -reversed.) Finally, the \textsf{titleaddon} field can specify -functions for which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} provides no automated -handling, e.g., a librettist (verdi:corsaro). - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookinbook}} type provides the -means of referring to parts of books that are considered, in other -contexts, themselves to be books, rather than chapters, essays, or -articles. (Older versions of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} used -\textbf{customb} for this purpose, but this is now deprecated.) Such -an entry can have a \textsf{title} and a \textsf{maintitle}, but it -can also contain a \textsf{booktitle}, all three of which will be -italicized in the reference matter. In general usage it is, -therefore, rather like the traditional \textsf{inbook} type, only with -its \textsf{title} in italics rather than in plain text. (See -\emph{Manual} 17.72, 17.89, 17.93; bernard:boris, euripides:orestes, -plato:republic:gr.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The Euripides play receives slightly -different presentations in 17.89 and 17.93. Although the -specification is very detailed, it doesn't eliminate all choice or -variation. Using a system like \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ should help to -maintain consistency. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{booklet}} is the first of two -entry types --- the other being \textsf{manual}, on which see below ---- which are traditional in \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ styles, but which the -\emph{Manual} (17.241) suggests may well be treated basically as -books. In the interests of backward compatibility, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will so format such an entry, -which uses the \textsf{howpublished} field instead of a standard -\textsf{publisher}, though of course if you do decide just to use a -\textsf{book} entry then any information you might have given in a -\textsf{howpublished} field should instead go in \textsf{publisher}. -(See clark:mesopot.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customa}} entry type is now -obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an -error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{letter} type -instead. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customb}} entry type is now -obsolete, and any such entries in your .bib file will trigger an -error. Please use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{bookinbook} -type instead. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{customc}} entry type has -undergone a metamorphosis with this release, as I previously warned -both here and in the RELEASE file. Rather than being a (deprecated) -alias of the standard \textsf{biblatex} \textbf{suppbook}, it now -allows you to include the expansions of abbreviations and shorthands -\emph{inside} the list of references itself, as recommended by the -\emph{Manual} (17.47), rather than in the list of shorthands. - -\mylittlespace In its simplest form, you need merely place the -abbreviation of the (often institutional) author's name into the -\textsf{author} field, and its expansion into the \textsf{title} -field. To make sure it appears in the list of references, you can -either manually include the entry key in a \cmd{nocite} command, or -you can put that entry key in the \textsf{userc} field in the main -.bib entry, in which case \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will -print the expanded abbreviation if and only if you cite the main -entry. (See abbrev:BSI, abbrev:ISO, bsi:abbreviation:15, -iso:electrodoc:15.) Under ordinary circumstances, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will connect the abbreviation and its -expansion with the word \enquote{\emph{See}} --- or its equivalent in -the document's language --- in italics. If you wish to present the -cross-reference differently, you can put the connecting word(s) into -the \textsf{nameaddon} field. - -\mylittlespace I haven't disabled in any way the mechanisms -\textsf{biblatex} uses to produce the list of shorthands, so the -\cmd{printshorthands} command will still print that list in your -document. Judicious use of \texttt{skiplos} in the \textsf{options} -field will therefore enable simultaneous use of several methods of -shorthand presentation, if that is useful. It may be as well to -mention here that the \emph{Manual} (17.39--40) offers other uses for -this alphabetized cross-referencing system in reference lists, which -may also prove helpful for the author-date style. See the discussion -of \textsf{customc} in section~\ref{sec:entrytypes} of the notes \&\ -bibliography docs, above. - -\mylittlespace Finally, you may need to use this entry type if you -wish to include a comment inside the parentheses of a citation, as -specified by the \emph{Manual} (16.111). If you have a -\textsf{postnote}, then you can manually provide the punctuation and -comment there, e.g., \cmd{autocite[4; the unrevised - trans.]\{stendhal:parma\}}. Without a \textsf{postnote}, you'll -need a separate \textsf{misc} or \textsf{customc} entry containing -just the text of the comment in the \textsf{title} field, -\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{classical}, and \textsf{options} -\texttt{skipbib}. An \cmd{autocites} command calling both the main -text and the comment will do the trick, e.g., -\cmd{autocites\{chicago:manual:15\}\{chicago:comment\}}. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{image}} entry type, left -undefined in the standard styles, is in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} intended for referring to -photographs. Excluding the possible use of the \textsf{entrysubtype} -field, which in an \textsf{image} entry would be ignored, this type is -a clone of \textsf{artwork}, so you should consult the latter's -documentation above to see how to construct your .bib entry. (See -\emph{Manual} 12.33; bedford:photo.) - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace These \mymarginpar{\textbf{inbook}\\\textbf{incollection}} -two standard \textsf{biblatex} types have very nearly identical -formatting requirements as far as the Chicago specification is -concerned, but I have retained both of them for compatibility. -\textsf{Biblatex.pdf} (§~2.1.1) intends the first for \enquote{a part - of a book which forms a self-contained unit with its own title,} -while the second would hold \enquote{a contribution to a collection - which forms a self-contained unit with a distinct author and its own - title.} The \textsf{title} of both sorts will be in plain text, and -in general you can use either type for most material falling into -these categories. There is, however, an important difference between -them, as it is only in \textsf{incollection} entries that I implement -the \emph{Manual's} recommendations for space-saving abbreviations in -the list of references when you cite multiple pieces from the same -\textsf{collection}. These abbreviations are activated when you use -the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in \textsf{incollection} -entries, and not in \textsf{inbook} entries, mainly because the -\emph{Manual} (17.70) here specifies a \enquote{multiauthor book.} -(For more on this mechanism see \textbf{crossref}, below, and note -that it is also active in \textsf{letter} and \textsf{inproceedings} -entries. There is, of course, nothing to prevent you from using the -mechanism when referring to, e.g., chapters from a single-author book, -but you'll have to use \textsf{incollection} instead of -\textsf{inbook}.) If the part of a book to which you are referring -has had a separate publishing history as a book in its own right, then -you may wish to use the \textsf{bookinbook} type, instead, on which -see above. (See \emph{Manual} 17.68--72; \textsf{inbook}: -ashbrook:brain, phibbs:diary, will:cohere; \textsf{incollection}: -centinel:letters, contrib:contrib, sirosh:visualcortex; ellet:galena, -keating:dearborn, and lippincott:chicago [and the \textsf{collection} -entry prairie:state] demonstrate the use of the \textsf{crossref} -field with its attendant abbreviations in the list of references.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} suggests that, when -referring to a chapter, one use either a chapter number or the -inclusive page numbers, not both. In-text citations, of course, -require any \textsf{postnote} field to specify if it is a whole -chapter to which you are referring. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inproceedings}} entry type works -pretty much as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, the main -differences between it and \textsf{incollection} are the lack of an -\textsf{edition} field and the possibility that an -\textsf{organization} may be cited alongside the \textsf{publisher}, -even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't specify its use (17.71). Please -note, also, that the \textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref} mechanism for -shortening citations of multiple pieces from the same -\textsf{proceedings} is operative here, just as it is in -\textsf{incollection} entries. See \textbf{crossref}, below, for more -details. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{inreference}} entry type is -aliased to \textsf{incollection} in the standard styles, but the -\emph{Manual's} requirements for the notes \&\ bibliography style -prompted a thoroughgoing revision. Unfortunately, instructions for -the author-date style are considerably less copious, so parts of what -follows are my best guess at following the specification -(17.238--239). - -\mylittlespace One thing, at least, seems clear. If your reference -work can easily or conveniently be presented like a regular book, that -is, with an author or editor, a year of publication, and a title, and -if you you will be citing it by page or section number, then you -should almost certainly simply choose the \textsf{book} entry type for -your .bib entry. (Cf.\ mla:style, schellinger:novel, times:guide. The -latter was presented as an \textsf{inreference} entry for the notes -\&\ bibliography style, but because the \textsf{book} entry type can -also present references to alphabetized headings [see below], at least -in the list of references, then it seemed better just to choose a -\textsf{book} entry for the author-date style.) - -\mylittlespace If you simply cannot make your source fit the template -for a \textsf{book}, then you may need to use the \textsf{inreference} -type, the main feature of which is the \textsf{lista} field, which you -use to present citations from \enquote{alphabetically arranged} works -by named article rather than by page number. You should present these -article names just as they appear in the work, separated by the -keyword \enquote{\texttt{and}} if there is more than one, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will provide the appropriate -prefatory string (\texttt{s.v.}, plural \texttt{s.vv.}), and enclose -each in its own set of quotation marks (times:guide). More relevant -to the author-date style is the fact that the \textsf{postnote} field -works the same way in \textsf{inreference} entries, the only -limitation on this system being that this field, unlike -\textsf{lista}, is not a list, and therefore for the formatting to -work correctly you can only put one article name in it. In the case -of \enquote{[w]ell-known reference books, such as major dictionaries - and encyclopedias,} you are encouraged not to include them in the -list of references, so the \textsf{lista} field actually may be of -less use than this special formatting of \textsf{postnote}. You may -want to look at ency:britannica, where only a (carefully-formatted) -\textsf{shorttitle} and an \textsf{options} field are necessary to -allow you to produce in-text citations that look like (\emph{Ency.\ - Brit.}\ 15th ed., s.v. \enquote{Article}). - -\mylittlespace If it seems appropriate to include such a work in the -list of references, perhaps because the work is not so well known that -a short citation will be parseable by your readers, or perhaps because -it is an online work, which requires you to provide a \textsf{urldate} -(see below), be aware that the contents of the \textsf{lista} field -will also be presented there, which may not be what you want. A -separate \textsf{inreference} or \textsf{reference} entry might solve -this problem, but you may also need a \textsf{sortkey} field to ensure -proper alphabetization, as \textsf{biblatex} will attempt to use an -\textsf{editor} or \textsf{author} name, if either is present. In a -typical \textsf{inreference} entry, very few fields are needed, as -\enquote{the facts of publication are often omitted, but the edition - (if not the first) must be specified.} In practice, this means a -\textsf{title} and possibly an \textsf{edition} field. The -\textsf{author} field holds the author of the specific article (in -\textsf{lista}), not the author of the \textsf{title} as a whole. -This name will be printed in parentheses after the entry's name -(grove:sibelius). - -\mylittlespace All of these rules apply to online reference works, as -well, for which you need to provide not only a \textsf{url} but also, -always, a \textsf{urldate}, as these sources are in constant flux -(wikiped:bibtex, grove:sibelius). For author-date, it may be -convenient to duplicate the \textsf{urlyear} in the \textsf{year}, as -this will help to present and categorize the material both in -citations and in the list of references. Please note, however, that -the automatic provision of the \enquote{n.d.} abbreviation when a -\textsf{year} is missing has been turned off for \textsf{inreference} -entries, as for \textsf{misc} and \textsf{reference} entries. - -\mylittlespace Some of these presentational difficulties might make -switching between the two Chicago styles rather more difficult, -depending on the nature of your sources. The advice I offer in -section~\ref{sec:twostyles} below may be of assistance. - -\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{letter}} entry type was designed -to be used for citing letters, memoranda, or similar texts, but -\emph{only} when they appear in a published collection. (Unpublished -material of this nature needs a \textsf{misc} entry, for which see -below.) The author-date specification (17.77), however, recommends -against individual letters appearing in a list of references, -suggesting instead that you put the whole published collection in a -\textsf{book} entry and use a notice in the text to specify the letter -(white:total). - -\mylittlespace If you absolutely must include individual letters in -the list of references, for whatever reason, then the instructions -above for the notes \&\ bibliography style in -section~\ref{sec:entrytypes}, s.v.\ \enquote{\textsf{letter,}} should -get you started. There are a few wrinkles, related to date -specifications, that I shall attempt to clarify here. If you look at -white:ross:memo and white:russ, you'll see two letters from the same -published collection, both written in the same year. You can now -simply use the \textsf{origdate} field in both of them, because in the -absence of a \textsf{date} (or an \textsf{eventdate}) \textsf{Biber} -and \textsf{biblatex} will use the \textsf{origyear} as the -\textsf{labelyear}, putting it at the head of the entry and in the -citation, and also ensuring that the letters \texttt{a,b,c} are -appended to disambiguate the two sources. You no longer need anything -in the \textsf{options} field at all, thanks to the way -\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} works through the possibilities and finds a -date to head the entry. In this case, it works because we are using -the \textsf{xref} mechanism to refer to the whole published collection -(white:total), so a separate citation of that entry provides the -\textsf{date} for the shortened cross-reference included in the list -of references, and the \textsf{letter} entry never sees that -\textsf{date} at all. - -\mylittlespace If this all seems clear as mud, I'm not surprised, but -let me suggest that you experiment with the different date settings to -see what kinds of effects they have on the final result, and also read -the documentation of the \textsf{date} field in -section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} below. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{manual}} is the second of two -traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ entry types that the \emph{Manual} -suggests formatting as books, the other being \textsf{booklet}. As -with this latter, I have retained it in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} for backward compatibility, its -main peculiarity being that, in the absence of a named author, the -\textsf{organization} producing the manual will be provided both as -author and as publisher. (You can give a shortened form of the -\textsf{organization} in the \textsf{shortauthor} field for text -citations, if needed.) Of course, if you were to use a \textsf{book} -entry for such a reference, then you would need to define both -\textsf{author} and \textsf{publisher} using the name you here might -have put in \textsf{organization}. (See 17:47; chicago:manual:15, -dyna:browser, natrecoff:camera.) - -\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{misc}} its name suggests, the -\textsf{misc} entry type was designed as a hold-all for citations that -didn't quite fit into other categories. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, -I have somewhat extended its applicability, while retaining its -traditional use. Put simply, with no \textsf{entrysubtype} field, a -\textsf{misc} entry will retain backward compatibility with the -standard styles, so the usual \textsf{howpublished}, \textsf{version}, -and \textsf{type} fields are all available for specifying an otherwise -unclassifiable text, and the \textsf{title} will be italicized. (The -\emph{Manual}, you may wish to note, doesn't give specific -instructions on how such citations should be formatted, so when using -the Chicago style I would recommend you have recourse to this -traditional entry type as sparingly as possible.) - -\mylittlespace If you do provide an \textsf{entrysubtype} field, the -\textsf{misc} type provides a means for citing unpublished letters, -memoranda, private contracts, wills, interviews, and the like, making -it something of an unpublished analogue to the \textsf{letter} and -\textsf{article} entry types (which see). Typically, such an entry -will cite part of an archive, and equally typically the text cited -won't have a specific title, but only a generic one, whereas an -\textsf{unpublished} entry will ordinarily have a specific author and -title, and won't come from a named archive. As a rule, and as with -the \textsf{letter} type, the \emph{Manual} (17.233) suggests that the -list of references will usually contain only the name of the whole -archived collection, with more specific information about individual -items provided in the text, \enquote{outside the parentheses.} If, on -the other hand, \enquote{only one item from a collection has been - mentioned in text, the entry may begin with the writer's name (if - known).} (See 17.205-206, 17.220, 17.222-232; house:papers cites a -whole archive, while creel:house, dinkel:agassiz, and spock:interview -cite individual pieces.) - -\mylittlespace As far as constructing your .bib entry goes, you should -first know that, like the \textsf{inreference} and \textsf{reference} -types, the absence of any date will not result in the \enquote{n.d.} -abbreviation automatically being provided. As for presenting the -date, the \emph{Manual} draws a distinction between archival material -that is \enquote{letter-like} (letters, memoranda, reports, telegrams) -and that which isn't (interviews, wills, contracts, or even personal -communications you've received and which you wish to cite). This may -not always be the easiest distinction to draw, and in previous -releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} I have been ignoring it, but -once you've decided to classify it one way or the other you put the -date in the \textsf{origdate} field for letters, etc.\ (creel:house), -and into the \textsf{date} field for the others (spock:interview). -Like with the \textsf{letter} type, if the only date present is an -\textsf{origdate}, you no longer need to set the \texttt{cmsdate} -option in your .bib entry to make sure that that year appears at the -head of the entry (and in citations) --- this now happens -automatically. (Cf.\ particularly the documentation in -section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} below, s.v.\ \enquote{date}, and -also the \textsf{letter} type above for some of the date-related -complications that can arise, and how you can address them with -judicious use of the \textsf{options}, \textsf{date}, and -\textsf{origdate} fields.) - -\mylittlespace As in \textsf{letter} entries, the titles of -unpublished letters are of the form \texttt{Author to Recipient}, -further information can be given in the \textsf{titleaddon} field, -while the \textsf{origlocation} field can hold the place where the -letter was written. Interviews or similar pieces will have a -different sort of title, but all types will use the \textsf{note}, -\textsf{organization}, \textsf{institution}, and \textsf{location} -fields (in ascending order of generality) to identify the archive, -though the \emph{Manual} specifies (17.228) that well-known -depositories don't usually need a city, state or country specified. -(The traditional \textsf{misc} fields are all still available, also.) - -\mylittlespace When your .bib entry refers to an entire archived -collection, then you may wish to use the word -\enquote{\texttt{classical}} as your \textsf{entrysubtype}, which will -have no effect on the list of references but will change the look of -the in-text citations (house:papers). Instead of any date, the -citation will include the \textsf{title}, separated from the -\textsf{author's} name by a space, e.g., (House Papers). This same -arrangement, happily, allows you easily to cite individual books of -the Bible, and also certain other sacred texts (17.246--49; genesis). -Please see under \textsf{entrysubtype} in -section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} below for all the details of the -\texttt{classical} toggle. - -\mylittlespace In all this class of archived material, the -\emph{Manual} (17.222) quite specifically requires more consistency -within your own work than conformity to some external standard, so it -is the former which you should pursue. I hope that -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} proves helpful in this regard. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{music}} is one of three new -audiovisual entry types, and is intended primarily to aid in the -presentation of musical recordings that do not have a video component, -though it can also include audio books (auden:reading:15). A DVD or -VHS of an opera or other performance, by contrast, should use the -\textbf{video} type instead (handel:messiah:15). Because -\textsf{biblatex} --- and \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ before it --- were -designed primarily for citing book-like objects, some choices needed -to be made in assigning the various roles found on the back of a CD to -the fields in a typical .bib entry. I have also implemented several -new bibstrings to help in identifying these roles within entries. If -you can think of a simpler way to distribute the roles, please let me -know, so that I can consider making changes before anyone gets used to -the current equivalences. - -\mylittlespace These equivalences, in summary form, are: - -{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}} -\begin{description} -\item[author =] composer, songwriter, or performer(s), - depending on whom you wish to emphasize by placing them at the head - of the entry. -\item[editor, editora, editorb =] conductor, director or - performer(s). These will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of - the work, though the usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor} - options can alter the presentation within an entry. Because these - are non-standard roles, you will need to identify them using the - following: -\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles, - all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will be - \texttt{conductor}, \texttt{director}, \texttt{producer}, and, - oddly, \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful when - identifying the group performing a piece, as it usually doesn't need - further specifying and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from - falling back on the default \texttt{editor} bibstring. -\item[title, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other audiovisual - types, \textsf{music} serves as an analogue both to books and to - collections, so the title will either be, e.g., the album title or a - song title, in which latter case the album title would go into - \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{maintitle} might be necessary for - something like a box set of \emph{Complete Symphonies}. -\item[series, number:] These two are closely associated, and are - intended for presenting the catalog information provided by the - music publisher, especially in the case when a publisher oversees - more than one label. In nytrumpet:art:15, for example, the - \textsf{series} field holds the label (\texttt{Vox/Turn\-about}) and - the \textsf{number} field the catalog number (\texttt{PVT 7183}). - You can certainly put all of this information into one of the above - fields, but separating it may help make the .bib entry more - readable. -\item[howpublished/pubstate:] The \emph{Manual} (17.268) follows the - rather specialized requirements for presenting publishing - information for musical recordings. The normal symbol for musical - copyright is\ \texttt{\textcircledP} (Unicode point u+2117, SOUND - RECORDING COPYRIGHT), but other copyrights \texttt{\textcopyright} - are often also asserted. The \textsf{howpublished} field is the - place for these symbols, and it may also have to hold a year - designation if the \texttt{\textcircledP} and the - \texttt{\textcopyright} apply to different years, as sometimes - happens. In keeping with its general usage in the author-date - style, but also recognizing the peculiarities of this entry type, I - have made the \textsf{pubstate} field a synonym for - \textsf{howpublished}. Please choose only one of them per entry, - and remember that the automatic presentation of reprints via the - \textsf{pubstate} field is disabled in \textsf{music} entries. (See - nytrumpet:art:15.) -\item[date, publisher:] Ordinarily, you can use a combination of the - \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate} fields, along with the - \texttt{cmsdate} entry option, to present the various dates of - publication and republication of a work. This will mostly still - work in \textsf{music} entries, but, as I just pointed out, the - automatic presentation of reprints via the \textsf{pubstate} field - has been turned off, as it doesn't provide a good fit for the - materials at hand. Instead, the \textsf{howpublished} or - \textsf{pubstate} field can be used manually to present the - publishing complexities, including year information that won't be - placed at the head of an entry. Any year data you do wish placed - there needs to go in \textsf{date} or \textsf{origdate}, as usual. - Thankfully, the \textsf{publisher} field itself is self-explanatory. -\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type} - field holds the medium of the recording, e.g., vinyl, 33 rpm, - 8-track tape, cassette, compact disc, mp3, ogg vorbis. -\end{description}} - -I should also note here that I have implemented the standard -\textsf{biblatex} \textbf{eventdate} field, in case you need it to -identify a particular recording session or concert. It will be -printed just after the \textsf{title}. The entries in -\textsf{dates-test.bib} should at least give you a good idea of how -this all works, and that file also contains an example of an audio -book presented in a \textsf{music} entry. If you browse the examples -in the \emph{Manual} you will see that no author-date examples are -given, so I have generally adopted the formatting decisions I made for -the notes \&\ bibliography style. Arguments as to why I'm wrong will, -of course, be entertained. (Cf. 17.268; auden:reading:15, -beethoven:sonata29, bernstein:shostakovich, nytrumpet:art:15.) - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{online}} \emph{Manual}'s -instructions (17.142--147, 17.198, 17.234--237) for citing online -materials are slightly different from those suggested by standard -\textsf{biblatex}. Indeed, this is a case where complete backward -compatibility with other \textsf{biblatex} styles may be impossible, -because as a general rule the \emph{Manual} considers relevant not -only where a source is found, but also the nature of that source, -e.g., if it's an online edition of a book (james:ambassadors), then it -calls for a \textsf{book} entry. Even if you cite an -\enquote{intrinsically online} source, if that source is structured -more or less like a conventional printed periodical, then you'll -probably want to use \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} instead of -\textsf{online} (stenger:privacy, which cites \emph{CNN.com} --- -\emph{Yahoo!\ News} is another example that would be treated in such a -way). If the \enquote{standard facts of publication} are missing, -then the \textsf{online} type is usually the best choice -(evanston:library, powell:email). Some online materials will, no -doubt, make it difficult to choose an entry type, but so long as all -locating information is present, then perhaps that is enough to -fulfill the specification, or at least so I'd like to hope. - -\mylittlespace Constructing an \textsf{online} .bib file entry is much -the same as in \textsf{biblatex}. The \textsf{title} field would -contain the title of the page, the \textsf{organization} field could -hold the title or owner of the whole site. If there is no specific -title for a page, but only a generic one (powell:email), then in the -author-date style the \textsf{title} will serve just as well as -\textsf{titleaddon}, which latter is required for the notes \&\ -bibliography style. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{patent}} \emph{Manual} is very -brief on the subject of patents (17.219), but very clear about which -information it wants you to present, so such entries may not work well -with other \textsf{biblatex} styles. The important date, as far as -Chicago is concerned, is the filing date. If a patent has been filed -but not yet granted, then you can place the filing date in either the -\textsf{date} field or the \textsf{origdate} field, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will automatically prepend the -bibstring \texttt{patentfiled} to it. If the patent has been granted, -then you put the filing date in the \textsf{origdate} field, and you -put the date it was issued in the \textsf{date} field, to which the -bibstring \texttt{patentissued} will automatically be prepended. In -this entry type, and in no other, the \texttt{cmsdate=on} option is -turned on by default, so that the filing date will be at the head of -the entry in the list of references and in the citation, as well. If -you have more than one patent by the same author(s) filed in the same -year, and if one or both of them have also been granted, then you'll -need to reverse the dates (or put \texttt{switchdates} in the -\textsf{options} field) so that \enquote{a,b,c} etc.\ can be appended -to the year. (If there is just the one, filing, date, please don't -use the \texttt{switchdates} option.) The patent number goes in the -\textsf{number} field, and you should use the standard -\textsf{biblatex} bibstrings in the \textsf{type} field. Though it -isn't mentioned by the \emph{Manual}, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will print the \textsf{holder} -after the \textsf{author}, if you provide one. See petroff:impurity. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{periodical}} is the standard -\textsf{biblatex} entry type for presenting an entire issue of a -periodical, rather than one article within it. It has the same -function in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, and in the main uses the same -fields, though in keeping with the system established in the -\textsf{article} entry type (which see) you'll need to provide -\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine} if the periodical you are -citing is a \enquote{newspaper} or \enquote{magazine} instead of a -\enquote{journal.} Also, remember that the \textsf{note} field is the -place for identifying strings like \enquote{special issue,} with its -initial lowercase letter to activate the automatic capitalization -routines, though this isn't strictly necessary in the author-date -style. (See \emph{Manual} 17.170; good:wholeissue.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{reference}} entry type is -aliased to \textsf{collection} by the standard \textsf{biblatex} -styles, but I intend it to be used in cases where you need to cite a -reference work but not an alphabetized article or articles in that -work. This could be because it doesn't contain such articles, and yet -you still want the entry in the list of references to start with the -\textsf{title}. Indeed, the only differences between it and -\textsf{inreference} are the lack of a \textsf{lista} field to present -an alphabetized entry, and the fact that any \textsf{postnote} field -will be printed verbatim, rather than formatted as an alphabetized -entry. (Cf.\ \textsf{inreference}, above.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{report}} entry type is a -\textsf{biblatex} generalization of the traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -type \textsf{techreport}. Instructions for such entries are rather -thin on the ground in the \emph{Manual} (17.241), so I have followed -the generic advice about formatting it like a book, and hope that the -results conform to the specification. Its main peculiarities are the -\textsf{institution} field in place of a \textsf{publisher}, the -\textsf{type} field for identifying the kind of report in question, -and the \textsf{isrn} field containing the International Standard -Technical Report Number of a technical report. As in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, if you use a \textsf{techreport} entry, then the -\textsf{type} field automatically defaults to -\cmd{bibstring\{techreport\}}. As with \textsf{booklet} and -\textsf{manual}, you can also use a \textsf{book} entry, putting the -report type in \textsf{note} and the \textsf{institution} in -\textsf{publisher}. (See herwign:office.) - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{review}} its name suggests, this -entry type was designed for reviews published in periodicals, and if -you've already read the \textsf{article} documentation above you'll -know that I haven't yet found an example where you absolutely need to -use it for the author-date style. The code to process such an entry -remains in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, so if you are -building a .bib file for use with both Chicago styles then any -\textsf{review} entries in it will work fine in both, but otherwise -the \textsf{article} type will suffice. If you find I'm wrong about -this, please let me know. (Cf.\ barcott:review:15, bundy:macneil, -Clemens:letter, gourmet:052006, kozinn:review, nyt:trevorobit, -ratliff:review:15, unsigned:ranke, wallraff:word.) - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppbook}} is the entry type to -use if the main focus of a reference is supplemental material in a -book or in a collection, e.g., an introduction, afterword, or forward, -either by the same or by a different author. There are two mechanisms -in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} for producing such a citation. First, -these three just-mentioned types of material, and only these three -types, can be referenced using the \textsf{introduction}, -\textsf{afterword}, or \textsf{foreword} fields, a system that -requires you simply to define one of them in any way and leave the -others undefined. The macros don't use the text provided by such an -entry, they merely check to see if one of them is defined, in order to -decide which sort of pre- or post-matter is at stake, and to print the -appropriate string before the \textsf{title} in the list of -references, and possibly also in the list of shorthands. This -mechanism works without modification across multiple languages, but I -have also provided functionality which allows you to cite any sort of -supplemental material whatever, using the \textsf{type} field. Under -this second system, simply put the nature of the material, including -the relevant preposition, in that field, beginning with a lowercase -letter so \textsf{biblatex} can decide whether it needs capitalization -depending on the context. Examples might be \enquote{\texttt{preface - to}} or \enquote{\texttt{colophon of}.} (Please note, however, -that unless you use a \cmd{bibstring} command in the \textsf{type} -field, the resultant entry will not be portable across languages.) - -\mylittlespace The other rules for constructing your .bib entry remain -the same. The \textsf{author} field refers to the author of the -introduction or afterword, while \textsf{bookauthor} refers to the -author of the main text of the work, if the two differ. If the focus -of the reference is the main text of the book, but you want to mention -the name of the writer of an introduction or afterword for -completeness, then the normal \textsf{biblatex} rules apply, and you -can just put their name in the appropriate field of a \textsf{book} -entry, that is, in the \textsf{foreword}, \textsf{afterword}, or -\textsf{introduction} field. (See \emph{Manual} 17.74--75; -friedman:intro, polakow:afterw, prose:intro). - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppcollection}} fulfills a -function analogous to \textsf{suppbook}. Indeed, I believe the -\textbf{suppbook} type can serve to present supplemental material in -both types of work, so this entry type is an alias to -\textsf{suppbook}, which see. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{suppperiodical}} type is -intended to allow reference to generically-titled works in -periodicals, such as regular columns or letters to the editor. -\textsf{Biblatex} also provides the \textsf{review} type for this -purpose, and in the notes \&\ bibliography style -\textsf{suppperiodical} is an alias of \textsf{review}. In the -author-date style, however, as discussed above, you really only need -the \textsf{article} entry type for this purpose, though I have -retained \textsf{suppperiodical} in order to facilitate switching -between the two Chicago styles. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{video}} is the last of the new -audiovisual entry types, and as its name suggests it is intended for -citing visual media, be it films of any sort or TV shows, broadcast, -on the Net, on VHS, DVD, or Blu-ray. As with the \textsf{music} type -discussed above, certain choices had to be made when associating the -production roles found, e.g., on a DVD, to those bookish ones provided -by \textsf{biblatex}. Here are the main correspondences: - -{\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\qquad\textsf{#1}} -\begin{description} -\item[author:] This will not infrequently be left undefined, as the - director of a film should be identified as such and therefore placed - in the \textsf{editor} field with the appropriate - \textsf{editortype} (see below). You will need it, however, to - identify the composer of, e.g., an oratorio on VHS - (handel:messiah:15), or perhaps the provider of commentaries or - other extras on a film DVD (cleese:holygrail). -\item[editor, editora, editorb:] The director or producer, or possibly - the performer or conductor in recorded musical performances. These - will ordinarily follow the \textsf{title} of the work, though the - usual \texttt{useauthor} and \texttt{useeditor} options can alter - the presentation within an entry. Because these are non-standard - roles, you will need to identify them using the following: -\item[editortype, editoratype, editorbtype:] The most common roles, - all associated with specific bibstrings (or their absence), will - likely be \texttt{director}, \texttt{produ\-cer}, and, oddly, - \texttt{none}. The last is particularly useful if you want to - identify performers, as they usually don't need further specifying - and this role prevents \textsf{biblatex} from falling back on the - default \texttt{editor} bibstring. -\item[title, titleaddon, booktitle, maintitle:] As with the other - audiovisual types, \textsf{video} serves as an analogue both to - books and to collections, so the \textsf{title} may be of a whole - film DVD or of a TV series, or it may identify one episode in a - series or one scene in a film. In the latter cases, the title of - the whole would go in \textsf{booktitle}. The \textsf{titleaddon} - field may be useful for specifying the season and/or episode number - of a TV series, or for any other information that needs to come - between the \textsf{title} and the \textsf{booktitle} - (cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah:15). As in the - \textsf{music} type, \textsf{maintitle} may be necessary for a boxed - set or something similar. -\item[date, origdate, pubstate:] The publication details of this sort - of material are usually straightforward, at least compared with the - \textsf{music} type, but there will be occasions when you need two - dates. When citing an episode of a long-running TV series you may - need both a date for the episode and either a range for the whole - run or a year for the release of the box set, and when citing a film - on DVD you may want to present both the original release date and - the date of release on DVD. In these cases, the usual - \textsf{chicago-authordate} mechanisms for choosing the date to - appear at the head of an entry apply. You can also use the standard - \textsf{pubstate} field with \texttt{reprint} in it to control the - printing of the original date in parentheses at the end of the - entry, though I have altered the string that is printed there (see - next item). I have also disabled the printing of the - \cmd{bibstring\{reprint\}} before the publication information, as it - doesn't really apply to this class of material. Cf.\ episode:tv, - hitchcock:nbynw; \textsf{pubstate}, below. -\item[entrysubtype:] In most entry types, the string printed in - parentheses to date the original appearance of a work is - \enquote{\texttt{Orig.\ pub.}} This won't work in \textsf{video}, - so by default in this entry type it will print - \enquote{\texttt{Orig.\ released.}} As this isn't quite right for - TV shows, you can place the exact string \texttt{tv} into the - \textsf{entrysubtype} field to obtain \enquote{\texttt{Orig.\ - shown.}} Alternatively, you can put whatever you like in the - \textsf{pubstate} field, including parentheses and the year if you - want them, and all of it will appear where it should. (The - \emph{Manual} gives no guidance on presenting televisual materials, - so I've improvised. Any improvements will be gratefully - considered.) -\item[type:] As in all the audiovisual entry types, the \textsf{type} - field holds the medium of the \textsf{title}, e.g., 8 mm, VHS, DVD, - Blu-ray, MPEG. -\end{description}} - -As with the \textsf{music} type, entries in \textsf{dates-test.bib} -should at least give you a good idea of how all this works. (Cf.\ -17.270, 273; cleese:holygrail, episode:tv, handel:messiah:15, -hitchcock:nbynw, loc:city.) - -\subsection{Entry Fields} -\label{sec:fields:authdate} - -The following discussion presents, in alphabetical order, a complete -list of the entry fields you will need to use -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}. As in -section~\ref{sec:types:authdate}, I shall include references to the -numbered paragraphs of the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}, and also to -the entries in \textsf{dates-test.bib}. Many fields are most easily -understood with reference to other, related fields. In such cases, -cross references should allow you to find the information you need. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{addendum}} in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to add miscellaneous -information to the end of an entry, after publication data but before -any \textsf{url} or \textsf{doi} field. In the \textsf{patent} entry -type (which see), it will be printed in close association with the -filing and issue dates. In any entry type, if your data begins with a -word that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a -sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and the -style will take care of the rest. Cf.\ \textsf{note}. (See -\emph{Manual} 17.145, 17.123; davenport:attention, natrecoff:camera.) - -\mybigspace In most \mymarginpar{\textbf{afterword}} circumstances, -this field will function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex}, -i.e., you should include here the author(s) of an afterword to a given -work. The \emph{Manual} suggests that, as a general rule, the -afterword would need to be of significant importance in its own right -to require mentioning in the reference apparatus, but this is clearly -a matter for the user's judgment. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if the -name given here exactly matches that of an editor and/or a translator, -then \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will concatenate these fields in the -formatted references. - -\mylittlespace As noted above, however, this field has a special -meaning in the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, used to make an -afterword, foreword, or introduction the main focus of a citation. If -it's an afterword at issue, simply define \textsf{afterword} any way -you please, leave \textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction} -undefined, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will do the rest. Cf.\ -\textsf{foreword} and \textsf{introduction}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.46, -17.74; polakow:afterw.) - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace At \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotation}} the request of Emil -Salim, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} has, as of version 0.9, added a -package option (see \texttt{annotation} below, section -\ref{sec:useropts}) to allow you to produce annotated lists of -references. The formatting of such a list is currently fairly basic, -though it conforms with the \emph{Manual's} minimal guidelines -(16.77). The default in \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx} is to define -\cmd{DeclareFieldFormat\{an\-notation\}} using \cmd{par}\cmd{nobreak} -\cmd{vskip} \cmd{bibitemsep}, though you can alter it by re-declaring -the format in your preamble. The page-breaking algorithms don't -always give perfect results here, but the default formatting looks, to -my eyes, fairly decent. In addition to tweaking the field formatting -you can also insert \cmd{par} (or even \cmd{vadjust\{\cmd{eject}\}}) -commands into the text of your annotations to improve the appearance. -Please consider the \texttt{annotation} option a work in progress, but -it is usable now. (N.B.: The \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field \textsf{annote} -serves as an alias for this.) - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{annotator}} have implemented this -\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles -do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may -be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{commentator}. - -\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{author}} the most part, I have -implemented this field in a completely standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -fashion. Remember that corporate or organizational authors need to -have an extra set of curly braces around them (e.g., -\texttt{\{\{Associated Press\}\}}\,) to prevent \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ from -treating one part of the name as a surname (17.47, 17.197; -assocpress:gun, chicago:manual:15). If there is no \textsf{author}, then -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will look, in sequence, for an -\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, or \textsf{compiler} (actually -\textsf{namec}, currently) and use that name (or those names) instead, -followed by the appropriate identifying string (esp.\ 17.41, also -17.28--29, 17.88, 17.95, 17.172; boxer:china, brown:bremer, -harley:cartography, schellinger:novel, sechzer:women, silver:ga\-wain, -soltes:georgia). \textsf{Biber} now takes care of alphabetizing -entries no matter which name appears at their head, and the package -also automatically provides a name for citations. - -\mylittlespace As its name suggests, the author-date style very much -wants to have a name of some sort present both for the entries in the -list of references and for the in-text citations. Indeed, -\enquote{this system works best where all or most of the sources are - easily convertible to author-date references} (16.4). The -\emph{Manual} is nothing if not flexible, however, so with unsigned -articles or encyclopedia entries the \textsf{journaltitle} or -\textsf{title} may take the place of the \textsf{author} -(gourmet:052006, lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit, -unsigned:ranke, wikipedia:bibtex). Even in such \textsf{article} -entries, however, it may be advantageous to provide a (formatted and -abbreviated) \textsf{shortauthor} field to keep the in-text citations -to a reasonable length, though not at the expense of making it hard to -find the relevant entries in the reference list. - -\mylittlespace If you wish to emphasize the activity of an editor or a -translator, you can use the \textsf{biblatex} and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} options \texttt{useauthor=false}, -\texttt{useeditor=false}, \texttt{usetranslator=false}, and -\texttt{usecompiler=false} in the \textsf{options} field to choose -which one appears at the head of an entry. A peculiarity of this -system of toggles is that in order to ensure that the \textsf{title} -of a book appears at the head of an entry, you would need to use -\emph{all four} of the toggles, even though the hypothetical entry -contains no \textsf{translator}. Internally, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} is either searching for an -author-substitute, or it is skipping over elements of the ordered, -unidirectional chain \textsf{author -> editor -> translator -> - compiler -> title}. If you don't include -\texttt{usetranslator=false} in the \textsf{options} field, then the -package begins its search at \textsf{translator} and continues on to -\textsf{namec}, even though you have \texttt{usecompiler=false} in -\textsf{options}. The result will be that the compilers' names will -appear at the head of the entry. If you want to skip over parts of -the chain, you must turn off \emph{all} of the parts up to the one you -wish printed. Another peculiarity of the system is that setting the -Chicago-specific \texttt{usecompiler} option to \texttt{false} doesn't -remove \textsf{namec} from the sorting list, whereas the other -standard \textsf{biblatex} toggles \emph{do} remove their names from -the sorting list, so in some corner cases you may need the -\textsf{sortkey} field. See \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} in -section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below. - -\mylittlespace This system of toggles, then, can turn off -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}'s mechanism for finding a name to place at -the head of an entry, but it also very usefully adds the possibility -of citing a work with an \textsf{author} by its editor, compiler or -translator instead (17.45; eliot:pound), something that wasn't -possible before. For full details of how this works, see the -\textsf{editortype} documentation below. (Of course, in -\textsf{collection} and \textsf{proceedings} entry types, an -\textsf{author} isn't expected, so there the \textsf{editor} is -required, as in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Also, in \textsf{article} -entries with \textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, the absence of -an \textsf{author} triggers the use of the \textsf{journaltitle} in -its stead. See those entry types for further details.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: The \emph{Manual} provides specific -instructions for formatting the names of both anonymous and -pseudonymous authors (17.32--39). The use of \enquote{Anonymous} as -the name is \enquote{generally to be avoided,} but may in some cases -be useful \enquote{in a bibliography in which several anonymous works - need to be grouped.} I would add that sometimes it's the simplest -option for a difficult citation --- cf.\ virginia:plantation:15, where -placing \enquote{\texttt{Anon.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ in the \textsf{author} -field seems about the only way to fit this text into the author-date -style. If \enquote{the authorship is known or guessed at but was - omitted on the title page,} then you need to use the -\textsf{authortype} field to let \textsf{biblatex-chicago} know this -fact. If the author is known (horsley:prosodies), then put -\texttt{anon} in the \textsf{authortype} field, if guessed at -(cook:sotweed) put \texttt{anon?}\ there. (In both cases, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} tests for these \emph{exact} strings, so -check your typing if it doesn't work.) This will have the effect of -enclosing the name in square brackets, with or without the question -mark indicating doubt. As long as you have the right string in the -\textsf{authortype} field, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will -also do the right thing automatically in text citations. - -\mylittlespace The \textsf{nameaddon} field furnishes the means to -cope with the case of pseudonymous authorship. If the author's real -name isn't known, simply put \texttt{pseud.}\ (or -\cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}}) in that field (centinel:letters). If -you wish to give a pseudonymous author's real name, simply include it -there, formatted as you wish it to appear, as the contents of this -field won't be manipulated as a name by \textsf{biblatex} -(lecarre:quest, stendhal:parma). If you have given the author's real -name in the \textsf{author} field, then the pseudonym goes in -\textsf{nameaddon}, in the form \texttt{Firstname Lastname,\,pseud.}\ -(creasey:ashe:blast, creasey:morton:hide, creasey:\\york:death). This -latter method will allow you to keep all references to one author's -work under different pseudonyms grouped together in the list of -references, a method recommended by the \emph{Manual}. - -\mylittlespace One final piece of advice. An institutional author's -name, or a journal's name being used in place of an author, can be -rather too long for in-text citations. In unsigned:ranke I placed an -abbreviated form of the \textsf{journaltitle} into -\textsf{shortauthor}, a practice condoned by the \emph{Manual} -(17.159) even in author-date reference lists. In iso:electrodoc:15, I -provided a \textsf{shorthand} field, which by default in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will appear in text citations. -With this release, you can expand the abbreviation inside the list of -references itself, as suggested by the \emph{Manual}, (17.47). Please -see \textsf{customc} above and \textsf{shorthands} below for the -details. (A list of shorthands can still clarify the abbreviation, if -you wish.) - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{authortype}} -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, this field serves a function very much in -keeping with the spirit of standard \textsf{biblatex}, if not with its -letter. Instead of allowing you to change the string used to identify -an author, the field allows you to indicate when an author is -anonymous, that is, when his or her name doesn't appear on the title -page of the work you are citing. As I've just detailed under -\textsf{author}, the \emph{Manual} generally discourages the use of -\enquote{Anonymous} (or \enquote{Anon.} as an author, though in some -cases it may well be your best option. If, however, the name of the -author is known or guessed at, then you're supposed to enclose that -name within square brackets, which is exactly what -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} does for you when you put either -\texttt{anon} (author known) or \texttt{anon?} (author guessed at) in -the \textsf{authortype} field. (Putting the square brackets in -yourself doesn't work right, hence this mechanism.) The macros test -for these \emph{exact} strings, so check your typing if you don't see -the brackets. Assuming the strings are correct, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will also automatically do the right thing -in citations. (See the \textsf{author} docs just above. Also -\emph{Manual} 17.33--34; cook:sotweed, horsley:prosodies.) - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace For \mymarginpar{\textbf{bookauthor}} the most part, as in -\textsf{biblatex}, a \textsf{bookauthor} is the author of a -\textsf{booktitle}, so that, for example, if one chapter in a book has -different authorship from the book as a whole, you can include that -fact in a reference (17.75; will:cohere). Keep in mind, however, that -the entry type for introductions, forewords and afterwords -(\textsf{suppbook}) uses \textsf{bookauthor} as the author of -\textsf{title} (polakow:afterw, prose:intro). - -\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\vspace{-12pt}\textbf{bookpagination}} -a standard \textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix -the appropriate string to information you provide in a \textsf{pages} -field. If you leave it blank, the default is to print no identifying -string (the equivalent of setting it to \texttt{none}), as this is the -practice the \emph{Manual} recommends for nearly all page numbers. -Even if the numbers you cite aren't pages, but it is otherwise clear -from the context what they represent, you can still leave this blank. -If, however, you specifically need to identify what sort of unit the -\textsf{pages} field represents, then you can either hand-format that -field yourself, or use one of the provided bibstrings in the -\textsf{bookpagination} field. These bibstrings currently are -\texttt{column,} \texttt{line,} \texttt{paragraph,} \texttt{page,} -\texttt{section,} and \texttt{verse}, all of which are used by -\textsf{biblatex's} standard styles. - -\mylittlespace There are two points that may need explaining here. -First, all the bibstrings I have just listed follow the Chicago -specification, which may be confusing if they don't produce the -strings you expect. Second, remember that \textsf{bookpagination} -applies only to the \textsf{pages} field --- if you need to format a -citation's \textsf{postnote} field, then you must use -\textsf{pagination}, which see (15.45--46, 17.128--138). - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{booksubtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{booktitle}. See the next entry for further information. - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitle}} the -\textsf{bookinbook}, \textsf{inbook}, \textsf{incollection}, -\textsf{inproceedings}, and \textsf{letter} entry types, the -\textsf{booktitle} field holds the title of the larger volume in which -the \textsf{title} itself is contained as one part. It is important -not to confuse this with the \textsf{maintitle}, which holds the more -general title of multiple volumes, e.g., \emph{Collected Works}. It -is perfectly possible for one .bib file entry to contain all three -sorts of title (euripides:orestes, plato:republic:gr). You may also -find a \textsf{booktitle} in other sorts of entries (e.g., -\textsf{book} or \textsf{collection}), but there it will almost -invariably be providing information for the \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -cross-referencing apparatus (prairie:state), which I discuss below -(\textbf{crossref}). The \textsf{booktitle} takes sentence-style -capitalization in author-date. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{booktitleaddon}} annex to the -\textsf{booktitle}. It will be printed in the main text font, without -quotation marks. If your data begins with a word that would -ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then -simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{chapter}} field holds the -chapter number, mainly useful only in an \textsf{inbook} or an -\textsf{incollection} entry where you wish to cite a specific chapter -of a book (ashbrook:brain). - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{commentator}} have implemented this -\textsf{biblatex} field pretty much as that package's standard styles -do, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may -be useful for some purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator}. - -\mybigspace \textsf{Biblatex} \mymarginpar{\textbf{crossref}} uses the -standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ cross-referencing mechanism, and has also -introduced a modified one of its own (\textsf{xref}). The -\textsf{crossref} field works exactly the same as it always has, while -\textsf{xref} attempts to remedy some of the deficiencies of the usual -mechanism by ensuring that child entries will inherit no data at all -from their parents. Having said all that, a few further instructions -may be in order for users of both \textsf{biblatex} and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. First, remember that fields in a -\textsf{collection} entry, for example, differ from those in an -\textsf{incollection} entry. In order for the latter to inherit the -\textsf{booktitle} field from the former, the former needs to have -such a field defined, even though a \textsf{collection} entry has no -use itself for such an entry (see ellet:galena, keating:dearborn, -lippincott:chicago, and prairie:state). Note also that an entry with -a \textsf{crossref} field will mechanically try to inherit all -applicable fields from the entry it cross-references. In the case of -ellet:galena et al., you can see that this includes the -\textsf{subtitle} field found in prairie:state, which would then, -quite incorrectly, be added to the \textsf{title} of ellet:galena. In -cases like these, you could just make sure that prairie:state didn't -contain such a field, by placing the entire title + subtitle in the -\textsf{title} field, separated by a colon. Alternatively, as you can -see in ellet:galena, you can just define an empty \textsf{subtitle} -field to prevent it inheriting the unwanted subtitle from -prairie:state. - -\mylittlespace Turning now more narrowly to \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, -the \emph{Manual} (17.70) specifies that if you cite several -contributions to the same collection, all (including the collection -itself) may be listed separately in the list of references, which the -package does automatically, using the default inclusion threshold of 2 -in the case both of \textsf{crossref}'ed and \textsf{xref}'ed entries. -(The familiar \cmd{nocite} command may also help in some -circumstances.) In the list of references an abbreviated form will be -appropriate for all the child entries. The current version of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} implements these instructions, -but only if you use a \textsf{crossref} or an \textsf{xref} field, and -only in \textsf{incollection}, \textsf{inproceedings}, or -\textsf{letter} entries (on the last named, see just below). If you -look at ellet:galena, keating:dearborn, lippincott:chicago, and -prairie:state you'll see this mechanism in action in the list of -references. If you wish to disable this, then simply don't use a -\textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field in your entries. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace A published collection of letters requires a somewhat -different treatment (17.77--78). If you cite more than one letter -from the same collection, then the \emph{Manual} specifies that only -the collection itself --- probably in a \textsf{book} entry --- should -appear in the list of references. In the author-date style, it -discourages individual letters from appearing in that list at all, -even if only one is cited from a collection. If you have special -reason to do so, however, you can still present individual published -letters there, and they too can use the system of shortened references -just outlined, even though the \emph{Manual} doesn't explicitly -require it. As with \textsf{incollection} and \textsf{inproceedings}, -mere use of a \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} field will activate -this mechanism, while avoidance of said fields will disable it. (See -white:ross:memo, white:russ, and white:total, for examples of the -\textsf{xref} field in action in this way, and please note that the -second of these entries is entirely fictitious, provided merely for -the sake of example.) - -\mylittlespace I should also take this opportunity to mention that you -need to be careful when using the \textsf{shorthand} field in -conjunction with the \textsf{crossref} or \textsf{xref} fields, -bearing in mind the complicated questions of inheritance posed by all -such cross-references, most especially in \textsf{letter}, -\textsf{incollection}, and \textsf{inproceedings} entries. A -\textsf{shorthand} field in a parent entry is, at least in the current -state of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, a bad idea. - -\mybigspace Predictably, \colmarginpar{\textbf{date}} this is one of -the key fields for the author-date style, and one which, as a general -rule, every .bib entry designed for this system ought to contain. So -important is it, that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will, in -most entry types, supply a missing \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}} if there -is no date otherwise provided; citations will look like (Author n.d.), -and entries in the list of references will begin: Author, Firstname.\ -n.d. This seems simple enough, but there are a surprising number of -complications which require attention. - -\mylittlespace First, with \textsf{Biber}, an absent \textsf{date} -will automatically provoke it into searching for other sorts of dates -in the entry, in the order \textsf{date, eventdate, origdate, - urldate}. Only when it finds no year at all will it fall back on -\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}. You can eliminate some of these dates from -the running, or change the search order, using the -\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} command in your preamble, but please be aware -that I have hard-coded this order into the author-date style in order -to cope with some tricky corners of the specification. If you reorder -these dates, and your references enter these tricky corners, the -results might be surprising. (Cf.\ section~4.5.2 in -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for the \cmd{DeclareLabelyear} command.) -Second, the entry types in which this automatic provision is turned -off are \textsf{inreference}, \textsf{misc}, and \textsf{reference}, -none of which may be expected in the standard case to have a date -provided. In all other entry types \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ will -appear if no date is provided, though you can turn this off throughout -the document in all entry types with the option \texttt{nodates=false} -when loading \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your preamble. (See -section~\ref{sec:authpreset}, below.) Third, if you wish to provide -the \enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ yourself in the \textsf{year} field, -please instead put \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}} there, as otherwise the -punctuation in citations will come out (subtly) wrong. Fourth, while -we're on the subject, the \textsf{year} field is also the place for -things like \enquote{\texttt{forthcoming},} though you should use the -\cmd{autocap} macro there to make sure the word comes out correctly in -both citations and the list of references. The reason for this is -that the \textsf{date} field accepts only numerical data, in -\textsc{iso}8601 format (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}), whereas \textsf{year} -can, conveniently, hold just about anything. It may be worth noting -here that \textsf{Biber} is somewhat more exacting when parsing the -\textsf{date} field than \textsc{Bib}\TeX, so a field looking like -\texttt{1968/75} will simply be ignored, producing -\enquote{\texttt{n.d.}}\ in the output --- you need \texttt{1968/1975} -instead. If you want a more compressed year range, then you'll want -to use the \textsf{year} field. - -\mylittlespace Fifth, for most entry types, only a year is really -necessary, and in all types only the year --- or year range --- will -be printed in text citations and at the head of entries in the list of -references. More specific \textsf{date} fields are often present, -however, in \textsf{article}, \textsf{misc}, \textsf{online}, -\textsf{patent}, and \textsf{unpublished} entries, for all of which -any day or month provided will be printed later in the reference list -entry. If you follow the recommendations of the \emph{Manual} and -document newspaper articles within running text (17.191), then the -citations need to contain the complete \textsf{date} along with the -\textsf{journaltitle}. Placing \mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}} (and -\texttt{skipbib}) in the \textsf{options} field of an \textsf{article} -or a \textsf{review} entry, alongside a possible -\texttt{useauthor=false}, should allow you to achieve this. The -\emph{Manual} is a little inconsistent when presenting the names of -months in the author-date style, but currently -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} uses abbreviated forms, which you -can change by setting the option \texttt{dateabbrev=false} in your -document preamble. (Cf.\ assocpress:gun, barcott:review:15, batson, -creel:house, nass:address, petroff:impurity, powell:email.) - -\mylittlespace Sixth, the \emph{Manual} (17.125--7) provides a number -of options for when a particular entry --- a reprinted edition, say ---- has more than one date, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} -allows you to choose among all of them. The user interface is a -little more complicated than I had hoped, but I shall attempt to -explain it here as clearly as I can. If a reprinted book, say, has -both a \textsf{date} of publication for the reprint edition and an -\textsf{origdate} for the original edition, then by default -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will use the \textsf{date} in -citations and at the head of the entry in the reference list. If you -inform \textsf{biblatex-chicago} that the book is a reprint by putting -the string \texttt{reprint} in the \textsf{pubstate} field, then a -parenthetical notice will be printed at the end of the entry saying -\enquote{(Orig.\ pub.\ 1898.)} With no \textsf{pubstate} field (and -no \texttt{cmsdate} option), the algorithms will ignore the -\textsf{origdate}. - -\mylittlespace If, for any reason, you wish the \textsf{origdate} to -appear at the head of the entry, then you need to use the -\texttt{cmsdate} toggle in the \textsf{options} field. This has 4 -possible states relevant to this context, though there is a fifth -state (\mycolor{\texttt{full}}) which I've discussed two paragraphs -up: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item \texttt{cmsdate=on} prints the \textsf{origdate} at the head of - the entry in the list of references and in citations: (Author 1898). -\item \texttt{cmsdate=new} prints both the \textsf{origdate} and the - \textsf{date}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{new} format: - (Author 1898/1952). -\item \texttt{cmsdate=old} prints both the \textsf{origdate} and the - \textsf{date}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{old} format: - (Author [1898] 1952). -\item \texttt{cmsdate=off} is the default, discussed above: - (Author 1952). -\end{enumerate} - -In the first three cases, if you put the string \texttt{reprint} in -the \textsf{pubstate} field, then the publication data in the list of -references will include a notice, formatted according to the -specifications, that the modern, cited edition is a reprint. In the -first case, since the \textsf{date} hasn't yet been printed, this -publication data will also include the date of the modern reprint. - -\mylittlespace Let us imagine, however, that your list of references -contains another book by the same author, also a reprint edition: -(Author 1896/1974). How will these two works be ordered in the list -of references? By whatever appears in the \textsf{date} field, which -appears first in the default definition of \cmd{DeclareLabelyear}, and -which in this case will be wrong, because the entries should always be -ordered by the \emph{first} date to appear there, in this case the -contents of \textsf{origdate}. In this example, the solution can be -as simple as a \textsf{sortyear} field set to something earlier than -the date of the other work, e.g., 1951. - -\mylittlespace And if the original publication dates of the two works -are the same? Just as when it is ordering entries, \textsf{biblatex} -will always first process the contents of the \textsf{date} field when -it is deciding whether to add the alphabetical suffix (\texttt{a,b,c} -etc.) to the year to distinguish different works by the same author -published in the same year. You can't even put the suffix on yourself -because the \textsf{origdate} field only accepts numerical data. -Citations of the two works should read, e.g., (Author 1898a) and -(Author 1898b), but will in fact read, ambiguously, (Author 1898) and -(Author 1898). Here we are forced to resort to an unusual expedient, -which amounts to switching the two date fields, placing the earlier -date in \textsf{date} and the later one in \textsf{origdate}. -\textsf{Biblatex-chicago-authordate} tests for this condition using a -simple arithmetical comparison between the two years, then printing -the two dates according to the state of the \texttt{cmsdate} toggle. -The four states of this toggle are the same as before, but there are -only three possible outcomes, as follows: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item \texttt{cmsdate=off} (the default) and \texttt{cmsdate=on} - \emph{both} print the \textsf{date} at the head of the entry in the - list of references and in citations: (Author 1898a), (Author 1898b). -\item \texttt{cmsdate=new} prints both the \textsf{date} and the - \textsf{origdate}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{new} format: - (Author 1898a/1952), (Author 1898b/1974). -\item \texttt{cmsdate=old} prints both the \textsf{date} and the - \textsf{origdate}, using the \emph{Manual's}\ \enquote{old} format: - (Author [1898a] 1952), (Author [1898b] 1974). -\end{enumerate} - -If, for some reason, the automatic switching of the dates cannot be -achieved, perhaps in crossref'd \textsf{letter} entries that you -really want to have in your list of references (white:ross:memo, -white:russ), or perhaps in a reprint edition that hasn't yet appeared -in print (preventing the comparison between a year and the word -\enquote{forthcoming}), then you can use the per-entry option -\texttt{switchdates} in the \textsf{options} field to achieve the -required effects. It may also be worth remarking that the -instructions in the \emph{Manual} aren't entirely clear on the subject -of the alphabetical affix when both dates are used in a citation or at -the head of an entry. It's possible that the differentiation between -(Author 1898/1952) and (Author 1898/1974) is good enough without -affixing anything to the first year, but then in this situation you -would have to be using either \texttt{cmsdate=new} or -\texttt{cmsdate=old}, so the switching functionality at least allows -maximum flexibility. - -\mylittlespace Finally, in the \textsf{misc} entry type this field can -help to distinguish between two classes of archival material, letters -and \enquote{letter-like} sources using \textsf{origdate} while others -(interviews, wills, contracts) use \textsf{date}. (See \textsf{misc} -in section~\ref{sec:types:authdate} for the details.) If such an -entry, as may well occur, contains only an \textsf{origdate}, as can -also be the case in the \textsf{letter} entries I mentioned in the -previous paragraph, \textsf{Biber} and the default -\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} definition now make it possible to do without a -\texttt{cmsdate} option, as \textsf{biblatex} will in such a case use -the \textsf{origdate} to order the entries in a reference list, and -will also append the alphabetical suffix if more than one entry by the -same author has the same \textsf{origyear}. I recommend that you have -a look through \textsf{dates-test.bib} to see how all these -complications will affect the construction of your .bib database, -especially at aristotle:metaphy:gr, creel:house, emerson:nature, -james:ambassadors, maitland:canon, maitland:equity, schweit\-zer:bach, -spock:in\-terview, white:ross:me\-mo, and white:russ. Cf.\ also -\textsf{origdate} and \textsf{year}, below, and the \texttt{cmsdate}, -\texttt{nodates}, and \texttt{switchdates} options in -sections~\ref{sec:preset:authdate} and \ref{sec:authentryopts}. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{day}} field, as of -\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, is obsolete, and will be ignored if you use it -in your .bib files. Use \textsf{date} instead. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{doi}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. The Digital Object Identifier of the work, which the -\emph{Manual} suggests you can use \enquote{in place of page numbers - or other locators} (17.181; friedman:learn\-ing). Cf.\ -\textsf{url}. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{edition}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. If you enter a plain cardinal number, \textsf{biblatex} will -convert it to an ordinal (chicago:manual:15), followed by the appropriate -string. Any other sort of edition information will be printed as is, -though if your data begins with a word (or abbreviation) that would -ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then -simply ensure that that word (or abbreviation) is in lowercase, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing -(babb:peru, times:guide). In most situations, the \emph{Manual} -generally recommends the use of abbreviations in the list of -references, but there is room for the user's discretion in specific -citations (emerson:nature). - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{editor}} far as possible, I have -implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, but -the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain -complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his -documentation that the \textsf{editor} field will be associated with a -\textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle}, -depending on the sort of entry. More specifically, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{editor} with the most -comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if there is -one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title}, if the -other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is exactly -the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters, -plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are -numerous cases that require, for example, an additional editor for one -part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work. For -these cases I have provided the \textsf{namea} field. You should -format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or -\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the -\textsf{title} (donne:var:15). - -\mylittlespace As you will see below, I have also provided a -\textsf{nameb} field, which holds the translator of a given -\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If \textsf{namea} and -\textsf{nameb} are the same, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will -concatenate them, just as \textsf{biblatex} already does for -\textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the -compiler). Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will -need separate editors for each of the three sorts of title. For this, -and for various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{partedit} -macro (and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note} -field, in one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields, or even in a -\textsf{number} field (howell:marriage). (Because the strings -identifying an editor differ in notes and bibliography, one can't -simply write them out in such a field when using the notes \&\ -bibliography style, but you can certainly do so in the author-date -style, if you wish. Using the macros will make your .bib file more -portable across both Chicago specifications, and also across multiple -languages, but they are otherwise unnecessary. -Cf. section~\ref{sec:international}, and also \textsf{namea}, -\textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, and \textsf{translator}.) - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{editora\\editorb\\editorc}} newer -releases of \textsf{biblatex} provide these fields as a means to -specify additional contributors to texts in a number of editorial -roles. In the Chicago styles they seem most relevant for the -audiovisual types, especially \textsf{music} and \textsf{video}, where -they help to identify conductors, directors, producers, and -performers. To specify the role, use the fields \textsf{editoratype}, -\textsf{editorbtype}, and \textsf{editorctype}, which see. (Cf.\ -bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah:15.) - -\mybigspace Normally, \mymarginpar{\textbf{editortype}} with the -exception of the \textsf{article} type, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will automatically find a name to -put at the head of an entry, starting with an \textsf{author}, and -proceeding in order through \textsf{editor}, \textsf{translator}, and -\textsf{namec} (the compiler). If all four are missing, then the -\textsf{title} will be placed at the head. (In \textsf{article} -entries with a \texttt{magazine} \textsf{entrysubtype}, a missing -author immediately prompts the use of \textsf{journaltitle} at the -head of an entry. See above under \textsf{article} for details.) The -\textsf{editortype} field provides even greater flexibility, allowing -you to choose from a variety of editorial roles while only using the -\textsf{editor} field. You can do this even though an author is named -(eliot:pound shows this mechanism in action for a standard editor, -rather than a compiler). Two things are necessary for this to happen. -First, in the \textsf{options} field you need to set -\texttt{useauthor=false} (if there is an \textsf{author)}, then you -need to put the name you wish to see at the head of your entry into -the \textsf{editor} or the \textsf{namea} field. If the -\enquote{editor} is in fact a compiler, then you need to put -\texttt{compiler} into the \textsf{editortype} field, and -\textsf{biblatex} will print the correct string after the name in the -list of references. - -\mylittlespace There are a few details of which you need to be aware. -Because \textsf{biblatex-chicago} has added the \textsf{namea} field, -which gives you the ability to identify the editor specifically of a -\textsf{title} as opposed to a \textsf{maintitle} or a -\textsf{booktitle}, the \textsf{editortype} mechanism checks first to -see whether a \textsf{namea} is defined. If it is, that name will be -used at the head of the entry, if it isn't it will go ahead and look -for an \textsf{editor}. \textsf{Biblatex}'s sorting algorithms, and -also its \textsf{labelname} mechanism, should both work properly no -matter sort of name you provide, thanks to \textsf{Biber} and the -(default) Chicago-specific definitions of \cmd{DeclareLabelname} and -\cmd{DeclareSortingScheme}. (Cf.\ section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, -below). If, however, the \textsf{namea} field provides the name, and -that name isn't automatically shortened properly by \textsf{biblatex}, -then your .bib entry will need to have a \textsf{shorteditor} defined -to help with in-text citations, not a \textsf{shortauthor}, possibly -ruled out because \texttt{useauthor=false}. - -\mylittlespace In \textsf{biblatex} 0.9 Lehman has reworked the string -concatenation mechanism, for reasons he outlines in his RELEASE file, -and I have followed his lead. In short, if you define the -\textsf{editortype} field, then concatenation is turned off, even if -the name of the \textsf{editor} matches, for example, that of the -\textsf{translator}. In the absence of an \textsf{editortype}, the -usual mechanisms remain in place, that is, if the \textsf{editor} -exactly matches a \textsf{translator} and/or a \textsf{namec}, or -alternatively if \textsf{namea} exactly matches a \textsf{nameb} -and/or a \textsf{namec}, then \textsf{biblatex} will print the -appropriate strings. The \emph{Manual} specifically (17.41) -recommends not using these identifying strings in citations, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} follows that recommendation. If -you nevertheless need to provide such a string, you'll have to do it -manually in the \textsf{shorteditor} field, or perhaps, in a different -sort of entry, in a \textsf{shortauthor} field. - -\mylittlespace It may also be worth noting that because of certain -requirements in the specification -- absence of an \textsf{author}, -for example -- the \texttt{useauthor} mechanism won't work properly in -the following entry types: \textsf{collection}, \textsf{letter}, -\textsf{patent}, \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings}, -\textsf{suppbook}, \textsf{suppcollection}, and -\textsf{suppperiodical}. - -\mybigspace These -\mymarginpar{\textbf{editoratype\\editorbtype\\editorctype}} fields -identify the exact role of the person named in the corresponding -\textsf{editor[a-c]} field. Note that they are not part of the string -concatenation mechanism. I have implemented them just as the standard -styles do, and they have now found a use particularly in -\textsf{music} and \textsf{video} entries. Cf.\ -bernstein:shostakovich, handel:messiah:15. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{eid}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, providing a string or number some journals use uniquely to -identify a particular article. Only applicable to the -\textsf{article} entry type. Not typically required by the -\emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{entrysubtype}} and very -powerful \textsf{biblatex} field, left undefined by the standard -styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} it has five very -specific uses, the first three of which I have designed in order to -maintain, as much as possible, backward compatibility with the -standard styles. First, in \textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} -entries, the field allows you to differentiate between scholarly -\enquote{journals,} on the one hand, and \enquote{magazines} and -\enquote{newspapers} on the other. Usage is fairly simple: you need -to put the exact string \texttt{magazine} into the -\textsf{entrysubtype} field if you are citing one of the latter two -types of source, whereas if your source is a \enquote{journal,} then -you need do nothing. - -\mylittlespace The second use involves references to works from -classical antiquity and, according to the \emph{Manual}, from the -Middle Ages, as well. When you cite such a work using the traditional -divisions into books, sections, lines, etc., divisions which are -presumed to be the same across all editions, then you need to put the -exact string \texttt{classical} into the \textsf{entrysubtype} field. -This has no effect in the list of references, which will still present -the particular edition you are using, but it does affect the -formatting of in-text citations, in two ways. First, it suppresses -some of the punctuation. Second, and more importantly, it suppresses -the \textsf{date} field in favor of the \textsf{title}, so that -citations look like (Aristotle \emph{Metaphysics} 3.2.996b5--8) -instead of (Aristotle 1997, 3.2.996b5--8). This mechanism may also -prove useful in \textsf{misc} entries for citations from the Bible or -other sacred texts (cf.\ genesis), and for citing archival collections -(house:papers), where it produces citations of the form (House -Papers). (Cf.\ the next but one paragraph.) - -\mylittlespace If you wish to reference a classical or medieval work -by the page numbers of a particular, non-standard edition, then you -shouldn't use the \texttt{classical} \textsf{entrysubtype} toggle. -Also, and the specification isn't entirely clear about this, works -from the Renaissance and later, even if cited by the traditional -divisions, seem to have citations formatted normally, and therefore -don't need an \textsf{entrysubtype} field. (See \emph{Manual} -17.246--262; aristotle:metaphy:gr, plato:republic:gr; -euripides:orestes is an example of a translation cited by page number -in a modern edition.) - -\mylittlespace The third use of the \textsf{entrysubtype} field occurs -in \textsf{misc} entries. If such an entry contains no such field, -then the citation will be treated just as the standard -\textsf{biblatex} styles would, including the use of italics for the -\textsf{title}. Any string at all in \textsf{entrysubtype} tells -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} to treat the source as part of an -unpublished archive. Please see section~\ref{sec:types:authdate} -above under \textbf{misc} for all the details on how these citations -work. - -\mylittlespace Fourth, the field can be defined in the -\textsf{artwork} entry type in order to refer to a work from antiquity -whose title you do not wish to be italicized. Please see the -documentation of \textsf{artwork} above for the details. Fifth, and -finally, you can use the exact string \texttt{tv} to identify -televisual material as a subset of the \textsf{video} entry type. -This will only affect the entry in the list of references if you use -\texttt{reprint} in the \textsf{pubstate} field in order to print -the date a program was originally shown in parentheses at the end of -such an entry. (It's a niche usage but it at least maintains -consistency for the \texttt{reprint} mechanism. Cf.\ -\textsf{pubstate}, below.) - -\mybigspace Kazuo -\colmarginpar{\textbf{eprint}\\\textbf{eprintclass}\\\textbf{eprinttype}} -Teramoto suggested adding \textsf{biblatex's} excellent -\textsf{eprint} handling to \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, and he sent me -a patch implementing it. With minor alterations, I have applied it to -this release, so these three fields now work more or less as they do -in standard \textsf{biblatex}. They may prove helpful in providing -more abbreviated references to online content than conventional URLs, -though I can find no specific reference to them in the \emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{eventdate}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, added recently to the \textbf{music} entry -type in case users need it to identify a particular recording session -or concert. See the documentation of that type above. In the default -configuration of \cmd{DeclareLabel\-year}, an entry missing a -\textsf{date} will use the \textsf{eventdate} to find a year for the -citation and list of references, though the rest of the field would in -such a case be ignored in any entry other than \textsf{music}. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{foreword}} with the -\textsf{afterword} field above, \textsf{foreword} will in general -function as it does in standard \textsf{biblatex}. Like -\textsf{afterword} (and \textsf{introduction}), however, it has a -special meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to -define it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and -\textsf{introduction} undefined) to make a foreword the focus of a -citation. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{holder}} standard \textsf{biblatex} -field for identifying a \textsf{patent}'s holder(s), if they differ -from the \textsf{author}. The \emph{Manual} has nothing to say on the -subject, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago} prints it (them), in -parentheses, just after the author(s). - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{howpublished}} -\textsf{biblatex} field, mainly applicable in the \textsf{booklet} -entry type, where it replaces the \textsf{publisher}. I have also -retained it in the \textsf{misc} and \textsf{unpublished} entry types, -for historical reasons, and either it or \textsf{pubstate} can be used -in \textsf{music} entries to clarify publication details. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{institution}} -\textsf{biblatex} field. In the \textsf{thesis} entry type, it will -usually identify the university for which the thesis was written, -while in a \textsf{report} entry it may identify any sort of -institution issuing the report. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{introduction}} with the -\textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword} fields above, -\textsf{introduction} will in general function as it does in standard -\textsf{biblatex}. Like those fields, however, it has a special -meaning in a \textsf{suppbook} entry, where you simply need to define -it somehow (and leave \textsf{afterword} and \textsf{foreword} -undefined) to make an introduction the focus of a citation. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isbn}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, for providing the International Standard Book Number of a -publication. Not typically required by the \emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{isrn}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, for providing the International Standard Technical Report -Number of a report. Only relevant to the \textsf{report} entry type, -and not typically required by the \emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issn}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, for providing the International Standard Serial Number of a -periodical in an \textsf{article} or a \textsf{periodical} entry. Not -typically required by the \emph{Manual}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issue}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, designed for \textsf{article} or \textsf{periodical} entries -identified by something like \enquote{Spring} or \enquote{Summer} -rather than by the usual \textsf{month} or \textsf{number} fields -(brown:bremer). - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuesubtitle}} subtitle for an -\textsf{issuetitle} --- see next entry. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{issuetitle}} -\textsf{biblatex} field, intended to contain the title of a special -issue of any sort of periodical. If the reference is to one article -within the special issue, then this field should be used in an -\textsf{article} entry (conley:fifthgrade), whereas if you are citing -the entire issue as a whole, then it would go in a \textsf{periodical} -entry, instead (good:wholeissue). The \textsf{note} field is the -proper place to identify the type of issue, e.g.,\ \texttt{special - issue}, with the initial letter lower-cased to enable automatic -contextual capitalization. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{journalsubtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{journaltitle} --- see next entry. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{journaltitle}} -\textsf{biblatex} field, replacing the standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -field \textsf{journal}, which, however, still works as an alias. It -contains the name of any sort of periodical publication, and is found -in the \textsf{article} entry type. In the case where a piece in an -\textsf{article} (\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}) doesn't -have an author, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} provides for this field to -be used as the author. See above (section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate}) -under \textbf{article} for details. The lakeforester:pushcarts and -nyt:trevorobit entries in \textsf{dates-test.bib} will give you some -idea of how this works. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{keywords}} field is -\textsf{biblatex}'s extremely powerful and flexible technique for -filtering entries in a list of references, allowing you to subdivide -it according to just about any criteria you care to invent. See -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} (3.10.4) for thorough documentation. In -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, the field provides one convenient means to -exclude certain entries from making their way into a list of -references, though the toggle \texttt{skipbib} in the \textsf{options} -field works just as well, and perhaps more simply. There are a few -reasons for so excluding entries. When citing both an original text -and its translation (see \textbf{userf}, below), the \emph{Manual} -(17.66) suggests including the original at the end of the -translation's reference list entry, a procedure which requires that -the original not also be printed as a separate entry -(furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr, aristotle:metaphy:trans, -aristotle:metaphy:gr). Well-known reference works (like the -\emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, for example) and many sacred texts -need only be presented in citations, and not in the list of references -(17.238--239; ency:britannica, genesis, wikiped:bibtex; see -\textsf{inreference} and \textsf{misc}, above). - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{language}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify the -language(s) in which a work is written. As a general rule, the -Chicago style doesn't require you to provide this information, though -it may well be useful for clarifying the nature of certain works, such -as bilingual editions, for example. There is at least one situation, -however, when the \emph{Manual} does specify this data, and that is -when the title of a work is given in translation, even though no -translation of the work has been published, something that might -happen when a title is in a language deemed to be unparseable by a -majority of your expected readership (17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177; -chu:panda, pirumova, rozner:liberation). In such a case, you should -provide the language(s) involved using this field, connecting multiple -languages using the keyword \texttt{and}. (I have retained -\textsf{biblatex's} \cmd{bibstring} mechanism here, which means that -you can use the standard bibstrings or, if one doesn't exist for the -language you need, just give the name of the language, capitalized as -it should appear in your text. You can also mix these two modes -inside one entry without apparent harm.) - -\mylittlespace An alternative arrangement suggested by the -\emph{Manual} is to retain the original title of a piece but then to -provide its translation, as well. If you choose this option, you'll -need to make use of the \textbf{usere} field, on which see below. In -effect, you'll probably only ever need to use one of these two fields -in any given entry, and in fact \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will only -print one of them if both are present, preferring \textsf{usere} over -\textsf{language} for this purpose (see kern, pirumova:russian, and -weresz). Note also that both of these fields are universally -associated with the \textsf{title} of a work, rather than with a -\textsf{booktitle} or a \textsf{maintitle}. If you need to attach a -language or a translation to either of the latter two, you could -probably manage it with special formatting inside those fields -themselves. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{lista}} intend this field -specifically for presenting citations from reference works that are -arranged alphabetically, where the name of the article rather than a -page or volume number should be given. The field is a -\textsf{biblatex} list, which means you should separate multiple items -with the keyword \texttt{and}. Each item receives its own set of -quotation marks, and the whole list will be prefixed by the -appropriate string (\enquote{s.v.,} \emph{sub verbo}, pl.\ -\enquote{s.vv.}). \textsf{Biblatex-chicago} will only print such a -field in a \textsf{book} or an \textsf{inreference} entry, and you -should look at the documentation of these entry types for further -details. (See \emph{Manual} 17.238--239; grove:sibelius, times:guide, -wikiped:bibtex.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{location}} is -\textsf{biblatex}'s version of the usual \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ field -\textsf{address}, though the latter is accepted as an alias if that -simplifies the modification of older .bib files. According to the -\emph{Manual} (17.99), a citation usually need only provide the first -city listed on any title page, though a list of cities separated by -the keyword \enquote{\texttt{and}} will be formatted appropriately. -If the place of publication is unknown, you can use -\cmd{autocap\{n\}.p.}\ instead (17.102), though in many or even most -cases this isn't strictly necessary (17.32--34; -virginia:plantation:15). For all cities, you should use the common -English version of the name, if such exists (17.101). - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace One other use needs explanation here. In -\textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} entries, there is usually no -need for a \textsf{location} field, but \enquote{if a journal might be - confused with another with a similar title, or if it might not be - known to the users of a bibliography,} then this field can present -the place or institution where it is published (17.174, 17.196; -garrett:15, kimluu:diethyl:15, and lakeforester:pushcarts). - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{mainsubtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{maintitle} --- see next entry. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitle}} main title for a -multi-volume work, e.g., \enquote{Opera} or \enquote{Collected Works.} -It takes sentence-style capitalization in author-date. (See -donne:var:15, euripides:\-orestes, harley:cartography, lach:asia, -pelikan:chris\-tian, and plato:republic:gr.) - -\mybigspace An \mymarginpar{\textbf{maintitleaddon}} annex to the -\textsf{maintitle}, for which see previous entry. Such an annex would -be printed in the main text font. If your data begins with a word -that would ordinarily only be capitalized at the beginning of a -sentence, then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{month}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, containing the month of publication. This should be an -integer, i.e., \texttt{month=\{3\}} not \texttt{month=\{March\}}. See -\textsf{date} for more information. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{namea}} is one of the fields -\textsf{biblatex} provides for style writers to use, but which it -leaves undefined itself. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago} it contains the -name(s) of the editor(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a -\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation -the \textsf{editor} would be associated with one of these latter -fields (donne:var:15). You should present names in this field exactly -as you would those in an \textsf{author} or \textsf{editor} field, and -the package will concatenate this field with \textsf{nameb} if they -are identical. See under \textbf{editor} above for the full details. -Cf.\ also \textsf{nameb}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{translator}, and the -macros \cmd{partedit}, \cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans}, -\cmd{partcomp}, \cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and -\cmd{partedittransand\-comp}, for which see -section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate}. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameaddon}} field is provided by -\textsf{biblatex}, though not used by the standard styles. In -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it allows you to specify that an author's -name is a pseudo\-nym, or to provide either the real name or the -pseudonym itself, if the other is being provided in the -\textsf{author} field. The abbreviation -\enquote{\texttt{pseud.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ (always lowercase in English) -is specified, either on its own or after the pseudonym -(centinel:letters, creasey:ashe:blast, creasey:morton:hide, -creasey:york:death, and le\-carre:quest); \cmd{bibstring\{pseudonym\}} -does the work for you. See under \textbf{author} above for the full -details. - -\mylittlespace In the \textsf{customc} entry type, on the other hand, -which is used to create alphabetized expansions of -\textsf{shorthands}, the \textsf{nameaddon} field allows you to change -the default string linking the two parts of the expansion. The code -automatically tests for a known bibstring, which it will italicize. -Otherwise, it prints the string as is. - -\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{nameb}} \textsf{namea}, above, -this is a field left undefined by the standard \textsf{biblatex} -styles. In \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, it contains the name(s) of the -translator(s) of a \textsf{title}, if the entry has a -\textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, or both, in which situation -the \textsf{translator} would be associated with one of these latter -fields (euripides:orestes). You should present names in this field -exactly as you would those in an \textsf{author} or -\textsf{translator} field, and the package will concatenate this field -with \textsf{namea} if they are identical. See under the -\textbf{translator} field below for the full details. Cf.\ also -\textsf{namea}, \textsf{namec}, \textsf{origlanguage}, -\textsf{translator}, \textsf{userf} and the macros \cmd{partedit}, -\cmd{parttrans}, \cmd{parteditandtrans}, \cmd{partcomp}, -\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and -\cmd{partedittransandcomp} in section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate}. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{namec}} \emph{Manual} (17.41) -specifies that works without an author may be listed under an editor, -translator, or compiler, assuming that one is available, and it also -specifies the strings to be used with the name(s) of compiler(s). All -this suggests that the \emph{Manual} considers this to be standard -information that should be made available in a bibliographic -reference, so I have added that possibility to the many that -\textsf{biblatex} already provides, such as the \textsf{editor}, -\textsf{translator}, \textsf{commentator}, \textsf{annotator}, and -\textsf{redactor}, along with writers of an \textsf{introduction}, -\textsf{foreword}, or \textsf{afterword}. Since \textsf{biblatex.bst} -doesn't offer a \textsf{compiler} field, I have adopted for this -purpose the otherwise unused field \textsf{namec}. It is important to -understand that, despite the analogous name, this field does not -function like \textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb}, but rather like -\textsf{editor} or \textsf{translator}, and therefore if used will be -associated with whichever title field these latter two would be were -they present in the same entry. Identical fields among these three -will be concatenated by the package, and concatenated too with the -(usually) unnecessary commentator, annotator and the rest. Also -please note that I've arranged the concatenation algorithms to include -\textsf{namec} in the same test as \textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb}, -so in this particular circumstance you can, if needed, make -\textsf{namec} analogous to these two latter, \textsf{title}-only -fields. (See above under \textbf{editortype} for details of how you -can use that field to identify a compiler.) - -\mylittlespace It might conceivably be necessary at some point to -identify the compiler(s) of a \textsf{title} separate from the -compiler(s) of a \textsf{booktitle} or \textsf{maintitle}, but for the -moment I've run out of available \textsf{name} fields, so you'll have -to fall back on the \cmd{partcomp} macro or the related -\cmd{parteditandcomp}, \cmd{parttransandcomp}, and -\cmd{partedittransandcomp}, on which see Commands -(section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate}) below. (Future releases may -be able to remedy this.) It may be as well to mention here too that -of the three names that can be substituted for the missing -\textsf{author} at the head of an entry, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -will choose an \textsf{editor} if present, then a \textsf{translator} -if present, falling back to \textsf{namec} only in the absence of the -other two, and assuming that the fields aren't identical, and -therefore to be concatenated. In a change from the previous behavior, -these algorithms also now test for \textsf{namea} or \textsf{nameb}, -which will be used instead of \textsf{editor} and \textsf{translator}, -respectively, giving the package the greatest likelihood of finding a -name to place at the head of an entry. \textsf{Biblatex}'s sorting -algorithms, and also its \textsf{labelname} mechanism, should both -work properly no matter sort of name you provide, thanks to -\textsf{Biber} and the (default) Chicago-specific definitions of -\cmd{DeclareLabelname} and \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme}. (Cf.\ -section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below). - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{note}} in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, this field allows you to provide bibliographic data -that doesn't easily fit into any other field. In this sense, it's -very like \textsf{addendum}, but the information provided here will be -printed just before the publication data. (See chaucer:alt, -cook:sotweed, emerson:nature, and rodman:walk for examples of this -usage in action.) It also has a specialized use in the periodical -types (\textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical}), where it holds -supplemental information about a \textsf{journaltitle}, such as -\enquote{special issue} (conley:fifthgrade, good:wholeissue). In all -uses, if your data begins with a word that would ordinarily only be -capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then simply ensure that -that word is in lowercase, and \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will -automatically do the right thing. Cf.\ \textsf{addendum}. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{number}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, containing the number of a -\textsf{journaltitle} in an \textsf{article} entry, the number of a -\textsf{title} in a \textsf{periodical} entry, or the volume/number of -a book in a \textsf{series}. Generally, in an \textsf{article} or -\textsf{periodical} entry, this will be a plain cardinal number, but -in such entries \textsf{biblatex-chicago} now does the right thing if -you have a list or range of numbers (unsigned:ranke). In any -\textsf{book}-like entry it may well contain considerably more -information, including even a reference to \enquote{2nd ser.,} for -example, while the \textsf{series} field in such an entry will contain -the name of the series, rather than a number. This field is also the -place for the patent number in a \textsf{patent} entry. Cf.\ -\textsf{issue} and \textsf{series}. (See \emph{Manual} 17.90--95 and -boxer:china, palmatary:pottery, wauchope:ceramics; 17.163 and -beattie:crime, conley:fifthgrade, friedman:learning, garrett:15, -gibbard:15, hlatky:hrt, mcmillen:antebellum, rozner:liberation, -warr:ellison.) - -\mylittlespace \textbf{NB}: This may be an opportune place to point -out that the \emph{Manual} (17.129) prefers arabic to roman numerals -in most circumstances (chapters, volumes, series numbers, etc.), even -when such numbers might be roman in the work cited. The obvious -exception is page numbers, in which roman numerals indicate that the -citation came from the front matter, and should therefore be retained. -Another possible exception is in references to works \enquote{with - many and complex divisions,} in which \enquote{a mixture of roman - and arabic} may be \enquote{easier to disentangle.} - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{options}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, for setting certain options on a per-entry -basis rather than globally. Information about some of the more common -options may be found above under \textsf{author} and \textsf{date}, -and below in section~\ref{sec:authuseropts}. See creel:house, -eliot:pound, emerson:nature, ency:britannica, herwign:office, -lecarre:quest, and maitland:canon for examples of the field in use. - -% \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{organization}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, retained mainly for use in the \textsf{misc}, -\textsf{online}, and \textsf{manual} entry types, where it may be of -use to specify a publishing body that might not easily fit in other -categories. In \textsf{biblatex}, it is also used to identify the -organization sponsoring a conference in a \textsf{proceedings} or -\textsf{inproceedings} entry, and I have retained this as a -possibility, though the \emph{Manual} is silent on the matter. - -\mybigspace This \colmarginpar{\textbf{origdate}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field which replaced the obsolete \textsf{origyear}, -and which therefore allows more than one full date specification for -those references which need to provide more than just one. As with -the analogous \textsf{date} field, you provide the date (or range of -dates) in \textsc{iso}8601 format, i.e., \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}. In most -entry types, you would use \textsf{origdate} to provide the date of -first publication of a work, most usually needed only in the case of -reprint editions, but also recommended by the \emph{Manual} for -electronic editions of older works (17.123, 17.146--7; -aristotle:metaphy:gr, emerson:nature, james:ambassadors, -schweitzer:bach). In both the \textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc} (with -\textsf{entrysubtype)} entry types, the \textsf{origdate} identifies -when a letter (or similar) was written. In such \textsf{misc} -entries, some \enquote{non-letter-like} materials (like interviews) -need the \textsf{date} field for this purpose, while in -\textsf{letter} entries the \textsf{date} applies to the publication -of the whole collection. If such a published collection were itself a -reprint, judicious use of the \textsf{pubstate} field or perhaps -improvisation in the \textsf{location} field might be able to rescue -the situation. (See white:ross:memo, white:russ, and white:total for -how \textsf{letter} entries can work; creel:house shows the field in -action in a \textsf{misc} entry, while spock:interview uses -\textsf{date} instead.) - -\mylittlespace Because of the importance of date specifications in the -author-date style, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} provides a -series of options and automated behaviors to allow you to emphasize -the \textsf{origdate} in citations and at the head of entries in the -list of references. In entries which have \emph{only} an -\textsf{origdate} --- usually \textsf{misc} with an -\textsf{entrysubtype} --- \textsf{Biber} and the default -\cmd{DeclareLabelyear} configuration now make it possible to do -without a \texttt{cmsdate} option, as the \textsf{origdate} will -automatically appear where and as it should. In entries with both -dates you have a choice of which appears where. In some cases it may -even be necessary to reverse the two date fields, putting the earlier -year in \textsf{date} and the later in \textsf{origdate}. Please see -above under \textbf{date} for all the details on how these options -interact. - -\mylittlespace Because the \textsf{origdate} field only accepts -numbers, some improvisation may be needed if you wish to include -\enquote{n.d.}\ (\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}) in an entry. In -\textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc}, this information can be placed in -\textsf{titleaddon}, but in other entry types you may need to use the -\textsf{location} field. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{origlanguage}} keeping with the -\emph{Manual}'s specifications, I have fairly thoroughly redefined -\textsf{biblatex}'s facilities for treating translations. The -\textsf{origtitle} field isn't used, while the \textsf{language} and -\textsf{origdate} fields have been press-ganged for other duties. The -\textsf{origlanguage} field, for its part, retains a dual role in -presenting translations in a list of references. The details of the -\emph{Manual}'s suggested treatment when both a translation and an -original are cited may be found below under \textbf{userf}. Here, -however, I simply note that the introductory string used to connect -the translation's citation with the original's is \enquote{Originally - published as,} which I suggest may well be inaccurate in a great -many cases, as for instance when citing a work from classical -antiquity, which will most certainly not \enquote{originally} have -been published in the Loeb Classical Library. Although not, strictly -speaking, authorized by the \emph{Manual}, I have provided another way -to introduce the original text, using the \textsf{origlanguage} field, -which must be provided \emph{in the entry for the translation, not the - original text} (aristotle:metaphy:trans). If you put one of the -standard \textsf{biblatex} bibstrings there (enumerated below), then -the entry will work properly across multiple languages. Otherwise, -just put the name of the language there, localized as necessary, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will eschew \enquote{Originally published - as} in favor of, e.g., \enquote{Greek edition:} or \enquote{French - edition:}. This has no effect in citations, where only the work -cited --- original or translation --- will be printed, but it may help -to make the \emph{Manual}'s suggestions for the list of references -more palatable. - -\mylittlespace That was the first usage, in keeping at least with the -spirit of the \emph{Manual}. I have also, perhaps less in keeping -with that specification, retained some of \textsf{biblatex}'s -functionality for this field. If an entry doesn't have a -\textsf{userf} field, and therefore won't be combining a text and its -translation in the list of references, you can also use -\textsf{origlanguage} as Lehman intended it, so that instead of -saying, e.g., \enquote{translated by X,} the entry will read -\enquote{translated from the German by X.} The \emph{Manual} doesn't -mention this, but it may conceivably help avoid certain ambiguities in -some citations. As in \textsf{biblatex}, if you wish to use this -functionality, you have to provide \emph{not} the name of the -language, but rather a bibstring, which may, at the time of writing, -be one of \texttt{american}, \texttt{brazilian}, \texttt{danish}, -\texttt{dutch}, \texttt{english}, \texttt{french}, \texttt{german}, -\texttt{greek}, \texttt{italian}, \texttt{latin}, \texttt{norwegian}, -\texttt{portuguese}, \texttt{spanish}, or \texttt{swedish}, to which -I've added \texttt{russian}. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace At \colmarginpar{\textbf{origlocation}} least one notes -\&\ bibliography example in the \emph{Manual} provides a more complete -specification of a reprinted book's original publication details than -has been possible using previous releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -(17.123). It seems reasonable to include this in the author-date -style, as well, so starting with this release, you can provide both an -\textsf{origlocation} and an \textsf{origpublisher} to go along with -the \textsf{origdate}, should you so wish, and all of this information -will be printed in the reference list. You can now also use this -field in a \textsf{letter} or \textsf{misc} (with -\textsf{entrysubtype}) entry to give the place where a published or -unpublished letter was written (17.76). (Jonathan Robinson has -suggested that the \textsf{origlocation} may in some circumstances -actually be necessary for disambiguation, his example being early -printed editions of the same material printed in the same year but in -different cities. The new functionality should make this simple to -achieve. Cf.\ \textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origpublisher} and -\textsf{pubstate}; schweitzer:bach.) - -\mybigspace As \colmarginpar{\textbf{origpublisher}} with the -\textsf{origlocation} field just above, this new field allows you to -provide fuller original publication details for reprinted books. You -can now provide an \textsf{origpublisher} and/or an -\textsf{origlocation} in addition to the \textsf{origdate}, and all -will be presented in long notes and bibliography. (Cf.\ -\textsf{origdate}, \textsf{origlocation}, and \textsf{pubstate}; -schweitzer:bach.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{origyear}} field is, as of -\textsf{biblatex} 0.9, obsolete. It is ignored if it appears in a -.bib file. Please use \textsf{origdate} instead. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{pages}} is the standard -\textsf{biblatex} field for providing page references. In many -\textsf{article} entries you'll find this contains something other -than a page number, e.g. a section name or edition specification -(17.188, 17.191, 17.202; kozinn:review, nyt:trevorobit). Of course, -the same may be true of almost any sort of entry, though perhaps with -less frequency. Curious readers may wish to look at brown:bremer -(17.172) for an example of a \textsf{pages} field used to facilitate -reference to a two-part journal article. Cf.\ \textsf{number} for -more information on the \emph{Manual}'s preferences regarding the -formatting of numerals; \textsf{bookpagination} and -\textsf{pagination} provide details about \textsf{biblatex's} -mechanisms for specifying what sort of division a given \textsf{pages} -field contains; and \textsf{usera} discusses a different way to -present the section information pertaining to a newspaper article. - -\mybigspace This, \mymarginpar{\textbf{pagination}} a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, allows you automatically to prefix the -appropriate identifying string to information you provide in the -\textsf{postnote} field of a citation command, whereas -\textsf{bookpagination} allows you to prefix a string to the -\textsf{pages} field. Please see \textbf{bookpagination} above for -all the details on this functionality, as aside from the difference -just mentioned the two fields are equivalent. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{part}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, which identifies physical parts of a single logical volume in -\textsf{book}-like entries, not in periodicals. It has the same -purpose in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, but because the \emph{Manual} -(17.88) calls such a thing a \enquote{book} and not a \enquote{part,} -the string printed in the list of references will, at least in -English, be \enquote{\texttt{bk.}\hspace{-2pt}}\ instead of the plain -dot between volume number and part number (harley:cartography, -lach:asia). This field should only be used in association with a -\textsf{volume} number, so if you need to identify \enquote{parts} or -\enquote{books} that are part of a published \textsf{series}, for -example, then you'll need to use a different field, (which in the case -of a series would be \textsf{number} [palmatary:pottery]). Cf.\ -\textsf{volume}; iso:electrodoc:15. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{publisher}} -\textsf{biblatex} field. Remember that \enquote{\texttt{and}} is a -keyword for connecting multiple publishers, so if a publisher's name -contains \enquote{and,} then you should either use the ampersand (\&) -or enclose the whole name in additional braces. (See \emph{Manual} -17.103--114; aristotle:metaphy:gr, cohen:schiff, creasey:ashe:blast, -dunn:revolutions.) - -\mylittlespace There are, as one might expect, a couple of further -subtleties involved here. Ordinarily, two publishers will be -separated by a forward slash in the list of references, but if a -company issues \enquote{certain books through a special publishing - division or under a special imprint,} then the two names will be -separated by a comma, which you will need to provide in the -\textsf{publisher} field. The \emph{Manual}'s example (17.112) is -\enquote{\texttt{Ohio University Press, Swallow Press},} which would -cause \textsf{biblatex-chicago} no problems. If a book has two -co-publishers, \enquote{usually in different countries,} (17.113) then -the simplest thing to do is to choose one, probably the nearest one -geographically. If you feel it necessary to include both, then -levistrauss:savage demonstrates one way of doing so, using a -combination of the \textsf{publisher} and \textsf{location} fields. -Finally, if the publisher is unknown, then the \emph{Manual} -recommends (17.109) simply using the place (if known) and the date. -If for some reason you need to indicate the absence of a publisher, -the abbreviation given by the \emph{Manual} is \texttt{n.p.}, though -this can also stand for \enquote{no place.} Some style guides -apparently suggest using \texttt{s.n.}\,(= \emph{sine nomine}) to -specify the lack of a publisher, but the \emph{Manual} doesn't mention -this. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{pubstate}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, new to version 0.9. Because the author-date -specification has fairly complicated rules about presenting reprinted -editions, I have adopted this field as a means of simplifying the -problem for users. Instead of hand-formatting in the -\textsf{location} field, you can now simply put the string -\texttt{reprint} into the \textsf{pubstate} field, and depending on -which date you have chosen to appear at the head of the entry, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will either print the (localized) -string \texttt{Repr.}\ in the proper place or otherwise provide a -parenthesized notice at the end of the entry detailing the original -publication date. See under \textbf{date} above for the available -permutations. (Cf.\ aristotle:metaphy:gr, maitland:canon, -maitland:equity, schweitzer:bach.) If the field contains something -other than the word \texttt{reprint}, then it will be treated as in -the standard styles, and printed after the publication information. -In \textsf{music} entries, its literal contents will always be printed -as part of the publication data. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{redactor}} have implemented this -field just as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, even though the -\emph{Manual} doesn't actually mention it. It may be useful for some -purposes. Cf.\ \textsf{annotator} and \textsf{commentator}. - -\mybigspace \textbf{NB:} \mymarginpar{\textbf{reprinttitle}} -\textbf{Please note that this feature is in an alpha state, and that - I'm contemplating using a different field in the future for this - functionality. I include it here in the hope that it might receive - some testing in the meantime.} At the request of Will Small, I have -included a means of providing the original publication details of an -essay or a chapter that you are citing from a subsequent reprint, -e.g., a \emph{Collected Essays} volume. In such a case, at least -according to the \emph{Manual} (17.73), such details need be provided -only if they are \enquote{of particular interest.} The data would -follow an introductory phrase like \enquote{originally published as,} -making the problem strictly parallel to that of including details of a -work in the original language alongside the details of its -translation. I have addressed the latter problem with the -\textsf{userf} field, which provides a sort of cross-referencing -method for this purpose, and \textsf{reprinttitle} works in -\emph{exactly} the same way. In the .bib entry for the reprint you -include a cross-reference to the cite key of the original location -using the \textsf{reprinttitle} field (which it may help mnemonically -to think of as a \enquote{reprinted title} field). The main -difference between the two forms is that \textsf{userf} prints all but -the \textsf{author} of the original work, whereas -\textsf{reprinttitle} suppresses both the \textsf{author} and the -\textsf{title} of the original, giving only the more general details, -beginning with, e.g., the \textsf{journaltitle} or \textsf{booktitle} -and continuing from there. The string prefacing this information will -be \enquote{Orig.\ pub.\ in.} Please see the documentation on -\textsf{userf} below for all the details on how to create .bib entries -for presenting your data. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{series}} standard \textsf{biblatex} -field, usually just a number in an \textsf{article}, -\textsf{periodical}, or \textsf{review} entry, almost always the name -of a publication series in \textsf{book}-like entries. If you need to -attach further information to the \textsf{series} name in a -\textsf{book}-like entry, then the \textsf{number} field is the place -for it, whether it be a volume, a number, or even something like -\enquote{2nd ser.} or \enquote{\cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}.} Of -course, you can also use \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}} or -\cmd{bibstring\{newseries\}} in an \textsf{article} entry, but there -you would place it in the \textsf{series} field itself. (In fact, the -\textsf{series} field in \textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} -entries is one of the places where \textsf{biblatex} allows you just -to use the plain bibstring \texttt{oldseries}, for example, rather -than making you type \cmd{bibstring\{oldseries\}}. The \textsf{type} -field in \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, and -\textsf{thesis} entries also has this auto-detection mechanism in -place; see the discussion of \cmd{bibstring} below for details.) In -whatever entry type, these bibstrings produce the required -abbreviation. (For books and similar entries, see \emph{Manual} -17.90--95; boxer:china, browning:aurora, palmatary:pottery, -plato:republic:gr, wauchope:ceramics; for periodicals, see 17.178; -garaud:gatine, sewall:letter.) Cf.\ \textsf{number} for more -information on the \emph{Manual}'s preferences regarding the -formatting of numerals. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shortauthor}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, but \textsf{biblatex-chicago} makes -considerably grea\-ter use of it than the standard styles. For the -purposes of the author-date specification, the field provides the name -to be used in text citations. In the vast majority of cases, you -don't need to specify it, because the \textsf{biblatex} system selects -the author's last name from the \textsf{author} field and uses it in -such a reference, and if there is no \textsf{author} it will search -\textsf{namea}, \textsf{editor}, \textsf{nameb}, \textsf{translator}, -and \textsf{namec}, in that order. The current versions of -\textsf{biblatex} and \textsf{biber} will now automatically -alphabetize by any of these names if they appear at the head of an -entry. If, in an author-less \textsf{article} entry -(\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}), you allow -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} to use the title of the periodical as the -author --- the default behavior --- then your \textsf{shortauthor} -field can optionally contain an abbreviated form of the periodical -name, formatted appropriately, which usually means something like -\enquote{\cmd{mkbibemph\{Abbrev.\ Period.\ Title\}}} (gourmet:052006, -lakeforester:pushcarts, nyt:trevorobit, unsigned:ranke). Indeed, with -long, institutional authors, a shortened version in -\textsf{shortauthor} may save space in the running text -(cotton:manufacture, evanston:library). See just below under -\textbf{shorthand} for another method of saving space. - -\mylittlespace As mentioned under \textsf{editortype}, the -\emph{Manual} (17.41) recommends against providing the identifying -string (e.g., ed.\ or trans.)\ in text citations, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} follows their recommendation. If you need -to provide these strings in such a citation, then you'll have to do so -by hand in the \textsf{shortauthor} field, or in the -\textsf{shorteditor} field, whichever you are using. - -\mybigspace Like \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorteditor}} -\textsf{shortauthor}, a field to provide a name for a text citation, -in this case for, e.g., a \textsf{collection} entry that typically -lacks an author. The \textsf{shortauthor} field works just as well in -most situations, but if you have set \texttt{useauthor=false} (and not -\texttt{useeditor=false}) in an entry's \textsf{options} field, then -only \textsf{shorteditor} will be recognized. Cf.\ -\textsf{editortype}, above. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorthand}} is -\textsf{biblatex}'s mechanism for using abbreviations in citations. -For \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} I have modified it somewhat -to conform to the needs of the specification, though there is a -package option to revert the behavior to something closer to the -\textsf{biblatex} standard --- see under \texttt{cmslos} in -section~\ref{sec:authpreset}. The main problem when presenting -readers with an abbreviation is to ensure that they know how to expand -it. In the notes \&\ bibliography style this is accomplished with a -notice in the first footnote citing a given work, which explains that -henceforth the abbreviation will be used instead, and also, if needed, -with a list of shorthands that summarizes all the abbreviations used -in a particular text. The first part of this system isn't available -in the author-date style of citation, and indeed these citations are -in themselves already highly-abbreviated keys to the fuller -information to be found in the list of references. There are cases, -however, particularly when institutions or \textsf{journaltitles} -appear as authors, when you may feel the need to provide a shortened -version for citations. I have already discussed one option available -to you just above (cf.\ \textbf{shortauthor}), but for this to work -the abbreviation must either be instantly recognizable to your -readership or at least easily parseable by them. - -\mylittlespace The \emph{Manual's} suggestion, particularly when -\enquote{long names are cited several times} (17.47), is to provide an -abbreviation which is then explained by an alphabetized -cross-refer\-ence inside the list of references itself. In this -release of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, I have reclaimed one of the -custom entry types (\textbf{customc}) to implement exactly this -system. See the explanation of this entry type above, but basically -you can put the abbreviation itself in the \textsf{author} field and -its expansion in the \textsf{title} field, then use either -\cmd{nocite} or a \textsf{userc} field to ensure the entry appears in -the list of references. (Cf.\ abbrev:BSI, abbrev:ISO, -bsi:abbreviation:15, iso:electrodoc:15.) - -\mylittlespace The author-date style will still automatically print -the cross-reference in the list of shorthands too, as in standard -\textsf{biblatex}, if the \cmd{printshorthands} command appears in -your document. You can place \texttt{skiplos} in the \textsf{options} -field to exclude a particular entry from the list of shorthands if you -do decide to print that list, giving maximum flexibility. Indeed, -\colmarginpar{New!} for this release, I have provided two new options -to add to this flexibility. First, I have included two new -\texttt{bibenvironments} for use with the \texttt{env} option to the -\cmd{printshorthands} command: \mycolor{\texttt{losnotes}} is designed -to allow a list of shorthands to appear inside footnotes, while -\mycolor{\texttt{losendnotes}} does the same for endnotes. Their main -effect is to change the font size, and in the latter case to clear up -some spurious punctuation and white space that I see on my system when -using endnotes. (You'll probably also want to use the option -\texttt{heading=none} in order to get rid of the [oversized] default, -providing your own within the \cmd{footnote} command.) Second, I have -provided a new package option, \mycolor{\texttt{shorthandfull}}, which -prints entries in the list of shorthands which contain full -bibliographical information, effectively allowing you to eschew the -list of references in favor of a fortified shorthand list. This -option will only work if used in tandem with \texttt{cmslos=false}, as -the whole functionality seems to me closely related to the more -standard ways of presenting shorthands. (See 16.39--40, and also -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for more information.) - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace As I mentioned above under \textbf{crossref}, extra -care is needed when using shorthands with cross-references, and I -would avoid them in all parent entries, at least in the current state -of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{shorttitle}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, primarily used to provide an abbreviated -title for citation styles that need one. In -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} such a field will be necessary -only very rarely (unlike in the notes \&\ bibliography style), and is -most likely to turn up in \textsf{inreference} or \textsf{reference} -entries (where the \textsf{title} takes the place of the -\textsf{author}), or in any sort of entry with a \texttt{classical} -\textsf{entrysubtype}. This latter toggle makes citations use -\textsf{author} and \textsf{title} instead of \textsf{author} and -\textsf{year}, and if an abbreviated version of that title would save -space in your running text this is the field where you can provide it. -(Cf.\ ency:britannica, grove:sibelius, aristotle:metaphy:gr.) - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{sortkey}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, designed to allow you to specify how you want -an entry alphabetized in a list of references. In general, if an -entry doesn't turn up where you expect or want it, this field should -provide the solution. More particularly, entries with a corporate -author beginning with the definite or indefinite article will usually -require your assistance in this way (cotton:manufacture, -grove:sibelius). The default settings of \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} -now include the three supplemental name fields (\textsf{name[a-c]}) -and also the \textsf{journaltitle} in the sorting algorithm, so you -should find these algorithms needing less help than before. There may -be circumstances --- several reprinted books by the same author, for -example --- when the \textbf{sortyear} field is more appropriate, on -which see below. Lehman also provides \textbf{sortname} and -\textbf{sorttitle} for equally fine-grained control. Please consult -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} for the details. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{sortyear}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, provided by Lehman for more fine-grained -control over the sorting of entries in a list of references, and -possibly useful in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} to help -present several reprinted books by the same author. See -\textsf{sortkey} above and maitland:equity. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{subtitle}} subtitle for a -\textsf{title} --- see next entry. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{title}} the vast majority of -cases, this field works just as it always has in \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and -just as it does in \textsf{biblatex}. Nearly every entry for the -author-date specification will have such a field, any exceptions -likely stemming from the need to re-use a database for the notes \&\ -bibliography style. Aside from this, the main source of difficulties -flows from the \emph{Manual}'s rules for formatting \textsf{titles}, -rules which also hold for \textsf{booktitles} and \textsf{maintitles}. -The whole point of using a \textsc{Bib}\TeX-based system is for it to -do the formatting for you, and in most cases -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} does just that, capitalizing them -sentence-style, italicizing them, and sometimes both. There are two -situations that require user intervention. First, in titles that take -sentence-style capitalization, you need, as always in traditional -\textsc{Bib}\TeX, to assist the algorithms by placing anything that -needs to remain capitalized within an extra pair of curly braces. -Second, when a title is quoted within a title, you need to know some -of the rules of the Chicago style. A summary here should serve to -clarify them, and help you to understand when -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} might need your help in order to -comply with them. - -\mylittlespace With regard to sentence-style capitalization, the rules -of the Chicago author-date style are fairly simple: - -\begin{description} -\item[\qquad Headline Style:] \textsf{journaltitle} in all types, - \textsf{series} in all \textsf{book}-like entries (i.e., not in - \textsf{articles}), and \textsf{title} in \textsf{periodical} - entries. -\item[\qquad Sentence Style:] Every other \textsf{title}, - \emph{except} in \textsf{letter} entries and in \textsf{misc} - entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}. Also, the - \textsf{booktitle}, \textsf{issuetitle}, and \textsf{maintitle} in - all entry types. -\item[\qquad Contextual Capitalization of First Word:] - \textsf{titleaddon}, \textsf{booktitleaddon}, - \textsf{maintitleaddon} in all entry types, and the \textsf{title} - of \textsf{misc} entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}. -\item[\qquad Plain:] \textsf{title} in \textsf{letter} entries. -\end{description} - -What this means in practice is that to get a title like \emph{The - Chicago manual of style}, your .bib entry needs to have a field that -looks something like this: -\begin{quote} - \texttt{title = \{The \{Chicago\} Manual of Style\}} -\end{quote} - -This is completely straightforward, but remember that if an -\textsf{article} has a title like: Review of \emph{The Chicago manual - of style}, then the curly braces enclosing material to be formatted -in italics will cause the capitalization algorithm to stop and leave -all of that material as it is, so your .bib entry would need to have a -field something like this: - -\begin{quote} - \texttt{title = \{}\cmd{bibstring\{reviewof\}} \cmd{mkbibemph\{The - Chicago manual of style\}\}} -\end{quote} - -(As an aside, the use of the \texttt{reviewof} bibstring isn't -strictly necessary here, but it helps with portability across -languages and across the two Chicago styles. If you've noticed a lot -of lowercase letters starting fields in \textsf{dates-test.bib}, -they're present because in the notes \&\ bibliography style -capitalization is complicated by notes using commas where the -bibliography uses periods, and words like \enquote{review} start in -uppercase only if the context demands it. There's considerably less -of this in the author-date style [note the \textsf{*titleaddon} -fields], but it still pays to be aware of the issue.) - -\mylittlespace With regard to italics, the rules of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} are as follows: - -\begin{description} -\item[\qquad Italics:] \textsf{booktitle}, \textsf{maintitle}, and - \textsf{journaltitle} in all entry types; \textsf{title} of - \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{book}, \textsf{bookinbook}, - \textsf{booklet}, \textsf{collection}, \textsf{inbook}, - \textsf{manual}, \textsf{misc} (with no \textsf{entrysubtype}), - \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{proceedings}, \textsf{report}, - \textsf{suppbook}, and \textsf{suppcollection} entry types. -\item[\qquad Main Text Font (Roman):] \textsf{title} of - \textsf{article}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{incollection}, - \textsf{inproceedings}, \textsf{letter}, \textsf{misc} (with an - \textsf{entrysubtype}), \textsf{online}, \textsf{patent}, - \textsf{periodical}, \textsf{suppperiodical}, \textsf{thesis}, and - \textsf{unpublished} entry types, \textsf{issuetitle} in - \textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} entry types. - \textsf{booktitleaddon}, \textsf{maintitleaddon}, and - \textsf{titleaddon} in all entry types. -\item[\qquad Italics or Roman:] All of the audiovisual entry types --- - \textsf{audio}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video} --- have to serve - as analogues both to \textsf{book} and to \textsf{inbook}. - Therefore, if there is both a \textsf{title} and a - \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title} will be in the main text - font. If there is no \textsf{booktitle}, then the \textsf{title} - will be italicized. -\end{description} - -Now, the rules for which entry type to use for which sort of work tend -to be fairly straightforward, but in cases of doubt you can consult -section~\ref{sec:types:authdate} above, the examples in -\textsf{dates-test.bib}, or go to the \emph{Manual} itself, -8.164--210. Assuming, then, that you want to present a title within a -title, and you know what sort of formatting each of the two would, on -its own, require, then the following rules apply: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item Inside an italicized title, all other titles are enclosed in - quotation marks and italicized, so in such cases all you need to do - is provide the quotation marks using \cmd{mkbibquote}, which will - take care of any following punctuation that needs to be brought - within the closing quotation mark(s) (17.58; donne:var:15, - mchugh:wake:15). -\item Inside a plain-text title, you should present another title as - it would appear if it were on its own, so in such cases you'll need - to do the formatting yourself, using \cmd{mkbibemph} or - \cmd{mkbibquote}. (See 17.157; barcott:review:15, garrett:15, - gibbard:15, loften:hamlet, loomis:structure:15, murphy:silent:15, - osborne:poi\-son, ratliff:review:15, unsigned:ranke, - white:\\callimachus.) -\end{enumerate} - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -The \emph{Manual} provides a few more rules, as well. A word normally -italicized in text should also be italicized in a plain-text title, -but should be in roman (\enquote{reverse italics}) in an italicized -title. A quotation used as a (whole) title (with or without a -subtitle) retains its quotation marks when it is plain, but loses them -when it is italicized (17.60, 17.157; lewis:15). A word or phrase in -quotation marks, but that isn't a quotation, retains those marks in -all title types (kimluu:diethyl:15). - -\mylittlespace Finally, please note that in all \textsf{review} (and -\textsf{suppperiodical}) entries (if you happen to be using those), -and in \textsf{misc} entries with an \textsf{entrysubtype}, and only -in those entries, \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} will -automatically capitalize the first word of the \textsf{title} after -sentence-ending punctuation, assuming that such a \textsf{title} -begins with a lowercase letter in your .bib database. See -\textbf{\textbackslash autocap} below for more details. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{titleaddon}} -\textsf{biblatex} intends this field for use with additions to titles -that may need to be formatted differently from the titles themselves, -and \textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses it in just this way, with the -additional wrinkle that it can, if needed, replace the \textsf{title} -entirely, and this in, effectively, any entry type, providing a fairly -powerful, if somewhat complicated, tool for getting \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ -to do what you want (cf.\ centinel:letters). This field will always -be unformatted, that is, neither italicized nor placed within -quotation marks, so any formatting you may need within it you'll need -to provide manually yourself. The single exception to this rule is -when your data begins with a word that would ordinarily only be -capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, in which case you need -then simply ensure that that word is in lowercase, and -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically do the right thing. See\ -\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}, below. (Cf.\ brown:bremer, -osborne:poison:15, reaves:rosen, and white:ross:memo for examples -where the field starts with a lowercase letter; morgenson:market -provides an example where the \textsf{titleaddon} field, holding the -name of a regular column in a newspaper, is capitalized, a situation -that is handled as you would expect.) - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{translator}} far as possible, I -have implemented this field as \textsf{biblatex}'s standard styles do, -but the requirements specified by the \emph{Manual} present certain -complications that need explaining. Lehman points out in his -documentation that the \textsf{translator} field will be associated -with a \textsf{title}, a \textsf{booktitle}, or a \textsf{maintitle}, -depending on the sort of entry. More specifically, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} associates the \textsf{translator} with the -most comprehensive of those titles, that is, \textsf{maintitle} if -there is one, otherwise \textsf{booktitle}, otherwise \textsf{title}, -if the other two are lacking. In a large number of cases, this is -exactly the correct behavior (adorno:benj, centinel:letters, -plato:republic:gr, among others). Predictably, however, there are -numerous cases that require, for example, an additional translator for -one part of a collection or for one volume of a multi-volume work. -For these cases I have provided the \textsf{nameb} field. You should -format names for this field as you would for \textsf{author} or -\textsf{editor}, and these names will always be associated with the -\textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). - -\mylittlespace I have also provided a \textsf{namea} field, which -holds the editor of a given \textsf{title} (euripides:orestes). If -\textsf{namea} and \textsf{nameb} are the same, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will concatenate them, just as -\textsf{biblatex} already does for \textsf{editor}, -\textsf{translator}, and \textsf{namec} (i.e., the compiler). -Furthermore, it is conceivable that a given entry will need separate -translators for each of the three sorts of title. For this, and for -various other tricky situations, there is the \cmd{parttrans} macro -(and its siblings), designed to be used in a \textsf{note} field or in -one of the \textsf{titleaddon} fields (ratliff:review:15). (Because the -strings identifying a translator differ in notes and bibliography, one -can't simply write them out in such a field when using the notes \&\ -bibliography style, but you can certainly do so in the author-date -style, if you wish. Using the macros will make your .bib file more -portable across both Chicago specifications, and also across multiple -languages, but they are otherwise unnecessary. [See -section~\ref{sec:international}].) - -\mylittlespace Finally, as I detailed above under \textbf{author}, in -the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}, the -\textsf{translator} will be used at the head of an entry -(silver:gawain), and the reference list entry alphabetized by the -translator's name, behavior that can be controlled with the -\texttt{{usetranslator}} switch in the \textsf{options} field. Cf.\ -\textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea}, \textsf{nameb}, and -\textsf{namec}. - -% \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{type}} is a standard -\textsf{biblatex} field, and in its normal usage serves to identify -the type of a \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, \textsf{report}, or -\textsf{thesis} entry. \textsf{Biblatex} implements the possibility, -in some circumstances, to use a bibstring without inserting it in a -\cmd{bibstring} command, and in these entry types the \textsf{type} -field works this way, allowing you simply to input, e.g., -\texttt{patentus} rather than \cmd{bibstring\{patentus\}}, though both -will work. (See petroff:impurity; herwign:office, murphy:silent:15, -and ross:thesis all demonstrate how the \textsf{type} field may -sometimes be automatically set in such entries by using one of the -standard entry-type aliases). - -\mylittlespace Another use for the field is to generalize the -functioning of the \textsf{suppbook} entry type, and of its alias -\textsf{suppcollection}. In such entries, the \textsf{type} field can -specify what sort of supplemental material you are citing, e.g., -\enquote{\texttt{preface to}} or \enquote{\texttt{postscript to}.} -Cf.\ \textsf{suppbook} above for the details. (See \emph{Manual} -17.74--75; polakow:afterw, prose:intro). - -\mylittlespace You can also use the \textsf{type} field in -\textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and -\textsf{video} entries to identify the medium of the work, e.g., -\texttt{oil on canvas}, \texttt{albumen print}, \texttt{compact disc}, -or \texttt{MPEG}. If the first word in this field would normally only -be capitalized at the beginning of a sentence, then leave it in -lowercase in your .bib file and \textsf{biblatex} will automatically -do the right thing in citations. Cf.\ \textsf{artwork}, -\textsf{audio}, \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, and \textsf{video}, -above, for all the details. (See auden:reading:15, bedford:photo, -cleese:holygrail, leo:madonna, nytrumpet:art:15.) - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{url}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, it holds the url of an online publication, though you can -provide one for all entry types. The required \LaTeX\ package -\textsf{url} will ensure that your documents format such references -properly, in the text and in the reference apparatus. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace Standard \colmarginpar{\textbf{urldate}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, it identifies exactly when you accessed a given url. This -field would contain the whole date, in \textsc{iso}8601 format -(evanston:library, grove:sibelius, hlatky:hrt, osborne:poison:15, -sirosh:visualcortex, wikiped:bib\-tex). In the default setting of -\cmd{DeclareLabelyear}, any entry without a \textsf{date}, -\textsf{eventdate}, or \textsf{origdate} will now use the -\textsf{urldate} to find a year for citations and the list of -references (grove:sibelius, wikiped:bibtex). Please note that the -\textbf{urlday}, \textbf{urlmonth}, and \textbf{urlyear} fields are -all now obsolete. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{usera}} supplemental -\textsf{biblatex} field which functions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -almost as a \enquote{\textsf{journaltitleaddon}} field. In -\textsf{article} and \textsf{periodical} entries with -\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{maga\-zine}, the contents of this field -will be placed, unformatted and between commas, after the -\textsf{journaltitle} and before the date. The main use is for -identifying the broadcast network when you cite a radio or television -program (bundy:macneil), though you may also want to use it to -identify the section of a newspaper in which you've found a particular -article (morgenson:market). (See \emph{Manual} 17.190, 17.207. As -far as I can work out, newspaper section information may be placed -either before the date [\textsf{usera}] or after it [\textsf{pages}]. -Cp. kozinn:review [17.202] and morgenson:market [17.190]. The choice -would appear to be yours.) - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{userc}} have now implemented this -supplemental \textsf{biblatex} field as part of the Chicago -author-date style's handling of the \textsf{shorthand} field and other -cross-references within the list of references. (The \enquote{c} part -is meant as a sort of mnemonic for this latter, general function, -though its main use will probably be in association with the former.) -If you use the \textbf{customc} entry type to include alphabetized -expansions of \textsf{shorthands} in the reference list, or indeed to -provide cross-references of any sort to separate entries in that list, -it is unlikely that you will cite the \textsf{customc} entry itself in -the body of your text. Therefore, in order for it to appear in the -reference list, you have two choices. You can either include the -entry key of the \textsf{customc} entry in a \cmd{nocite} command -inside your document, or you can place that entry key in the -\textsf{userc} field of the .bib entry that actually uses the -\textsf{shorthand}. In the latter case, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -will call \cmd{nocite} for you when you cite the main entry. (See -17.39--40,47; abbrev:BSI, abbrev:ISO, bsi:abbreviation:15, -iso:electrodoc:15.) - -\mybigspace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{usere}} supplemental -\textsf{biblatex} field, which \textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses -specifically to provide a translated \textsf{title} of a work, -something that may be needed if you deem the original language -unparseable by a significant portion of your likely readership. The -\emph{Manual} offers two alternatives in such a situation: either you -can translate the title and use that translation in your -\textsf{title} field, providing the original language in -\textsf{language}, or you can give the original title in -\textsf{title} and the translation in \textsf{usere}. Cf.\ -\textbf{language}, above. (See 17.65--67, 17.166, 17.177; kern, -pirumova:russian, weresz.) - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{userf}} is the last of the -supplemental fields which \textsf{biblatex} provides, used by -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} for a very specific purpose. When you cite -both a translation and its original, the \emph{Manual} (17.66) -recommends that, in a reference list at least, you combine references -to both texts in one entry. Lacking specific instructions about the -author-date style, I have nonetheless chosen to implement this -possibility also for a list of references, though in-text citations -will still only refer to individual works. In order to follow this -specification, I have provided a third cross-referencing system (the -others being \textsf{crossref} and \textsf{xref}), and have chosen the -name \textsf{userf} because it might act as a mnemonic for its -function. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace In order to use this system, you should start by -entering both the original and its translation into your .bib file, -just as you normally would. The mechanism works for any entry type, -and the two entries need not be of the same type. In the entry for -the \emph{translation}, you put the cite key of the original into the -\textsf{userf} field. In the \emph{original's} entry, you need to -include some means of preventing it appearing separately in the list -of references, either a toggle in the \textsf{keywords} field or -perhaps \texttt{skipbib} in the \textsf{options} field. In this -standard case, the data for the translation will be printed first, -followed by the string \texttt{orig. pub. as}, followed by the -original, author omitted (furet:passing:eng, furet:passing:fr). As -explained above (\textbf{origlanguage}), I have also included a way to -modify the string printed before the original. In the entry for the -\emph{translation}, you put the original's language in -\textsf{origlanguage}, and instead of \texttt{originally published - as}, you'll get \texttt{French edition:} or \texttt{Latin edition:}, -etc.\ (aristotle:metaphy:gr, aristotle:metaphy:trans). - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{venue}} \textsf{biblatex} -offers this field for use in \textsf{proceedings} and -\textsf{inproceedings} entries, but I haven't yet implemented it, -mainly because the \emph{Manual} has nothing to say about it. Perhaps -the \textsf{organization} field could be used, for the moment, -instead. Anything in a \textsf{venue} field will be ignored. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{version}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, currently only available in \textsf{misc} and \textsf{patent} -entries in \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volume}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. It holds the volume of a \textsf{journaltitle} in -\textsf{article} entries, and also the volume of a multi-volume work -in many other sorts of entry. Cf.\ \textsf{part}; conway:evolution -shows how sometimes this field may hold series information, as well. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{volumes}} \textsf{biblatex} -field. It holds the total number of volumes of a multi-volume work, -and in such references you should provide the volume and page numbers -in the \textsf{postnote} field of the relevant \cmd{cite} command, -e.g.: - -\begin{quote} -\cmd{autocite}\texttt{[3:25]\{bibfile:key\}}. -\end{quote} - -Cf.\ 16.110; meredith:letters, tillich:system, weber:saugetiere, -wright:evolution. The entry wright:theory presents one volume of such -a multi-volume work, so you would no longer need to give the volume in -any \textsf{postnote} field when citing it. - -\mybigspace A \mymarginpar{\textbf{xref}} modified \textsf{crossref} -field provided by \textsf{biblatex}. See \textbf{crossref}, above. - -\mybigspace Standard \mymarginpar{\textbf{year}} \textsf{biblatex} -field, especially important for the author-date specification. Please -see all the details under \textbf{date} above. Unlike the -\textsf{date} field \textsf{year} allows non-numeric input, so you can -put \cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}} here if required, or indeed any other -sort of non-numerical date information. If you can guess the date -then you can include that guess in square brackets instead of -\cmd{bibstring\{nodate\}}. Cf.\ bedford:photo, clark:mesopot, -ross:leo, thesis:madonna. - -\subsection{Commands} -\label{sec:commands:authdate} - -In this section I shall attempt to document all those commands you may -need when using \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} that I have either -altered with respect to the standard provided by \textsf{biblatex} or -that I have provided myself. Some of these, unfortunately, will make -your .bib file incompatible with other \textsf{biblatex} styles, but -I've been unable to avoid this. Any ideas for more elegant, and more -compatible, solutions will be warmly welcomed. - -\subsubsection{Formatting Commands} -\label{sec:formatting:authdate} - -These commands allow you to fine-tune the presentation of your -references in both citations and list of references. You can find -many examples of their usage in \textsf{dates-test.bib}, and I shall -try to point you toward a few such entries in what follows. -\textbf{NB:} \textsf{biblatex's} \cmd{mkbibquote} command is now -mandatory in some situations. See its entry below. - -\mybigspace Version \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocap}} 0.8 -of \textsf{biblatex} introduced the \cmd{autocap} command, which -capitalizes a word inside a citation or list of references entry if -that word follows sentence-ending punctuation, and leaves it lowercase -otherwise. The whole question of capitalization is considerably more -complicated in the notes \&\ bibliography style, where the former uses -commas and the latter (often) periods to separate blocks of -information, whereas the more streamlined author-date specification -has few such issues. In \textsf{dates-test.bib} there are only two -places where the \cmd{autocap} macro is necessary, and they both -involve the string \texttt{forthcoming} in the \textsf{year} field -(author:forthcoming, contrib:contrib). - -\mylittlespace I have nonetheless retained the system developed, -following Lehman's example, for the notes \&\ bibliography style, -which automatically tracks the capitalization of certain fields in -your .bib file. I chose these fields after a non-scientific survey of -entries in my own databases, so of course if you have ideas for the -extension of this facility I would be most interested to hear them. -In order to take advantage of this functionality, all you need do is -begin the data in the appropriate field with a lowercase letter, -e.g.,\ \texttt{note = \{with the assistance of X\}}. If the data -begins with a capital letter --- and this is not infrequent --- that -capital will always be retained. (cf., e.g., creel:house, -morgenson:market.) If, on the other hand, you for some reason need -such a field always to start with a lowercase letter, then you can try -using the \cmd{isdot} macro at the start, which turns off the -mechanism without printing anything itself. Here, then, for reference -purposes, is the complete list of fields where this functionality is -active: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item The \textbf{addendum} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{booktitleaddon} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{edition} field in all entry types. (Numerals work - as you expect them to here.) -\item The \textbf{maintitleaddon} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{note} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{shorttitle} field in the \textsf{review} - (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type, - in the latter case, however, only when there is an - \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is - from an archive. -\item The \textbf{title} field in the \textsf{review} - (\textsf{suppperiodical}) entry type and in the \textsf{misc} type, - in the latter case, however, only when there is an - \textsf{entrysubtype} defined, indicating that the work cited is - from an archive. -\item The \textbf{titleaddon} field in all entry types. -\item The \textbf{type} field in \textsf{artwork}, \textsf{audio}, - \textsf{image}, \textsf{music}, \textsf{suppbook}, - \textsf{suppcollection}, and \textsf{video} entry types. -\end{enumerate} - -If you accidentally use the \cmd{autocap} macro in one of the above -fields, it frankly shouldn't matter at all, and you'll still get what -you want, but taking advantage of the automatic provisions should at -least save some typing. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash bibstring}} is -Lehman's very powerful mechanism to allow \textsf{biblatex} -automatically to provide a localized version of a string, and to -determine whether that string needs capitalization, depending on where -it falls in an entry. \textsf{Biblatex} also provides functionality -which allows you sometimes simply to input, for example, -\texttt{newseries} instead of \cmd{bib\-string\{newseries\}}, the -package auto-detecting when a bibstring is involved and doing the -right thing, though in all such cases either form will work. This -functionality is available in the \textsf{series} field of -\textsf{article}, \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries; in -the \textsf{type} field of \textsf{manual}, \textsf{patent}, -\textsf{report}, and \textsf{thesis} entries; in the \textsf{location} -field of \textsf{patent} entries; in the \textsf{language} field in -all entry types; and in the \textsf{nameaddon} field in -\textsf{customc} entries. These are the places, as far as I can make -out, where \textsf{biblatex's} standard styles support this feature, -though I have added the last, style-specific, one. If Lehman -generalizes it still further in a future release, I shall do the same, -if possible. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash mkbibquote}} is -the standard \textsf{biblatex} command, which requires attention here -because it is a crucial part of the mechanism of Lehman's -\enquote{American} punctuation system. No titles in the author-date -system require quotation marks, but titles-within-titles frequently -do, so it is best to get accustomed to using this command to make sure -any periods or commas appearing in the neighborhood of the closing -quotes will appear inside them automatically. A few examples from -\textsf{dates-test.bib} should help to clarify this. - -\mylittlespace In an \textsf{article} entry, the \textsf{title} -contains a quoted phrase: - -\begin{quotation} - \noindent\texttt{title = \{Diethylstilbestrol and Media Coverage of the \\ - \indent\cmd{mkbibquote}\{morning after\} Pill\}} -\end{quotation} - -Here, because the quoted text doesn't come at the end of title, and no -punctuation will ever need to be drawn within the closing quotation -mark, you could instead use \texttt{\cmd{enquote}\{morning after\}} or -even \texttt{``morning after''}. (Note the double quotation marks here ---- the other two methods have the virtue of taking care of nesting -for you.) All of these will produce the formatted: Diethylstilbestrol -and media coverage of the \enquote{morning after} pill. - -\mylittlespace Here, by contrast, is a \textsf{book title}: - -\begin{quotation} - \noindent \texttt{title = \{Annotations to - \cmd{mkbibquote}\{Finnegans wake\}\}} -\end{quotation} - -Because the quoted title within the title comes at the end of the -field, and because this reference unit will be separated from -what follows by a period in the list of references, then the -\cmd{mkbibquote} command is necessary to bring that period within the -final quotation marks, like so: \emph{Annotations to - \enquote{Finnegans wake.}} - -\mylittlespace Note in both cases how you need to be careful with the -sentence-style capitalization inside the curly brackets. The -automatic algorithms assume anything inside the brackets doesn't need -alteration, so you need to provide lower- or uppercase as they should -appear in the list of references. - -\mylittlespace Let me also add that this command interacts well with -Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package, which I highly recommend, though -the latter isn't strictly necessary in texts using an American style, -to which \textsf{biblatex} defaults when \textsf{csquotes} isn't -loaded. - -\mybigspace This \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partcomp}} and -the following 6 macros were all designed to help -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} cope with the fact that many bibstrings in -the notes \&\ bibliography style differ between notes and -bibliography, the former sometimes using abbreviated forms when the -latter prints them in full. These problems do not arise in the -author-date style, but using these macros will make your .bib database -more portable across languages and across both Chicago styles, and may -be slightly easier to remember than the strings themselves. On the -other hand, of course, they will make your .bib file less portable -across multiple \textsf{biblatex} styles. - -\mylittlespace These macros allow you to provide an \texttt{editor}, a -\texttt{translator}, and/or a \texttt{compiler} in situations where -the available fields (\textsf{editor}, \textsf{namea}, -\textsf{translator}, \textsf{nameb}, and \textsf{namec}) aren't -adequate. Their names all begin with \cmd{part}, as originally I -intended them for use when a particular name applied only to a -specific \textsf{title}, rather than to a \textsf{maintitle} or -\textsf{booktitle} (cf.\ \textbf{namea} and \textbf{nameb}, above). - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace In the present instance, you can use \cmd{partcomp} to -identify a compiler when \textsf{namec} (or \textsf{editortype}) won't -do, e.g., in a \textsf{note} field or the like. In such a case, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} will print the appropriate string in your -references. - -\mybigspace Use \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash partedit}} this -macro when identifying an editor whose name doesn't conveniently fit -into the usual fields (\textsf{editor} or \textsf{namea}). (N.B.: If -you are writing in French and using \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, then -currently you'll need to add either \texttt{de} or \texttt{d'} after -this command in your .bib files to make the references come out right. -I'm working on this.) See howell:marriage. - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - partedit-\\andcomp}} before, but for use when an editor is also a -compiler. - -\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - partedit-\\andtrans}} before, but for when when an editor is also a -translator (ratliff:review:15). - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - partedit-\\transandcomp}} before, but for when an editor is also a -translator and a compiler. - -\vspace{1.3\baselineskip} As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - parttrans}} before, but for use when identifying a translator -whose name doesn't conveniently fit into the usual fields -(\textsf{translator} and \textsf{nameb}). - -\mybigspace As \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash - parttrans-\\andcomp}} before, but for when a translator is also a -compiler. - -\subsubsection{Citation Commands} -\label{sec:cite:authordate} - -The \textsf{biblatex} package is particularly rich in citation -commands, most of which, in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}, -function as they do in the standard author-date styles. If you are -getting unexpected behavior when using them please have a look in your -.log file. A command like \cmd{supercite}, listed in §~3.6.2 of the -\textsf{biblatex} manual but not defined by -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} or by core \textsf{biblatex}, -defaults to \cmd{cite}, and leaves a warning in the .log. The -following commands may require some minimal explanation, but if there -are standard commands that don't work for you, or new commands that -would be useful, please let me know, and it should be possible to fix -or add them. - -\mybigspace I \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash autocite}} haven't -adapted this in the slightest, but I thought it worth pointing out -that \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} sets this command to use -\cmd{parencite} as the default option. It is, in my experience, much -the most common citation command you will use, and also works fine in -its multicite form, \textbf{\textbackslash autocites}. - -\mybigspace In \mymarginpar{\textbf{\textbackslash textcite}} standard -\textsf{biblatex} this command searches first for a -\textsf{labelname}, usually taken from the \textsf{author} or -\textsf{shortauthor} field, then uses the \textsf{shorthand} field if -the former doesn't exist. Because of the way the Chicago author-date -specification recommends handling abbreviations, I have switched this -around, and the command now searches for a \textsf{shorthand} first. -This holds also for the multicite form \textbf{\textbackslash - textcites}, though both commands revert to their standard -\textsf{biblatex} behavior when you give the \texttt{cmslos=false} -option in the preamble. - -\subsection{Package Options} -\label{sec:opts:authdate} - -\subsubsection{Pre-set \textsf{biblatex} Options} -\label{sec:preset:authdate} - -Although a quick glance through \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} will -tell you which \textsf{biblatex} options the package sets for you, I -thought I might gather them here also for your perusal. These -settings are, I believe, consistent with the specification, but you -can alter them in the options to \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your -preamble or by loading the package using -\cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-authordate]\{biblatex\}}, which gives -you the \textsf{biblatex} defaults unless you redefine them yourself -inside the square brackets. - -\mylittlespace \textsf{Biblatex-chicago-authordate} -\mymarginpar{\texttt{autocite=\\inline}} places references in -footnotes by default. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{citetracker=\\true}} citetracker -for the \cmd{ifciteseen} test is enabled globally. - -\mybigspace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{alldates=comp}} specification -calls for the long format when presenting dates, slightly shortened -when presenting date ranges. Please note that because of the -author-date style's complicated requirements with respect to dates, -there will be cases when printed ranges don't look exactly right --- -cf., e.g., nass:address. I'm working on this. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{ibidtracker=\\constrict}} -enables an \emph{ibidem} mechanism in citations, but only in the most -strictly-defined circumstances. The Chicago author-date style doesn't -print \enquote{Ibid} in citations, but in general a repeated citation -on the same page will print only the page reference. Technically, -this should only occur when a source is cited \enquote{more than once - in one paragraph} (16.114), so you can use the \cmd{citereset} -command from \textsf{biblatex} to achieve the greatest compliance, as -the package only offers automatic resetting on part, chapter, section, -and subsection boundaries, while \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -automatically resets the tracker at page breaks. (Cf.\ -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §3.1.2.1.) Whenever there might be any -ambiguity, \textsf{biblatex} should default to printing a more -informative reference. - -\mylittlespace If you are going to repeat a source, make sure that the -cite command provides a \textsf{postnote} --- if you don't need to cite a -specific page, then it's better only to use one citation rather than -two, as otherwise, in the current state of the code, you'll get empty -parentheses, like so: (). - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{labelyear=\\true}} option -tells \textsf{biblatex} to provide the special \textsf{labelyear} and -\textsf{extrayear} fields for author-date styles. - -\mylittlespace These \colmarginpar{\textsf{\texttt{maxbibnames\\=10\\ - minbibnames\\=7}}} two options are new, and control the number -of names printed in the list of references when that number exceeds -10. These numbers follow the recommendations of the \emph{Manual} -(17.29--30), and they are different from those for use in citations. -With \textsf{biblatex} 1.6 and later you can no longer redefine -\texttt{maxnames} and \texttt{minnames} in the \cmd{printbibliography} -command at the bottom of your document, so \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -now does this automatically for you, though of course you can change -them in your document preamble. Please see -section~\ref{sec:otherhints:auth} below (and the file -\textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf}) for hints on dealing with entries with -more than three authors. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{pagetracker=\\true}} enables -page tracking for the \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage} -commands for controlling, among other things, the \emph{ibidem} -mechanism. It tracks individual pages if \LaTeX\ is in oneside mode, -or whole spreads in twoside mode. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{punctfont=\\true}} fixes a -minor problem with punctuation in titles, ensuring that the colon -between a title and a subtitle appears in the correct, matching font. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{sortcase=\\false}} turns off -the sorting of uppercase and lowercase letters separately, a practice -which the \emph{Manual} doesn't appear to recommend. - -\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\texttt{sorting=cms}} setting, new -in this release, takes advantage of the \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} -command provided by \textsf{biblatex} and \textsf{biber}, in effect -implementing a default sorting order in the list of references -tailored to comply with the Chicago author-date specification. Please -see the documentation of \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} in -section~\ref{sec:authformopts}, below. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{uniquelist=\\minyear}} -enables \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} to disambiguate entries -which have more than three \textsf{authors}, but which differ -\emph{after} the first name in the list. This will only occur when -two such entries have the same \textsf{year} (16.118). The option is -\textsf{Biber}-only, like the following, which means that this -next-generation \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ replacement is now required for the -author-date style. Please see \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and -section~\ref{sec:otherhints:auth}, below, for further details. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{uniquename=\\minfull}} -enables the package to distinguish different authors who share a -surname, using initials in the first instance, and whole names if -initials aren't enough (16.108). The option is now -\textsf{Biber}-only, like the previous one. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usetranslator\\=true}} -enables automatic use of the \textsf{translator} at the head of -entries in the absence of an \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}. -In the list of references, the entry will be alphabetized by the -translator's surname. You can disable this functionality on a -per-entry basis by setting \texttt{usetranslator=false} in the -\textsf{options} field. Cf.\ silver:gawain. - -\subsubsection*{Other \textsf{biblatex} Formatting Options} -\label{sec:authformopts} - -I've chosen defaults for many of the general formatting commands -provided by \textsf{biblatex}, including the vertical space between -items in the list of references and between items in the list of -shorthands (\cmd{bibitemsep} and \cmd{lositemsep}). I define many of -these in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and of course you may want to -redefine them to your own needs and tastes. It may be as well you -know that the \emph{Manual} does state a preference for two of the -formatting options I've implemented by default: the 3-em dash as a -replacement for repeated names in the list of references -(16.103--106); and the formatting of note numbers, both in the main -text and at the bottom of the page / end of the essay (superscript in -the text, in-line in the notes; 16.25). The code for this last -formatting is also in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, and I've wrapped -it in a test that disables it if you are using the \textsf{memoir} -class, which I believe has its own commands for defining these -parameters. You can also disable it by using the \texttt{footmarkoff} -package option, on which see below. - -\mylittlespace Gildas Hamel pointed out that my default definition, in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, of \textsf{biblatex's} -\cmd{bibnamedash} didn't work well with many fonts, leaving a line of -three dashes separated by gaps. He suggested an alternative, which -I've adopted, with a minor tweak to make the dash thicker, though you -can toy with all the parameters to find what looks right with your -chosen font. The default definition is: -\cmd{renewcommand*\{\textbackslash bibnamedash\}\{\textbackslash - rule[.4ex]\{3em\}\{.6pt\}\}}. - -\mylittlespace With \colmarginpar{\texttt{losnotes} - \&\\\texttt{losendnotes}} this release, and at the request of -Kenneth Pearce, I have added two new \texttt{bibenvironments} to -\textsf{chicago-authordate.bbx}, for use with the \texttt{env} option -to the \cmd{printshorthands} command. The first, \texttt{losnotes}, -is designed to allow a list of shorthands to appear inside footnotes, -while \texttt{losendnotes} does the same for endnotes. Their main -effect is to change the font size, and in the latter case to clear up -some spurious punctuation and white space that I see on my system when -using endnotes. (You'll probably also want to use the option -\texttt{heading=none} in order to get rid of the [oversized] default, -providing your own within the \cmd{footnote} command.) Please see the -documentation of \textsf{shorthand} in -section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} above for further options available -to you for presenting and formatting the list of shorthands. - -\mylittlespace The next-generation backend \textsf{Biber} offers -enhanced functionality in many areas, two of which I've implemented in -this release. If the default definitions don't work well for you, you -can redefine all of them in your document preamble --- see -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §§4.5.1 and 4.5.2. - -\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\cmd{Declare-}\\\texttt{Labelname}} -option allows you to add name fields for consideration when -\textsf{biblatex} is attempting to find a shortened name for in-text -citations. This, for example, allows a compiler (=\textsf{namec}) to -appear in citations without any other intervention from the user, -rather than requiring a \textsf{shortauthor} field as previous -releases of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} did. The default definition -currently is -\texttt{\{shortauthor,author,\\shorteditor,namea,editor,nameb,translator,namec\}}. - -\mylittlespace The -\colmarginpar{\cmd{Declare-}\\\texttt{SortingScheme}} third -\textsf{Biber} enhancement I have implemented allows you to include -almost any field whatsoever in \textsf{biblatex's} sorting algorithms -for the list of references, so that a great many more entries will be -sorted correctly automatically rather than requiring manual -intervention in the form of a \textsf{sortkey} field or the like. -Code in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} sets the \textsf{biblatex} -option \texttt{sorting=cms}, which is a custom scheme, basically a -Chicago-specific variant of the default \texttt{nyt}. You can find -its definition in \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx}. - -\mylittlespace The advantages of this scheme are, specifically, that -any entry headed by one of the supplemental name fields -(\textsf{name[a-c]}), a \textsf{manual} entry headed by an -\textsf{organization}, or an \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} entry -headed by a \textsf{journaltitle} will no longer need a -\textsf{sortkey} set. The main disadvantage should only occur very -rarely, and appears because the supplemental name fields are treated -differently from the standard name fields by \textsf{biblatex}. -Ordinarily, you can set, for example, \texttt{useauthor=false} in the -\textsf{options} field to remove the \textsf{author's} name from -consideration for sorting purposes. The Chicago-specific option -\textsf{usecompiler=false}, however, doesn't remove \textsf{namec} -from such consideration, so in some rare corner cases you may need a -\textsf{sortkey}. - -\subsubsection{{Pre-set \textsf{chicago} Options}} -\label{sec:authpreset} - -At \mymarginpar{\texttt{bookpages=\\true}} the request of Scot -Becker, I have included this rather specialized option, which controls -the printing of the \textsf{pages} field in \textsf{book} entries. -Some bibliographic managers, apparently, place the total page count in -that field by default, and this option allows you to stop the printing -of this information in the reference list. It defaults to true, which -means the field is printed, but it can be set to false either in the -preamble, for the whole document, or on a per-entry basis in the -\textsf{options} field (though rather than use this latter method it -would make sense to eliminate the \textsf{pages} field from the -affected entries). - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{doi=true}} option controls -whether any \textsf{doi} fields present in the .bib file will be -printed in the reference list. It defaults to true, and can be set to -false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a -per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. - -\mylittlespace This \colmarginpar{\texttt{eprint=true}} option controls -whether any \textsf{eprint} fields present in the .bib file will be -printed in the list of references. It defaults to true, and can be -set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a -per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. In \textsf{online} -entries, the \textsf{eprint} field will always be printed. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{isbn=true}} option controls -whether any \textsf{isan}, \textsf{isbn}, \textsf{ismn}, -\textsf{isrn}, \textsf{issn}, and \textsf{iswc} fields present in the -.bib file will be printed in the list of references. It defaults to -true, and can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole -document, or on a per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. - -%\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Once \mymarginpar{\texttt{numbermonth=\\true}} again -at the request of Scot Becker, I have included this option, which -controls the printing of the \textsf{month} field in all the -periodical-type entries when a \textsf{number} field is also present. -Some bibliographic software, apparently, always includes the month of -publication even when a \textsf{number} is present. When all this -information is available the \emph{Manual} (17.181) prints everything, -so this option defaults to true, which means the field is printed, but -it can be set to false either in the preamble, for the whole document, -or on a per-entry basis in the \textsf{options} field. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{url=true}} option controls -whether any \textsf{url} fields present in the .bib file will be -printed in the reference list. It defaults to true, and can be set to -false either in the preamble, for the whole document, or on a -per-entry basis, in the \textsf{options} field. Please note that, as -in standard \textsf{biblatex}, the \textsf{url} field is always -printed in \textsf{online} entries, regardless of the state of this -option. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{includeall=\\true}} is the -one option that rules the six preceding, either printing all the -fields under consideration --- the default --- or excluding all of -them. It is set to \texttt{true} in \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx}, -but you can change it either in the preamble for the whole document or -in the \textsf{options} field of individual entries. The rationale -for all of these options is the availability of bibliographic managers -that helpfully present as much data as possible, in every entry, some -of which may not be felt to be entirely necessary. Setting -\texttt{includeall} to \texttt{true} probably works just fine for -those compiling their .bib databases by hand, but others may find that -some automatic pruning helps clear things up, at least to a first -approximation. Some per-entry work afterward may then polish up the -details. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{cmslos=true}} option alters -\textsf{biblatex's} standard behavior when processing the -\textsf{shorthand} field. Chicago's author-date style only seems to -recommend the use of shorthands as abbreviations for long authors' -names, particularly institutional names, which means the shorthand -will replace only the name part in citations rather than the whole -citation (17.47; bsi:abbreviation:15, iso:electrodoc:15). It suggests -placing the expansion of the abbreviation into the reference list -itself, a procedure that I have implemented in this release using the -\textbf{customc} entry type, which see. Please note that you can -still print a list of shorthands if you wish, and you can also get -back something approaching the \enquote{standard} behavior of -shorthands if you give the \texttt{cmslos=false} option to -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your document preamble. Cf.\ -section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate}, s.v. \enquote{\textbf{shorthand}} -above, and also \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf}. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{nodates=true}} option means -that for all entry types except \textsf{inreference}, \textsf{misc}, -and \textsf{reference}, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will automatically -provide \cmd{bibstring\{nodates\}} for any entry that doesn't -otherwise provide a date for citations and for the heads of entries in -the list of references. If you set \texttt{nodates=false} in your -preamble, then the package won't perform this substitution in any -entry type whatsoever. (The bibstring expands to -\enquote{\texttt{n.d.}} in English.) - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{usecompiler=\\true}} option -enables automatic use of the name of the compiler (in the -\textsf{namec} field) at the head of an entry, usually in the absence -of an \textsf{author}, \textsf{editor}, or \textsf{translator}, in -accordance with the specification (\emph{Manual} 17.41). It may also, -like \texttt{useauthor}, \texttt{useeditor}, and -\texttt{usetranslator}, be disabled on a per-entry basis by setting -\texttt{usecompiler=false} in the \textsf{options} field. The only, -subtle, difference between this switch and those standard -\textsf{biblatex} switches is that this one won't remove -\textsf{namec} from the sorting list, whereas \texttt{useauthor=false} -and \texttt{useeditor=false} do remove the \textsf{author} and -\textsf{editor}. You may, therefore, in corner cases, require a -\textsf{sortkey} in the entry. - -\subsubsection{Style Options -- Preamble} -\label{sec:authuseropts} - -These are parts of the specification that not everyone will wish to -enable. All except the second can be used even if you load the -package in the old way via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, but most users -can just place the appropriate string(s) in the options to the -\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}} call in your preamble. - -\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{annotation}} the request of -Emil Salim, I have added to this version of \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -the ability to produce annotated reference lists. If you turn this -option on then the contents of your \textsf{annotation} (or -\textsf{annote}) field will be printed after the reference. (You can -also use external files to store annotations -- please see -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §~3.10.7 for details on how to do this.) This -functionality is currently in a beta state, so before you use it -please have a look at the documentation for the \textsf{annotation} -field, in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} above. - -\mylittlespace Although \mymarginpar{\texttt{footmarkoff}} the -\emph{Manual} (16.25) recommends specific formatting for footnote (and -endnote) marks, i.e., superscript in the text and in-line in foot- or -endnotes, Charles Schaum has brought it to my attention that not all -publishers follow this practice, even when requiring Chicago style. I -have retained this formatting as the default setup, but if you include -the \texttt{footmarkoff} option, \textsf{biblatex-chicago} will not -alter \LaTeX 's (or the \textsf{endnote} package's) defaults in any -way, leaving you free to follow the specifications of your publisher. -I have placed all of this code in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, so if -you load the package with a call to \textsf{biblatex} instead, then -once again footnote marks will revert to the \LaTeX\ default, but of -course you also lose a fair amount of other formatting, as well. See -section~\ref{sec:loading:auth}, below. - -\mylittlespace Several \colmarginpar{\texttt{headline}} users have -requested an option that turns off the automatic transformations that -produce sentence-style capitalization in the title fields of the -author-date style. If you set this option, the word case in your -title fields will not be changed in any way, that is, this doesn't -automatically transform your titles into headline-style, but rather -allows the .bib file to determine capitalization. It works by -redefining the command \cmd{MakeSentenceCase}, so in the unlikely -event you are using the latter anywhere in your document please be -aware that it will also be turned off there. - -\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\texttt{juniorcomma}} \emph{Manual} -(6.49) states that \enquote{commas are no longer required around - \emph{Jr.}\ and \emph{Sr.},} so by default \textsf{biblatex-chicago} -has followed standard \textsf{biblatex} in using a simple space in -names like \enquote{John Doe Jr.} Charles Schaum has pointed out that -traditional \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ practice was to include the comma, and -since the \emph{Manual} has no objections to this, I have provided an -option which allows you to turn this behavior back on, either for the -whole document or on a per-entry basis. Please note, first, that -numerical suffixes (John Doe III) never take the comma. The code -tests for this situation, and detects cardinal numbers well, but if -you are using ordinals you may need to set this to \texttt{false} in -the \textsf{options} field of some entries. Second, I have fixed a -bug in older releases which always printed the \enquote{Jr.}\ part of -the name immediately after the surname, even when the surname came -before the given names (as in a reference list). The package now -correctly puts the \enquote{Jr.}\ part at the end, after the given -names, and in this position it always takes a comma, the presence of -which is unaffected by this option. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{natbib}} may look like the -standard \textsf{biblatex} option, but to keep the coding of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} simpler for the moment I have -reimplemented it there, from whence it is merely passed on to -\textsf{biblatex}. If you load the Chicago style with -\cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}}, then the option should simply -read \texttt{natbib}, rather than \texttt{natbib=true}. The shorter -form also works if you use \cmd{usepackage}\\ -\texttt{[style=chicago-authordate]\{biblatex\}}, so I hope this -requirement isn't too onerous. - -\mylittlespace At \mymarginpar{\texttt{noibid}} the request of an -early tester, I have included this option to allow you globally to -turn off the \texttt{ibidem} mechanism that -\textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate} uses by default. This mechanism -doesn't actually print \enquote{Ibid,} but rather includes only the -\textsf{postnote} information in a citation, i.e., it will print (224) -instead of (Author 2000, 224). Setting this option will mean that -none of these shortened citations will appear automatically. For more -fine-grained control of individual citations you'll probably want to -use the \cmd{citereset} command, allied possibly with the -\textsf{biblatex}\ \texttt{citereset} option, on which see -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §3.1.2.1. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Kenneth Pearce \colmarginpar{\texttt{shorthandfull}} -has suggested that, in some fields of study, a list of shorthands -providing full bibliographical information may replace the list of -references itself. This option, which must be used in tandem with -\texttt{cmslos=false}, prints this full information in the list of -shorthands, though of course you should remember that any .bib entry -not containing a \textsf{shorthand} field won't appear in such a list. -Please see the documentation of the \textsf{shorthand} field in -section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate} above for information on further -options available to you for presenting and formatting the list of -shorthands. - -\mylittlespace This \mymarginpar{\texttt{strict}} still-experimental -option attempts to follow the \emph{Manual}'s recommendations (16.57) -for formatting footnotes on the page, using no rule between them and -the main text unless there is a run-on note, in which case a short -rule intervenes to emphasize this continuation. I haven't tested this -code very thoroughly, and it's possible that frequent use of floats -might interfere with it. Let me know if it causes problems. - -\subsubsection{Style Options -- Entry} -\label{sec:authentryopts} - -These options are settable on a per-entry basis in the -\textsf{options} field; both relate to the presentation of dates in -citations and the list of references. - -\mylittlespace The \colmarginpar{\texttt{cmsdate}} \emph{Manual} -outlines a series of options for entries with more than one date -(17.124--27). All of these possibilities are available in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} using the \texttt{cmsdate} entry option. It -has 4 possible states relevant to this problem, alongside a fifth -which I discuss below. An example should make this clearer. Let us -assume that an entry presents a reprinted edition of a work by Smith, -first published in 1926 (the \textsf{origdate}) and reprinted in 1985 -(the \textsf{date}): - -\begin{description} -\item[\qquad \textbf{off}:] This is the default. The citation will - look like (Smith 1985). -\item[\qquad \textbf{on}:] The citation will look like (Smith 1926). -\item[\qquad \textbf{new}:] The citation will look like (Smith - 1926/1985). -\item[\qquad \textbf{old}:] The citation will look like (Smith [1926] - 1985). -\end{description} - -As I explained in detail above in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate}, -s.v.\ \enquote{\textbf{date},}\ because \textsf{biblatex's} sorting -algorithms and automatic creation of the \textsf{extrayear} field -refer by default to the \textsf{date} before the \textsf{origdate} -when both are present, there may be situations when you need to have -the \emph{earlier} year in the \textsf{date} field, and the later one -in \textsf{origdate}, e.g., if you have another reprinted work by the -same author originally printed in the same year. -\textsf{Biblatex-chicago-authordate} will automatically detect this -switch, and given the same reprinted work as above, the results will -be as follows: - -\begin{description} -\item[\qquad \textbf{off}:] This is the default. The citation will - look like (Smith 1926a). -\item[\qquad \textbf{on}:] The citation will look like (Smith 1926a). -\item[\qquad \textbf{new}:] The citation will look like (Smith - 1926a/1985). -\item[\qquad \textbf{old}:] The citation will look like (Smith [1926a] - 1985). -\end{description} - -If, \mymarginpar{\texttt{switchdates}} for any reason, simply -switching the \textsf{date} and the \textsf{origdate} isn't possible -in a given entry, then you can put \texttt{switchdates} in the -\textsf{options} field to achieve the same result. Please take a look -at the full documentation of the \textbf{date} field to which I -referred just above, and also at \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and -\textsf{dates-test.bib} for examples of how all this works. - -\mylittlespace The \colmarginpar{New!} \emph{Manual} specifies that -\enquote{a list of works cited need not list newspaper items if these - have been documented in the text} (17.191). This will apply mainly -to \textsf{article} and \textsf{review} entries with -\textsf{entrysubtype} \texttt{magazine}, and involves a parenthetical -citation giving the \textsf{journaltitle} and then the full -\textsf{date}, not just the year, with any other relevant identifying -information incorporated into running text. In order to facilitate -this, I have added a further switch to the \texttt{cmsdate} option -\colmarginpar{\mycolor{\texttt{cmsdate=full}}} --- -\mycolor{\textbf{full}} --- which \emph{only} affects the presentation -of citations, and causes the printing of the full date specification -there. You can use the standard \textsf{biblatex} \texttt{skipbib} -option to keep such entries from appearing in the list of references, -and you may, if your .bib entry is a complete one, also need -\texttt{useauthor=false} in order to ensure that the -\textsf{journaltitle} appears in the citations rather than the -\textsf{author}. - -\mylittlespace As a final note, I should point out that the code in -\textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx} allows \texttt{cmsdate} to be used in -the document preamble as a general setting. This leads to a world of -pain, so I very strongly advise against it, though I'm leaving it in -for testing purposes. - -\subsection{General Usage Hints} -\label{sec:hints:auth} - -\subsubsection{Loading the Style} -\label{sec:loading:auth} - -With the addition of the author-date style to the package, I have -provided two keys for choosing which style to load, \texttt{notes} and -\texttt{authordate}, one of which you put in the options to the -\cmd{usepackage} command. With early versions of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, the standard way of loading the package was -via a call to \textsf{biblatex}, e.g.: -\begin{quote} - \cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-authordate,strict,backend=biber,\%\\ - babel=other,bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex\}} -\end{quote} -Now, the default way to load the style, and one that will in the -vast majority of standard cases produce the same results as the old -invocation, will look like this: -\begin{quote} - \cmd{usepackage[authordate,strict,backend=biber,babel=other,\%\\ - bibencoding=inputenc]\{biblatex-chicago\}} -\end{quote} - -If you read through \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, you'll see that it -sets a number of \textsf{biblatex} options aimed at following the -Chicago specification, as well as setting a few formatting variables -intended as reasonable defaults (see section~\ref{sec:preset:authdate}, -above). Some parts of this specification, however, are plainly more -\enquote{suggested} than \enquote{required,} and indeed many -publishers, while adopting the main skeleton of the Chicago style in -citations, nonetheless maintain their own house styles to which the -defaults I have provided do not conform. - -\mylittlespace If you only need to change one or two parameters, this -can easily be done by putting different options in the call to -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} or redefining other formatting variables in -the preamble, thereby overriding the package defaults. If, however, -you wish more substantially to alter the output of the package, -perhaps to use it as a base for constructing another style altogether, -then you may want to revert to the old style of invocation above. -You'll lose all the definitions in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, -including those to which I've already alluded and also the code that -sets the note number in-line rather than superscript in endnotes or -footnotes. Also in this file is the code that calls -\textsf{cms-american.lbx}, which means that you'll lose all the -Chicago-specific bibstrings I've defined unless you provide, in your -preamble, a \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} command adapted for your -setup, on which see section~\ref{sec:international} below and also -§§~4.9.1 and 4.11.7 in Lehman's \textsf{biblatex.pdf}. - -\mylittlespace What you \emph{will not} lose is the ability to call -the package options \texttt{annotation, strict, cmslos=false} and -\texttt{noibid} (section~\ref{sec:authuseropts}, above), in case these -continue to be useful to you when constructing your own modifications. -There's very little code, therefore, actually in -\textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, but I hope that even this minimal -separation will make the package somewhat more adaptable. Any -suggestions on this score are, of course, welcome. - -\subsubsection{Other Hints} -\label{sec:otherhints:auth} - -Starting with \textsf{biblatex} version 1.5, in order to adhere to the -author-date specification you will need to use \textsf{Biber} to -process your .bib files, as \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ (and its more recent -variants) will no longer provide all the required features. The -previous release of \textsf{Biber} (0.9.5), however, contained bugs -that made it tricky to use with \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. These bugs -have been addressed in 0.9.6, so I recommend you upgrade to it and to -the latest \textsf{biblatex} (1.7), which are designed to work -together. This document assumes that you are using \textsf{Biber}; if -you wish to continue using \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ then you need -\textsf{biblatex} version 1.4c and, if you have any problems with the -current release, possibly \textsf{biblatex-chicago} 0.9.7a. - -\mylittlespace If your .bib file contains a large number of entries -with more than three authors, then you may run into some limitations -of the \textsf{biblatex-chicago} code. The default settings in the -package are \texttt{maxnames=3,minnames=1} in citations and -\texttt{max\-bibnames=10,minbibnames=7} in the list of references. In -practice, this means that an entry like hlatky:hrt, with 5 authors, -will present all of them in the list of references but will truncate -to one in citations, like so: (Hlatky et al. 2002). For the vast -majority of circumstances, these settings are exactly right for the -Chicago author-date specification. However, if \enquote{a reference - list includes another work \emph{of the same date} that would also - be abbreviated as [\enquote{Hlatky et al.}] but whose coauthors are - different persons or listed in a different order, the text citations - must distinguish between them} (16.118). The new -(\textsf{Biber}-only) \textsf{biblatex} option \texttt{uniquelist}, -set for you in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, will automatically -handle many of these situations for you, but it is as well to -understand that it does so by temporarily suspending the limits, -listed above, on how many names to print in a citation. Without -\texttt{uniquelist}, \textsf{biblatex} would present such a work as, -e.g., (Hlatky et al. 2002b), while hlatky:hrt would be (Hlatky et -al. 2002a). This does distinguish between them, but inaccurately, as -it suggests that the two different author lists are exactly the same. -With \texttt{uniquelist}, the two citations might look like (Hlatky, -Boothroyd et al.\ 2002) and (Hlatky, Smith et al.\ 2002), which is -what the specification requires. - -\mylittlespace If, however, the distinguishing name occurs further -down the author list --- in fourth or fifth position in our examples ---- then the default settings would produce citations with all 4 or 5 -names printed, which can become awkwardly long. In such a situation, -you can provide \textsf{shortauthor} fields that look like this: -\{\{Hlatky et al., \textbackslash mkbibquote\{Quality of Life,\}\}\} -and \{\{Hlatky et al., \textbackslash mkbibquote\{Depressive -Symptoms,\}\}\}, using a shortened title to distinguish the -references. This would produce (Hlatky et al., \enquote{Quality of - Life,} 2002) and (Hlatky et al., \enquote{Depressive Symptoms,} -2002), again as the spec requires. There is, unfortunately, no -simpler way that I know of to deal with this situation. - -\mylittlespace One useful rule, when you are having difficulty -creating a .bib entry, is to ask yourself whether all the information -you are providing is strictly necessary. The Chicago specification is -a very full one, but the \emph{Manual} is actually, in many -circumstances, fairly relaxed about how much of the data from a work's -title page you need to fit into a reference. Authors of introductions -and afterwords, multiple publishers in different countries, the real -names of authors more commonly known under pseudonyms, all of these -are candidates for exclusion if you aren't making specific reference -to them, and if you judge that their inclusion won't be of particular -interest to your readers. Of course, any data that may be of such -interest, and especially any needed to identify and track down a -reference, has to be present, but sometimes it pays to step back and -reevaluate how much information you're providing. I've tried to make -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} robust enough to handle the most complex, -data-rich citations, but there may be instances where you can save -yourself some typing by keeping it simple. - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Scot Becker has pointed out to me that the inverse -problem not only exists but may well become increasingly common, to -wit, .bib database entries generated by bibliographic managers which -helpfully provide as much information as is available, including -fields that users may well wish not to have printed (ISBN, URL, DOI, -\textsf{pagetotal}, inter alia). The standard \textsf{biblatex} -styles contain a series of options, detailed in \textsf{biblatex.pdf} -§3.1.2.2, for controlling the printing of some of these fields, and -with this release I have implemented the ones that are relevant to -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}, along with a couple that Scot requested and -that may be of more general usefulness. There is also a general -option to excise with one command all the fields under consideration --- please see section~\ref{sec:authpreset} above. - -\mylittlespace Finally, allow me to reiterate what Philipp Lehman says -in \textsf{biblatex.pdf}, to wit, use \textsf{bibtex8}, rather than -standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX, and avoid the cryptic errors that ensue -when your .bib file gets to a certain size. - -\section{Internationalization} -\label{sec:international} - -Several users have requested that, in line with analogous provisions -in other \enquote{American} \textsf{biblatex} styles (e.g., -\textsf{biblatex-apa} and \textsf{biblatex-mla}), I include facilities -for producing a Chicago-like style in other languages. I have -supplied three lbx files, \textsf{cms-german.lbx}, its clone -\textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx}, and \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, in at least -partial fulfillment of this request. For this release, Baldur -Kristinsson has very kindly provided -\mycolor{\textsf{cms-icelandic.lbx}} for speakers of that language, -while Håkon Malmedal has equally kindly provided -\mycolor{\textsf{cms-norsk.lbx}}, -\mycolor{\textsf{cms-norwegian.lbx}}, and -\mycolor{\textsf{cms-nynorsk.lbx}}. I have added -\mycolor{\textsf{cms-british.lbx}} in order to simplify and to improve -the package's handling of non-American typographical conventions in -English. This means that all --- or at least most --- of the -Chicago-specific bibstrings are now available for documents and -reference apparatuses written in these languages, with, as I intend, -more languages to follow, limited mainly by my finite time and -even-more-finite competence. (If you would like to provide bibstrings -for a language in which you want to work, or indeed correct -deficiencies in the lbx files contained in the package, please contact -me.) - -\mylittlespace Using \mymarginpar{\textbf{babel}} these facilities is -fairly simple. By default, and this functionality remains the same as -it was in the previous release of \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, calls to -\cmd{DeclareLanguage\-Mapping} in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} will -automatically load the American strings, and also \textsf{biblatex's} -American-style punctuation tracking, when you: -\begin{enumerate} -\item Load \textsf{babel} with \texttt{american} as the main text - language. -\item Load \textsf{babel} with \texttt{english} as the main text - language. -\item[] \qquad \emph{or} -\item Do not load \textsf{babel} at all. -\end{enumerate} -(This last is a change from the \textsf{biblatex} defaults --- cp.\ -§~3.9.1 in \textsf{biblatex.pdf} --- but it seems to me reasonable, in -an American citation style, to expect this arrangement to work well -for the majority of users.) - -\mylittlespace If, \colmarginpar{New!} for whatever reason, you wanted -to use \textsf{biblatex-chicago} but retain British typographical -conventions --- punctuation outside of quotation marks, outer quotes -single rather than double, etc.\ --- then you no longer need to follow -the complicated rules outlined in previous releases of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. Instead, simply load \textsf{babel} with -the \texttt{british} option. - -\mylittlespace If you want to use French, German, Icelandic, or -Norwegian strings in the reference apparatus, then you can load -\textsf{babel} with \texttt{french}, \texttt{german}, -\texttt{icelandic}, \texttt{ngerman}, \texttt{norsk}, or -\texttt{nynorsk} as the main document language. You no longer need -any calls to \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} in your document preamble, -since \textsf{bib\-latex-chicago.sty} now automatically provides these -if you load the package in the standard way. - -\mylittlespace You can also define which bibstrings to use on an -entry-by-entry basis by using the \textsf{hyphenation} field in your -bib file, but you will have to make sure that the Chicago-specific -strings for the given language are loaded using a -\cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} call in the preamble. Indeed, if -\texttt{american} isn't the main text language when loading -\textsf{babel}, then in order to have access to those strings you'll -need \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping\{american\}\{cms-american\}} in your -preamble, as \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} won't load it for you. - -\mylittlespace Three other hints may be in order here. Please note, -first, that I haven't altered the standard punctuation procedures used -in any of the other available languages, so commas and full stops will -appear outside of quotation marks, and those quotation marks -themselves will be language-specific. If, for whatever reason, you -wish to follow the Chicago specification and move punctuation inside -quotation marks, then you'll need a declaration of this sort in your -preamble: - -\begin{quote} - \cmd{DefineBibliographyExtras\{german\}\{\%}\\ - \hspace*{2em}\cmd{DeclareQuotePunctuation\{.,\}\}} -\end{quote} - -Second, depending on the nature of your bibliography database, it will -only rarely be possible to process the same bib file in different -languages and obtain completely satisfactory results. Fields like -\textsf{note} and \textsf{addendum} will often contain -language-specific information that won't be translated when you switch -languages, so manual intervention will be necessary. If you suspect -you may have a need to use the same bib file in different languages, -you can minimize the amount of manual intervention required by using -the bibstrings defined either by \textsf{biblatex} or by -\textsf{biblatex-chicago}. Here, a quick read through -\textsf{notes-test.bib} and/or \textsf{dates-test.bib} should give you -an idea of what is available for this purpose --- see esp.\ the -strings \texttt{by}, \texttt{nodate}, \texttt{newseries}, -\texttt{number}, \texttt{numbers}, \texttt{oldseries}, -\texttt{pseudonym}, \texttt{reviewof}, \texttt{revisededition}, and -\texttt{volume}, and also section \ref{sec:formatcommands} above, -esp.\ s.v.\ \enquote{\cmd{partedit}.} - -\mylittlespace Finally, the French and German bibstrings I have -provided may well break with established bibliographical traditions in -those languages, but my main concern when choosing them was to remain -as close as possible to the quirks of the Chicago specification. I -have entirely relied on the judgment of the creators of the Icelandic -and Norwegian localizations in those instances. If you have strong -objections to any of the strings, or indeed to any of my formatting -decisions, please let me know. - -\section{One .bib Database, Two Chicago Styles} -\label{sec:twostyles} - -I have, when designing this package, attempted to keep at least half -an eye on the possibility that users might want to re-use a .bib -database in documents using the two different Chicago styles. I have -no idea whether this will even be a common concern, but I thought I -might gather in this section the issues that a hypothetical user might -face. The two possible conversion vectors are by no means -symmetrical, so I provide two lists, items within the lists appearing -in no particular order. These may well be incomplete, so any -additions are welcome. - -\subsection{Notes -> Author-Date } -\label{sec:conv:notesauth} - -This is, I believe, the simpler conversion, as most well-constructed -.bib entries for the notes \& bibliography style will nearly -\enquote{just work} in author-date, but here are a few caveats -nonetheless: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item You'll need curly brackets in titles, subtitles, etc., to - protect capitalization in the sentence-style defaults of - author-date. -\item You may need to reevaluate your use of shorthands, given that by - default the author-date style uses them in place of authors rather - than in place of the whole citation. The preamble option - \textsf{cmslos=false} may help, but this may leave your document - out-of-spec. -\item The potential problem with multiple author lists containing more - than three names doesn't arise in the notes \& bibliography style, - so the \textsf{shortauthor} fields in such entries may need - alteration according to the instructions in - section~\ref{sec:otherhints:auth} above. -\item Date presentation is relatively simple in notes \& bibliography, - but you'll need to contemplate the \texttt{cmsdate} options from - section~\ref{sec:authentryopts} when doing the conversion to - author-date. -\end{enumerate} - -\subsection{Author-date -> Notes} -\label{sec:conv:authnotes} - -It is my impression that an author-date .bib database is somewhat -easier to construct in the first instance, but subsequently converting -it to notes \& bibliography is a little more onerous. Here are some -of the things you may need to address: - -\begin{enumerate} -\item If you've decided against using the \cmd{partedit} macro and - friends from section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate} above, commands - not strictly necessary for author-date, you'll need to insert them - now. -\item In general, you need to be more careful in notes \& bibliography - about capitalization issues. Fields which only appear once in - author-date --- in the list of references --- may appear in both - long notes and in the bibliography, in different syntactic contexts, - so a quick perusal of the documentation of the \cmd{autocap} macro - in section~\ref{sec:formatting:authdate} above may help. -\item You also need to be more careful about the use of abbreviations, - e.g., in journal names, where the author-date style is more liberal - in their use than the notes \&\ bibliography style. (Cf.\ 17.159.) - The bibstrings mechanism and package options sort much of this out - automatically, but not all. -\item Although you can get away with the \textsf{article} type for all - sorts of periodical entries in author-date, you'll need the - \textsf{review} type for notes \& bibliography. Any - well-constructed \textsf{review} entry should work just fine in - author-date, so this is a one-time conversion. Please see the - documentation in section~\ref{sec:entrytypes}, - s.vv. \enquote{article} and \enquote{review,} above. -\item The \textsf{shorttitle} field is used extensively in notes \& - bibliography to keep short notes short, so you may find that you - need to add a fair number of these to an author-date database. In - general this field is ignored by the latter style, so this, too, - will be a one-time conversion. -\item You may need to add \textsf{letter} entries if you are citing - just one letter from a published collection. See - section~\ref{sec:entrytypes}, s.v. \enquote{letter,} above. -\item The default shorthand presentation differs from one style to the - other. You may need to reconsider how you use this field when - making the conversion. -\item As I explained above in section~\ref{sec:entryfields}, s.v.\ - \enquote{date,} I have included compatibility code in - \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} for the \texttt{cmsdate} (silently - ignored) and \texttt{switchdates} options, along with the automatic - mechanism for reversing \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate}. This - means that you can, in theory, leave all of this alone in your .bib - file when making the conversion, though I'm retaining the right to - revise this if the code in question demonstrably interferes with the - functioning of the notes \&\ bibliography style. -\end{enumerate} - -\section{Interaction with Other Packages} -\label{sec:otherpacks} - -For \mymarginpar{\textbf{endnotes}} users of the \textsf{endnotes} -package --- or of \textsf{pagenote} --- \textsf{biblatex} 0.9 offers -considerably enhanced functionality. Please read Lehman's RELEASE -file and the documentation of the \texttt{notetype} option in -\textsf{biblatex.pdf} §~3.1.2.1. - -\mylittlespace Another \mymarginpar{\textbf{memoir}} problem I have -found occurs because the \textsf{memoir} class provides its own -commands for the formatting of foot- and end-note marks. By default, -\textsf{biblatex-chicago} uses superscript numbers in the text, and -in-line numbers in foot- or end-notes, but I have turned this off when -the \textsf{memoir} class is loaded, reasoning that users of that -package may well have their own ideas about such formatting. - -\mylittlespace The \mymarginpar{\textbf{ragged2e}} footnote mark code -I've just mentioned also causes problems for the \textsf{rag\-ged2e} -package, but in this case a simple workaround is to load -\textsf{biblatex} \emph{after} you've loaded \textsf{ragged2e} in your -document preamble. - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Nick \mymarginpar{\textbf{Xe\LaTeX}} Andrewes alerted -me to problems that appeared when he used the Xe\LaTeX\ engine to -process his files. These included spurious punctuation after -quotation marks in some situations, and also failures in the automatic -capitalization routines. Some of these problems disappeared when I -switched to using Lehman's punctuation-tracking code for -\enquote{American} styles, but some remained. A bug report from -J. P. E.~Harper-Scott suggested a new way of addressing the issue, and -the newest version of Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package (4.4) -incorporates a full fix. This, thankfully, doesn't require turning -off any of Xe\LaTeX 's features, and indeed merely involves upgrading -to the latest version of \textsf{csquotes}, which I recommend doing in -any case. Compatibility with the EU1 encoding is now standard in that -package. - -\section{TODO \&\ Known Bugs} -\label{sec:bugs} - -This release, belatedly, implements the specifications of the 16th -edition of the \emph{Chicago Manual of Style}. I am maintaining the -15th-edition styles for those who may need them, but the majority of -my time will now be devoted to improving, and extending the scope of, -the styles devoted to the most recent edition. I encourage all users -of the notes \&\ bibliography style to upgrade as soon as possible, -and any users of the author-date style who don't require the (until -now) traditional title formatting should do the same. The next -release will contain an author-date style that allows you to maintain -that title formatting while switching in all other respects to the -latest specification. If you still have feature requests for the -older specification, I'll do what I can to include them. - -\mylittlespace Regardless of which edition you are considering, there -are a number of things I haven't implemented. The solution in -brown:bre\-mer to multi-part journal articles obviously isn't optimal, -and I should investigate a way of making it simpler. If the kludge -presented there doesn't appeal, you can always, for the time being, -refer separately to the various parts. Legal citations are another -thorny issue, and implementing them would involve choosing a -particular documentation scheme (for which there exist at least three -widely-used standards in the US), then providing what would be, it has -seemed to me, an entirely separate \textsf{biblatex} style, bearing -little or no relation to the usual look of Chicago citations. Indeed, -the \emph{Manual} (17.275) even makes it clear that you should be -using a different reference book if you are presenting work in the -field, so I've thought it prudent to stay clear of those waters so -far. I have received a request for this feature, however, so when I -have finished the updates for the 16th edition I shall look at it more -closely. If you have other issues with particular sorts of citation, -I'm of course happy to take them on board. The \emph{Manual} covers -an enormous range of materials, but if we exclude the legal citations -it seems to me that the available entry types could be pressed into -service to address the vast majority of them. If this optimism proves -misguided, please let me know. - -\mylittlespace Kenneth L. Pearce has reported a bug that appears when -using multiple citation commands inside the \textsf{annotation} field -of annotated bibliographies. As late as I am with the update to the -16th edition of the \emph{Manual}, I shall attempt to address this in -a future release. If you run into this problem, he suggests placing -all the citations together in parentheses at the end of the -annotation, though on my machine this doesn't always work too well, -either. - -\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\mylittlespace Version 1.5 of \textsf{biblatex} revised the way the -package deals with breaking long URLs and DOIs across lines. The new -code is designed to deal as elegantly as possible with as wide a -variety of cases as possible, but in a few of my test entries it has -caused some line-breaking issues of its own. Depending on the nature -of your cited sources, it may be useful for you to revert to the -older, pre-1.5 \textsf{biblatex} behavior, something which is easily -done by copying and pasting the old definition of the -\cmd{biburlsetup} command into your document preamble. If you look in -the preambles of \textsf{cms-notes-sample.tex} or -\textsf{cms-dates-sample.tex}, you can see the redefinition and copy -it from there, just to see whether it helps your situation. -\textsf{Biblatex} 1.7 also now provides several new counters for -tuning the formatting of URLs, and these may serve you better than the -old code. I have tested them in \textsf{cms-dates-sample.tex} and -they work well. Cf.\ \textsf{biblatex.pdf}, §~4.10.3. - -\mylittlespace The switch to \textsf{Biber} for the author-date -specification means that \textsf{biblatex} now provides considerably -enhanced handling of the various date fields. I have attempted to -document the relevant changes in \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and in -the \textbf{date} discussion in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate}, -above, but it's possible the package may need some changes to cope -with all the permutations. Please let me know if you find something -that looks like a bug. - -\mylittlespace Recent versions of \textsf{biblatex} have introduced -some new entry types for citing multi-volume works. These are largely -aimed at those already using \textsf{Biber}, which provides -much-improved functionality for the \textsf{crossref} field compared -to standard \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ or \textsf{bibtex8}. Depending upon the -time required to implement the changes for the 16th edition, these -types may make it into the package for the next major release, or they -may have to wait until the one after. - -\mylittlespace Roger Hart, Pierric Sans, and a number of other users -have reported a bug in the formatting of title fields. This, as far -as I can tell, has to do with the interaction between -\cmd{MakeSentenceCase} and certain characters at the start of the -title, particularly Unicode ones. It may help for the moment to put -an empty set of curly braces \{\}\ at the start of the field, but I -shall look into this further. - -\mylittlespace This release fixes the other formatting errors of which -I am aware, though users writing in French should be aware of problems -with the \cmd{partedit} command in section~\ref{sec:formatcommands} -above. There also remain the larger issues I've discussed throughout -this documentation, which mainly represent my inability to make all of -\textsf{biblatex-chicago's} formatting functions transparent for the -user, but thankfully Lehman's superb punctuation-tracking code has -preemptively fixed a great many small errors, some of which I hadn't -even noticed before I began testing that functionality. That there -are other micro-bugs seems certain --- if you report them I'll do my -best to fix them. - -\mylittlespace I haven't looked closely at the standard -\textsc{Bib}\TeX\ style by Glenn Paulley, contained in -the \textsf{chicago} package on CTAN, which implements the -author-date specification from the 13th edition of the \emph{Manual}. -If anyone is still using the style, and requires some compatibility -code for it, let me know, and I'll look into it. - -\section{Revision History} -\label{sec:history} - -\textbf{0.9.9g: Released \today} -\begin{itemize} -\item No changes to the 15th-edition styles. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.9f: Released August 15. 2014} -\begin{itemize} -\item Small changes to both styles so that they compile with the - latest \textsf{biblatex} (2.9a). No other fixes. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.9e: Released January 29, 2014} -\begin{itemize} -\item No changes to the 15th-edition styles. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.9d: Released October 30, 2013} -\begin{itemize} -\item I have made just enough changes to the styles to ensure they - compile the test files correctly, but I am marking them as - \enquote{strongly deprecated,} and encourage all users to upgrade as - soon as is practicable to the 16th-edition styles. In the next - release, I shall mark them as \enquote{obsolete,} and they will - receive no further updates. - -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.9c: Released March 15, 2013} -\begin{itemize} -\item No changes to either style, but I am marking them as - \enquote{deprecated,} and encourage all users to upgrade as soon as - is practicable to the 16th-edition styles. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.9b: Released December 6, 2012} -\begin{itemize} -\item I have updated calls to \cmd{DeclareLabelname} and - \cmd{DeclareLabelyear} in .cbx files so that the package works - correctly with the most recent version (2.4) of \textsf{biblatex}. -\item I am grateful to Baldur Kristinsson for providing an Icelandic - localization file for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, called - \mycolor{\textsf{cms-icelandic.lbx}}. You'll see if you look - through it that it is still something of a work in progress, but it - should cover most needs in that language very well. If you would - like to fill in some of the gaps please let me know. -\item I am also grateful to Håkon Malmedal for providing Norwegian - localizations for \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, contained in the files - \mycolor{\textsf{cms-norsk.lbx}}, - \mycolor{\textsf{cms-norwe\-gian.lbx}}, and - \mycolor{\textsf{cms-nynorsk.lbx}}. -\item I have added a new British localization - (\mycolor{\textsf{cms-british.lbx}}) that should make it much - simpler for users to produce documents adhering to that tradition. - For further details on the usage of all these localizations please - see section~\ref{sec:international}, above. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.9a: Released July 30, 2012} -\begin{itemize} -\item I have made a few changes to \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} to - allow the package to work with the latest version (2.0) of - \textsf{biblatex}. In all other respects this release is identical - to 0.9.9. If you do use the package with \textsf{biblatex} 2.0, - please let me know if there are issues I need to address. Thanks to - Charles Schaum for alerting me to some of them. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.9: Released July 5, 2012} - -\mylittlespace \label{deprec:obsol} This release, for the first time, -provides style files implementing the specifications of the 16th -edition of \emph{The Chicago Manual of Style}. As I am continuing to -maintain the older files, here follows a list of changes to the -15th-edition styles since the last release: -\begin{itemize} -\item To continue using the 15th-edition styles, for whatever reason, - please remember to specify either \texttt{notes15} or - \texttt{authordate15} when loading \textsf{biblatex-chicago} in your - preamble. -\item For reprinted books, you can now present more detailed - information about the original edition using the new - \mycolor{\textbf{origlocation}} and \mycolor{\textbf{origpublisher}} - fields. You can also use this field in \textsf{letter} or - \textsf{misc} (with \textsf{entrysubtype}) entries to give the place - where a published or unpublished letter was written. These uses - apply to both styles. -\item Thanks to a patch sent by Kazuo Teramoto, you can now take - advantage of \textsf{biblatex's} facilities for citing - \mycolor{\textbf{eprint}} resources. There is also a new - \mycolor{\texttt{eprint}} option, set to \texttt{true} by default, - which controls the printing of this field in the author-date style. - You can set the option both in the preamble and in the - \textsf{options} field of individual entries. The field will always - print in \textbf{online} entries. -\item I have added a new citation command, - \mycolor{\cmd{citejournal}}, to the notes \&\ bibliography style to - allow you to present journal articles using an alternative short - note form, which may be a clearer form of reference in certain - circumstances. Such short notes will present the name of the - \textsf{author}, the \textsf{journaltitle}, and the \textsf{volume} - number. -\item I have included a very slightly modified version of the standard - \textsf{biblatex} \cmd{citeauthor} command, which may be useful for - references to works from classical antiquity. -\item I have added a new \texttt{cmsdate=\mycolor{full}} switch to the - author-date style, which only affects citations in the text, and - means that a full date specification will appear there, rather than - just the year. If you follow the \emph{Manual's} recommendations - concerning newspaper and magazine articles only appearing in running - text and not in the reference list, this option will help. -\item I have provided a new option, \mycolor{\texttt{headline}}, which - turns off the automatic transformations that produce sentence-style - capitalization in the title fields of the author-date style. If you - set this option, the word case in your title fields will not be - changed in any way, that is, this doesn't automatically transform - your titles into headline-style, but rather allows the .bib file to - determine capitalization. -\item Following a request by Kenneth Pearce, I have added new - facilities for presenting \textbf{shorthands} in the author-date - style. There are two new \texttt{bibenvi\-ronments} which you can set - using the \texttt{env} option to the \cmd{printshorthands} command: - \mycolor{\texttt{losnotes}} formats the list of shorthands so that - it can be presented in a footnote, while - \mycolor{\texttt{losendnotes}} does the same for endnotes. There is - also a new preamble option, \mycolor{\texttt{shorthandfull}}, which - prints the full bibliographical information of each entry inside the - list of shorthands, allowing such a list effectively to replace a - list of references. You need to set the \texttt{cmslos=false} - option as well in order for this to work. -\item Thanks to a coding suggestion from Gildas Hamel, I have - redefined the \cmd{bibnamedash} in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, - which should now by default look a little better in a wider variety - of fonts. -\item At the request of Baldur Kristinsson, I have added - \cmd{DeclareLanguageMap\-ping} commands to - \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} for all the languages - \textsf{biblatex-chicago} currently provides. If you load the style - in the standard way, you no longer need to provide these mappings - manually yourself. -\item I have improved the date handling in both styles, particularly - with regard to date ranges. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.8d: Released November 15, 2011} -\begin{itemize} -\item Some minor fixes to both styles for compatibility with - \textsf{biblatex} 1.7. -\item Kenneth Pearce found an error in the formatting of - \textsf{bookinbook} titles in the author-date style's list of - shorthands. This should work properly now. -\item Jonathan Robinson spotted some inconsistencies in the way the - notes \&\ bibliography style interacts with the \textsf{hyperref} - package. Following his suggestion, short notes now point to long - notes when the latter are available, but to bibliography entries - instead when you have set the \texttt{short} option. -\end{itemize} - -%\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} - -\textbf{0.9.8c: Released October 12, 2011} -\begin{itemize} -\item Emil Salim pointed out some rather basic errors in the - presentation of \textsf{inproceedings} and \textsf{proceedings} - entries, errors that have been present from the first release of the - style(s). These should now, belatedly, have been put right. -\item Minor improvements to coding and documentation. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.8b: Released September 29, 2011} -\begin{itemize} -\item Bad Dates: Christian Boesch alerted me to some date-formatting - errors produced when using the styles with the \texttt{german} - option to \textsf{babel}. A little further investigation revealed - similar problems with \texttt{french}, and before long it became - clear that date handling in \textsf{biblatex-chicago} was generally, - and significantly, sub-optimal. The whole system should now be more - robust and more accurate. -\item The new date-handling code shouldn't require any changes to your - .bib files, but users of the author-date style may want to have a - look at the documentation of the \textsf{letter} and \textsf{misc} - entry types, and of the four date fields, for some information about - how the changes could simplify the creation of their databases. -\item Various other minor improvements. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.8a: Released September 21, 2011} -\begin{itemize} -\item Fixed a series of unsightly errors in the author-date style, - discovered while working on the pending update to the 16th edition. -\item Fixed bugs uncovered in both the author-date and the notes \&\ - bibliography styles thanks to Charles Schaum's adventurous use of - the \textsf{origyear} field. -\item Added two new bibstrings to the cms-*.lbx files to fix potential - bugs in some of the audiovisual entry types. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.8: Released August 31, 2011} - -\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item Starting with \textsf{biblatex} version 1.5, in order to adhere - to the author-date specification you will need to use \textsf{Biber} - to process your .bib files, as \textsc{Bib}\TeX\ (and its more - recent variants) will no longer provide all the required features. - Unfortunately, however, the current release of \textsf{Biber} - (0.9.5) contains bugs that make it tricky to use with - \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. These bugs have been addressed in 0.9.6 - beta, which is available for various operating systems in the - \texttt{development} subdirectory of your SourceForge mirror, e.g., - \href{http://www.mirrorservice.org/sites/download.sourceforge.net/pub/sourceforge/b/project/bi/biblatex-biber/biblatex-biber/development/binaries/}{UK - mirror}. (If, by the time you read this, \textsf{Biber} 0.9.6 has - already been released, then so much the better.) Please see the - start of \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} for more details. -\item The switch to \textsf{Biber} for the author-date specification - means that \textsf{biblatex} now provides considerably enhanced - handling of the various date fields. I have attempted to document - the relevant changes in \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} and in the - \textbf{date} discussion in section~\ref{sec:fields:authdate}, - above, but in my testing the only alterations I've so far had to - make to my .bib files involve adhering more closely to the - instructions for specifying date ranges. \textsf{Biber} doesn't - like \{\texttt{1968/75}\}, and will ignore it. Either use - \{\texttt{1968/1975}\} or use \{\texttt{1968-{}-75}\} in the - \textsf{year} field. -\item In the notes \&\ bibliography style, and mainly in - \textsf{article}, \textsf{letter}, \textsf{misc}, and - \textsf{review} entries, previous releases of - \textsf{biblatex-chicago} recommended using the \cmd{isdot} macro - when you needed both to define a field and not have it appear in the - printed output. This mechanism no longer works in \textsf{biblatex} - 1.6, and while addressing the problem I realized that relying on it - covered over some inconsistencies and bugs in my code, so from this - release forward you will need to modify your .bib and .tex files to - use other, more standard mechanisms to achieve the same ends, in - particular the \cmd{headlesscite} commands and declaring - \texttt{useauthor=false} in the \textsf{options} field. Please - consult the documentation in section~\ref{sec:formatcommands}, s.v.\ - \enquote{\cmd{isdot},} for a list of example entries where you can - see these changes at work. -\end{itemize} - -Other New Features: - -\begin{itemize} -\item Fixed the \cmd{smartcite} citation command in, and added a - \cmd{smartcites} command to, \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx}, so that the - notes \& bibliography style no longer prints parentheses around - citations produced using \cmd{autocite(s)} commands inside - \cmd{footnote} commands. Many thanks to Louis-Dominique Dubeau for - pointing out this error. -\item Rembrandt Wolpert and Aaron Lambert pointed out an issue with a - command (\cmd{lbx@fromlang}) that \textsf{biblatex} no longer - defines, and Charles Schaum very kindly suggested a temporary - workaround in a newsgroup post, a workaround that should no longer - be necessary. -\item Version 1.6 of \textsf{biblatex} no longer allows you to - redefine the \texttt{minnames} and \texttt{maxnames} options in the - \cmd{printbibliography} command, so I've defined - \texttt{minbibnames} and \texttt{maxbibnames} in - \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, instead. These parameters have been - available since version 1.1, so this is now the earliest version of - \textsf{biblatex} that will work with the Chicago styles. Of - course, if the (Chicago-recommended) values of these options don't - suit your needs, you can redefine them in your document preamble. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.7a: Released March 17, 2011} -\begin{itemize} -\item Added \cmd{smartcite} command to \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx} so - that the notes \&\ bibliography style will work with - \textsf{biblatex} 1.3. -\item Added bibstrings \texttt{byconductor} and \texttt{cbyconductor} - to the .lbx files, mistakenly omitted in version 0.9.7. -\item Minor fixes to the docs. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.7: Released February 15, 2011} - -\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item The \textbf{customa} and \textbf{customb} entry types are now - obsolete. Any such entries will be ignored. Please change any that - remain to \textbf{letter} and \textbf{bookinbook}, respectively. -\item If you still have any \textbf{customc} entries containing - introductions, prefaces, or the like, please change them to - \textbf{suppbook}. I have recycled \textsf{customc} for another - purpose, on which see below. -\end{itemize} - -Other New Features: - -\begin{itemize} -\item At the request of Johan Nordstrom, I have added three new - audiovisual entry types to both styles, \textbf{audio}, - \textbf{music}, and \textbf{video}. The documentation of - \textsf{audio} in sections~ \ref{sec:entrytypes} and - \ref{sec:types:authdate} above contains an overview of the three, - and the details for each type are to be found under their individual - headings. -\item I have transformed the \textbf{customc} entry type to enable - alphabetized cross-references --- the \enquote{c} is meant to be - mnemonic --- to other, separate entries in a reference list or - bibliography. In particular, this facilitates cross-references to - other names in a list, rather than to other works. In author-date, - in a procedure recommended by the \emph{Manual}, this now allows you - to expand shorthands inside the reference list rather than in a list - of shorthands. In both styles, you can now provide a pointer to the - main entry if a reader is looking an author up under, e.g., a - pseudonym or other alternative name. -\item I have introduced the \textbf{userc} field, intended to simplify - the printing of the cross-references provided by \textsf{customc} - entries. The standard \cmd{nocite} command works as well, but the - additional mechanism may be more convenient in some circumstances. -\item You can now provide an \textbf{eventdate} in \textsf{music} - entries to identify, e.g., a particular recording session. It will - be printed just after the \textsf{title}. -\item In the notes \&\ bibliography style, I have now implemented the - \textbf{shorthandintro} field, which allows you to change the string - introducing a shorthand in the first, long note. It works just as - it does in the standard \textsf{biblatex} styles. -\item At the request of Scot Becker, I have added six new - field-exclusion options to both styles, all of which can be set both - in the document preamble and/or in the \textsf{options} field of - individual .bib entries. Three of these --- \texttt{doi}, - \texttt{isbn}, and \texttt{url} --- are standard \textsf{biblatex} - options, the others --- \texttt{bookpages}, \texttt{includeall}, and - \texttt{numbermonth} --- are \textsf{chicago}-specific. See the - docs in sections~\ref{sec:chicpreset} and \ref{sec:authpreset}, - above. -\item At the request of Charles Schaum, I've added the - \texttt{juniorcomma} option to both styles, which can be set in the - document preamble and/or in the \textsf{options} field of individual - entries. It allows you to get the traditional comma between a - surname and \enquote{Jr.} or \enquote{Sr.} -\item Fixed an old inaccuracy in the presentation of \enquote{Jr.} and - \enquote{Sr.,} so that they now appear at the end of names printed - surname first in bibliographies and reference lists. -\item Thanks to Andrew Goldstone, I fixed some old inaccuracies in the - syntax of shortened notes and bibliography entries presenting - multiple contributions to one multi-author (or single-author) - volume. -\item I've altered the directory structure of the archive containing - this release. Files were multiplying, and look set to multiply - still further, so I've copied the structure used by Lehman for - \textsf{biblatex} itself. -\item Fixed an old bug, which I'd guess was triggered quite rarely, in - the formatting of publication information in long notes. -\item Fixed another bug in author-date where the colon separating - titles and subtitles was in the wrong font. The \textsf{biblatex} - \texttt{punctfont} option solved this. -\item Fixed a punctuation bug in \textsf{InReference} entries in the - notes \&\ bibliography style. Also fixed \textsf{title} - presentation in \textsf{Reference} entries in author-date. -\item Fixed some inaccuracies in the tests establishing priority - between \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate} fields. These arose - when date ranges were involved, and it's possible I haven't yet - addressed all possible permutations of the problem. -\item Added several new bibstrings to the \textsf{cms-*.lbx} files for - the new audiovisual entry types. This means that the - \textsf{editortype} fields can now be set to \texttt{director}, - \texttt{producer}, or \texttt{conductor}, depending on your needs. - You can also set the fields to \texttt{none}, which eliminates all - identifying strings, and which is useful for identifying performers - of various sorts. -\item Minor improvements to documentation. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.5a: Released September 7, 2010} -\begin{itemize} -\item Quick fix for an elementary and show-stopping mistake in - \textsf{biblatex-chica\-go.sty}, a mistake disguised if you load - \textsf{csquotes}, which I do in all my test files. Mea culpa. - Many thanks indeed to Israel Jacques and Emil Salim for pointing - this out to me. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9.5: Released September 3, 2010} - -\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item All the custom entry types --- \textbf{customa}, - \textbf{customb}, and \textbf{customc} --- are now deprecated. They - will still work for the time being, but please be aware that in the - next major release they will no longer function, at least not as you - might be expecting. Please change your .bib files to use - \textbf{letter} (=\textbf{customa}), \textbf{bookinbook} - (=\textbf{customb}), and \textbf{suppbook} (=\textbf{customc}) - instead. -\item If by some chance anyone is still using the old \cmd{custpunctc} - macro, it is now obsolete. It really shouldn't be needed, but let - me know if I'm wrong. -\end{itemize} - -%\vspace{2\baselineskip} - -Other New Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item The Chicago author-date style is now implemented in the - package, and is fully documented in section~\ref{sec:authdate}, - above. -\item The default way of loading the style(s) has slightly changed. - You should put either \texttt{notes} or \texttt{authordate} in the - options to \textsf{biblatex-chicago}, e.g.: - \begin{quote} - \cmd{usepackage[authordate,more options% - \,\ldots]\{biblatex-chicago\}} - \end{quote} -\item With the addition of the second Chicago style, I have thought it - appropriate to alter both the name of the package and the names of - the files it contains. The package is now \textsf{biblatex-chicago} - instead of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df}, and the following - files have been renamed: - \begin{itemize} - \item \textsf{chicago-notes-df.cbx} is now \textsf{chicago-notes.cbx} - \item \textsf{chicago-notes-df.bbx} is now \textsf{chicago-notes.bbx} - \item \textsf{sample.tex} is now \textsf{cms-notes-sample.tex} - \item \textsf{sample.pdf} is now \textsf{cms-notes-sample.pdf} - \item \textsf{chicago-test.bib} is now \textsf{notes-test.bib} - \item \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df.pdf} (this file) is now - \textsf{biblatex-chicago.pdf} - \end{itemize} - The following files have been added: - \begin{itemize} - \item \textsf{chicago-authordate.cbx} - \item \textsf{chicago-authordate.bbx} - \item \textsf{cms-dates-sample.tex} - \item \textsf{cms-dates-sample.pdf} - \item \textsf{dates-test.bib} - \end{itemize} - The following files have retained their old names: - \begin{itemize} - \item \textsf{cms-american.lbx} - \item \textsf{cms-french.lbx} - \item \textsf{cms-german.lbx} - \item \textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx} - \item \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} - \end{itemize} -\item I have implemented the \textsf{pubstate} field, slightly - differently yet compatibly in the two styles, to provide a simpler - mechanism for identifying a reprinted book. In the author-date - style, it is highly recommended you use it, as it sorts out some - complicated formatting questions automatically. In the notes \&\ - bibliography style it isn't strictly necessary, but may be useful - anyway and easier to remember than the old system. See the - documentation under \textsf{pubstate} in - sections~\ref{sec:entryfields} and \ref{sec:fields:authdate}, above. -\item Users of \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes} no longer need a - \textsf{shortauthor} field in author-less \textsf{manual} entries, - or in author-less \textsf{article} or \textsf{review} entries with a - \texttt{maga\-zine} \textsf{entrysubtype}. The package will now - automatically take an author for short notes from the - \textsf{organization} field for \textsf{manual} entries and from the - \textsf{journaltitle} field for the others. You can still use a - \textsf{shortauthor} field if you want, but it's no longer - necessary. (This also holds for \textsf{chicago-authordate}.) -\item Date presentation in the \textsf{misc} entry type (with - \textsf{entrysubtype}) has changed to fix an inaccuracy. You can - now use the \textsf{date} and \textsf{origdate} fields to - distinguish between two sorts of archival source: letters and - \enquote{letter-like} sources use \textsf{origdate}, interviews and - other non-letters use \textsf{date}. The only difference is in how - the date is printed, so current .bib entries will continue to work - fine, albeit with minor inaccuracies in the case of non-letter-like - sources. See the docs on \textbf{misc} in - sections~\ref{sec:entrytypes} and \ref{sec:types:authdate}, above. -\item When only one date is presented in a \textsf{patent} entry --- - either in the \textsf{date} or \textsf{origdate} field --- this will - now always be used as the filing date. In - \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}, this makes a change from the - previous (incorrect) behavior. -\item I have included the option \texttt{dateabbrev=false} in the - default settings for \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes}. This ensures - that the long month names are printed, as otherwise recent releases - of \textsf{biblatex} print the abbreviated ones by default. -\item The provision of punctuation in \textsf{entrysubtype} - \texttt{classical} entries has been improved, allowing the comma to - appear before certain kinds of location specifiers even when citing - works by their traditional divisions. See \emph{Manual} 17.253. - (This applies to both Chicago styles.) -\item The \textsf{number} field in \textsf{article}, - \textsf{periodical}, and \textsf{review} entries now allows you to - include a series or range of numbers in the field, with the style - automatically providing the correct bibstring (singular or plural). -\item I have removed and altered bibstrings in the .lbx files to take - advantage of the new \cmd{bibsstring} and \cmd{biblstring} commands - in \textsf{biblatex}, and added one new string - (\texttt{origpubyear}) needed by - \textsf{biblatex-chicago-authordate}. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9a: Released March 20, 2010} -\begin{itemize} -\item Quick fixes for compatibility with \textsf{biblatex} 0.9a. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.9: Released March 18, 2010} - -\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item The \textbf{userd} field is now obsolete. All information it - used to hold should be placed in the \textsf{edition} field. -\item The \textbf{origyear} field is now obsolete in - \textsf{biblatex}. It has been replaced by \textbf{origdate}, and - because the latter allows a full date specification, I have been - able to make the operation of \textsf{customa} (=\,\textsf{letter}), - \textsf{misc} (with an \textsf{entrysubtype}), and \textsf{patent} - entries more intuitive. The RELEASE file contained in this package - gives the short instructions on how to update your .bib files, and - you can also consult the documentation of those entry types above. -\item The modified \textsf{csquotes.cfg} file I provided in earlier - releases is now obsolete, and has been removed from the package. - Please upgrade to the latest version of \textsf{csquotes} and, if - you are still using my modified .cfg file, remove it from your \TeX\ - search path, or at the very least excise the code I provided. -\end{itemize} - -Other New Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item Added the files \textsf{cms-german.lbx} (with its clone - \textsf{cms-ngerman.lbx}) and \textsf{cms-french.lbx}, which allow - the creation of Chicago-like references in those languages. See - section \ref{sec:international} above for details on usage. -\item Added the \texttt{annotation} package option to allow the - creation of annotated bibliographies. This code is still not - entirely polished yet, but it is usable. Please see page - \pageref{sec:annote} above for instructions and hints. -\item Added \textsf{biblatex's} new \textbf{bookinbook} entry type, - which currently functions as an alias of the \textsf{customb} type. - As \textsf{biblatex} now provides standard equivalents for all of - the custom types I initially found it necessary to provide --- - \textsf{letter}~= \textsf{customa}, \textsf{bookinbook}~= - \textsf{customb}, and \textsf{suppbook} \& \textsf{suppcollection}~= - \textsf{customc} --- it may soon be time to prune out the custom - types to enhance compatibility with other \textsf{biblatex} styles. - I shall give plenty of warning before I do so. -\item In line with the new system adopted in \textsf{biblatex} 0.9, - using the \textsf{editortype} field turns off the usual string - concatenation mechanisms of the Chicago style. See Lehman's RELEASE - file for a discussion of this. -\item I have added support for the new \textsf{editor[a--c]} and - \textsf{editor[a--c]type} fields, and they work just as in standard - \textsf{biblatex}, though I'm uncertain how much use they'll get - from users of the Chicago style. -\item I have added many bibstrings to the .lbx files to help with - internationalization. The new ones that you might want to use in - your .bib files include: \texttt{pseudonym}, \texttt{nodate}, - \texttt{revisededition}, \texttt{numbers}, and \texttt{reviewof}. - Please see section~\ref{sec:international} for a fuller list. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.9d: Released February 17, 2010} -\begin{itemize} -\item Chris Sparks and Aaron Lambert both found formatting bugs in the - 0.8.9c code. I've fixed these bugs, and am releasing this version - now, the last in the 0.8.9 series. The next release of - \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df}, due as soon as possible, will - contain many more significant changes, including those necessary for - it to function properly with the recently-released \textsf{biblatex} - version 0.9. In the meantime, at least version 0.8.9d should produce - more accurate output. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.9c: Released November 4, 2009} -\begin{itemize} -\item Emil Salim noticed that the \emph{ibidem} mechanism wasn't - working properly, printing the page number after \enquote{Ibid} even - when the page reference of the preceding citation was identical. - The fix for this involved setting \texttt{loccittracker=constrict} - in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty}, something you'll have to do - manually yourself if you're loading the package via a call to - \textsf{biblatex} rather than to \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. -\item Several users have reported unwanted behavior when repeated - names in bibliographies are replaced with the \texttt{bibnamedash}. - This release should fix both when the \texttt{bibnamedash} appears - and what punctuation follows it. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.9b: Released September 9, 2009} -\begin{itemize} -\item Fixed a long-standing bug in formatting names in the - bibliography. The package now correctly places a comma after the - reversed name that begins the entry, using \textsf{biblatex's} - \cmd{revsdnamedelim} command. Many thanks to Johanna Pink for - catching my rather egregious error. -\item While fixing some formatting errors that cropped up when using - the newest version of \textsf{biblatex} (0.8h at time of writing), I - also spotted some more venerable bugs in the code for using - shortened cross-references for citing multiple entries in a - collection of essays or letters. I believe this now works - correctly, but please let me know if you discover differently. -\item Joseph Reagle noticed that endnote marks (produced using the - \textsf{endnotes} package) did not receive the - same treatment as footnote marks. I have rectified this, placing - the code in \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} so that you can turn it - off either by using the old package-loading system or by setting the - \texttt{footmarkoff} package option when loading - \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. -\item Updates to Lehman's \textsf{csquotes} package have rendered my - modifications in \textsf{csquotes.cfg} obsolete. Please use the - latest version of \textsf{csquotes} (4.4a at time of writing) and - ignore my file, which will disappear in a later release. -\item At the request of Will Small, I have included some code, still - in an alpha state, to allow you to specify, in the bibliography, the - original publication details of essays which you are citing from - later reprints (a \emph{Collected Essays} volume, for example). See - the documentation above under the \textsf{\mycolor{reprinttitle}} - field if you would like to test this functionality. -\end{itemize} - -%\enlargethispage{-3\baselineskip} - -\textbf{0.8.9a: Released July 5, 2009} -\begin{itemize} -\item Slight changes for compatibility with \textsf{biblatex} 0.8e. - The package still works with 0.8c and 0.8d, as well. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.9: Released July 2, 2009} - -\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item The \textbf{single-letter bibstrings} (\cmd{bibstring\{a\}}, - \cmd{bibstring\{b\}}, etc.) are now obsolete. You should replace - any still present in your .bib file with \cmd{autocap} commands --- - see §~3.8.4 of \textsf{biblatex.pdf}. -\end{itemize} - -Other New Features: -\begin{itemize} -\item The default way of loading the package is now with - - \cmd{usepackage[further-options]\{biblatex-chicago\}} - - rather than - - \cmd{usepackage[style=chicago-notes-df,further-options]\{biblatex\}}. - - Please see section~\ref{sec:loading} above for details and hints. -\item Package-specific bibstrings have been removed from the .cbx and - .bbx files and are now gathered in a new file, - \textbf{cms-american.lbx}, which changes the way the package - interacts with \textbf{babel}. It is now somewhat simpler if you - want the defaults, but somewhat more complex if you require - non-standard features. Please see section~\ref{sec:otherpacks} - above for more details. -\item Two new entry types have been added: \textbf{artwork} for works - of visual art excluding photographs, and \textbf{image} for - photographs. See the documentation of \textsf{artwork} for how to - create .bib entries for both types. -\item Added the new bibliography and entry option - \textbf{usecompiler}, set to \texttt{true} by default. This - streamlines the code that finds a name to head an entry - (\textbf{author -> editor [or namea] -> translator [or nameb] -> - compiler [namec] -> title}). The whole system should work more - consistently now, but do see the \textsf{author} and \textsf{namec} - documentation for improved notes on how to use it. -\item Added the new bibliography option \textbf{footmarkoff}, to turn - off the optional in-line (as opposed to superscript) formatting of - the marks in foot- or endnotes. You only need this if you load the - package with the new default \cmd{usepackage\{biblatex-chicago\}}; - users loading it the old way get default \LaTeX\ formatting. -\item At Matthew Lundin's request, I have added the citation command - \textbf{\textbackslash head\-lesscite}, which works like - \cmd{headlessfullcite} but allows \textsf{biblatex} to decide - whether to print the full or the short note. -\item Fully adopted \textsf{biblatex's} system for providing - end-of-entry punctuation, which should solve some of the bugs users - have been finding. See section~\ref{sec:otherhints}, above, and do - please let me know if inconsistencies remain. -\item Added a modified \textbf{csquotes.cfg} file to address issues - users were having when using the \textbf{Xe\LaTeX} engine in - combination with \textsf{biblatex-chicago}. See - section~\ref{sec:otherpacks}, above. -\item Added \texttt{natbib} option to allow users of the default setup - to continue to benefit from \textsf{biblatex's} \textsf{natbib} - compatibility code. Thanks to Bennett Helm for pointing out this - issue. -\item Added a \textbf{shorthandibid} option to allow the printing of - \emph{ibid.}\ in consecutive references to an entry that contains a - \textsf{shorthand} field. Thanks to Chris Sparks for calling my - attention to this problem. -\item While investigating the preceding, I noticed failures when - combining the \texttt{short} option with a \textsf{shorthand} field. - The package now actually does what it has always claimed to do under - \textbf{shorthand}. -\item Many small bug fixes and improvements to the documentation. -\end{itemize} - -To Do: - -\begin{itemize} -\item The shorthand vs \emph{ibid.}\ question may need more careful - addressing in some cross references, and also in relation to the - \texttt{noibid} package option. -\item Charles Schaum has quite rightly pointed out the inconsistency - in my naming conventions --- \textsf{biblatex-chicago.sty} as - opposed to \textsf{chicago-notes-df.cbx}, for example. I'm going to - delay a decision on which way to go with this until a later release. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.5a: Released June 14, 2009} - -\begin{itemize} -\item Quick and dirty fixes to bibliography strings to allow - compatibility with \textsf{biblatex} version 0.8d. If you are still - using 0.8c, then I would wait for the next version of - \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df}, which is due soon. See README. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.5: Released January 10, 2009} - -\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features: - - \begin{itemize} - \item The \textbf{\textbackslash custpunct} commands are now - deprecated --- Lehman's \enquote{American} punctuation tracking - facilities should handle quoted text automatically, assuming you - remember always to use \textbf{\textbackslash mkbibquote} in your - database. If you still need \cmd{custpunct}, please let me know, - as it may be an error in the style. - \item With \cmd{custpunct} no longer needed, the toggles activated - by placing \enquote{\texttt{plain}} in the \textbf{type} or - \textbf{userb} fields are also deprecated. - \end{itemize} - -Other New Features: - -\begin{itemize} -\item At least \textbf{biblatex 0.8b} is now required --- 0.8c works - fine, as well. -\item I now \emph{strongly recommend} that you use \textbf{babel} with - \enquote{\texttt{american}} as the main text language. See - section~\ref{sec:otherpacks} above for further details. -\item The \textbf{customc} entry type has been revised, allowing you - to cite any sort of supplementary material using the \textbf{type} - field instead of relying on toggles in the \textsf{introduction}, - \textsf{afterword}, and \textsf{foreword} fields, though these - latter still work. The two new entry types \textbf{suppbook} and - \textbf{suppcollection} are both aliased to \textsf{customc}, and - therefore work in exactly the same way. -\item The new entry type \textbf{suppperiodical} is aliased to - \textbf{review}. -\item The new entry type \textbf{letter} is aliased to - \textbf{customa}. -\item In \textbf{inreference} entries the \textsf{postnote} field of - all \cmd{cite} commands is now treated like data in \textsf{lista}, - that is, it will be placed within quotation marks and prefaced with - the appropriate string. The only difference is that you can only - put one such article name in \textsf{postnote}, as it isn't a list - field. -\item I've set the new \textsf{biblatex} option \texttt{usetranslator} - to \texttt{true} by default, which means entries will automatically - be alphabetized by their \textsf{translator} in the absence of an - \textsf{author} or an \textsf{editor}. -\item A host of small formatting errors were eliminated, nearly all of - them through adopting Lehman's punctuation tracker. -\item In the main body of this documentation, I've added some - \mycolor{\textbf{color coding}} to help you more quickly to identify - entry types and fields that are either new or that have undergone - significant revision. -\end{itemize} - -To Do: - -\begin{itemize} -\item Separate out \enquote{options} from the basic citation - \enquote{style,} using a \LaTeX\ style file. This is an - architectural change recommended by Lehman. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.2.2: Released November 24, 2008} - -\begin{itemize} -\item Fixed spurious commas appearing in some bibliography entries, - spotted by Nick Andrewes. While investigating this I noticed a more - general problem with punctuation after italicized titles ending with - question marks or exclamation points. This will be addressed in - forthcoming revisions both of \textsf{biblatex} and of this package. -\item Nick also reported some problems with spurious punctuation in - the bibliography when using XeLaTeX. I haven't yet been able to pin - down the exact cause of these, but if you are using XeLaTeX and are - having (or have solved) similar problems I'd be interested to hear - from you. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.2: Released November 3, 2008} - -\begin{itemize} -\item Fixed several formatting glitches between citations in multicite - commands (spotted by Joseph Reagle) and also after some prenotes. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.8.1: Released October 22, 2008} - -\mylittlespace Obsolete and Deprecated Features: - -\begin{itemize} -\item The \textbf{origlocation} field is now obsolete, and has been - replaced by \textbf{lista}. Please update your .bib files - accordingly. -\item The single-letter \textbf{\textbackslash bibstring} commands I - provided in version 0.7 are now deprecated. In most cases, you'll - be able to take advantage of the automatic contextual capitalization - facilities introduced in this release, but if you still need the - single-letter \cmd{bibstring} functionality then you should switch - to \cmd{autocap}, as I shall be removing the single-letter - \texttt{bibstrings} in a future release. See above under - \textbf{\textbackslash autocap} for all the details. -\item The \textbf{userd} field is now deprecated, as \textsf{biblatex} - 0.8 allows all forms of data to be included in the \textsf{edition} - field. I shall be removing \textsf{userd} in a future release, so - please update your .bib files as soon as is convenient. -\end{itemize} - -Other New Features: - -\begin{itemize} -\item Updated the .bbx and .cbx files to work with \textsf{biblatex} - 0.8. This most recent version of \textsf{biblatex} is now required - for \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df} to work. -\item Added the \textbf{usera} field, which holds supplemental - information about a \textsf{journaltitle} in \textsf{article} and - \textsf{review} entries. See the documentation of the field for - details. -\item Added the \textbf{\textbackslash citetitles} multicite command - to fix a problem with spurious punctuation when multiple titles were - listed. -\item Added the \textbf{\textbackslash Citetitle} command to help with - automatic capitalization of titles when they occur at the beginning - of a note. -\item Minor punctuation fixes in \textsf{biblatex-chicago-notes-df.bbx}. -\end{itemize} - -To Do: - -\begin{itemize} -\item Integrate \textsf{biblatex's} American punctuation facilities. -\item Separate out \enquote{options} from the basic citation - \enquote{style,} using a \LaTeX\ style file. This is an - architectural change recommended by Lehman. -\item Investigate and possibly integrate the new entry types provided - in \textsf{biblatex} 0.8. -\end{itemize} - -\textbf{0.7: First public release, September 18, 2008} - -\end{document} |